Tektronix Switch 3000 Users Manual Operation Reference, Software V5.3

3000 to the manual 92c8e3a9-6e5e-4c31-a905-79d680c13fa3

2015-02-03

: Tektronix Tektronix-Switch-3000-Users-Manual-464199 tektronix-switch-3000-users-manual-464199 tektronix pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 332

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Operation Reference

Grass Valley Model 3000
Digital Production Switcher
Software Release 5.3
071-0158-00

Revised Printing: February, 1998

Customer Support
Telephone
Numbers
North America
(800) 547-8949
Fax: (530) 478-3181
Elsewhere
Distributor or sales office
from which equipment was
purchased.

Tektronix Grass Valley Products is committed to providing the
most responsive and professional product support available. We
have a fully staffed, highly trained support team ready to respond
to anything from a simple question to an emergency repair. Support is available via telephone or email. For new and updated customer support documents, as well as new product information,
check the Tektronix web site and Grass Valley’s web page.

Web Addresses
Grass Valley Email
Support
GVGSERVICE@tek.com
Grass Valley Web Page
http://www.tek.com/Grass_
Valley
Tektronix Web Site
http://www.tek.com

Postal Addresses
Mail
Tektronix Grass Valley
Products
P.O. Box 1114
Grass Valley, CA 95945
Shipping
Tektronix Grass Valley
Products
400 Providence Mine Rd.,
Nevada City, CA 95959

Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending.
Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved. TEKTRONIX, TEK, Grass
Valley Group, Borderline, E-MEM, TEN-X, Wavelink, and
are registered
trademarks, and Air Link, Auto Match, Doubletake, E-Disk, Eagle V, Emphasys,
EZ-Link, 409, Grass Valley, Horizon, Jogger, Kadenza, Kaleidoscope, K-Mask,
Key-Layer, Key-Link, Krystal, MASTER System, Master 21, MAX, Omni-Key, Performer, Programmed Motion, Silhouette, Softset, SqueezeBack, Streamline, Super
Edit, TEN-20, 20-TEN, Trace, TrailBlazer, VideoDesktop, Flex-Time, and XEDL are
trademarks of Tektronix, Inc. P.O. Box 1000 Wilsonville, OR 97070-1000 U.S.A.
The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject
to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Tektronix, Inc. Tektronix assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this publication.
Tektronix, Inc., Video and Networking Division, P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, California 95945 U.S.A.

Contents

Preface
Welcome to the Model 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Organization of This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
How to Contact Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button and Panel Knob References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft Button and Soft Knob References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xiii
xiii
xiv
xiv

Section 1 — System Overview
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Processor Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4
1-4
1-5
1-6

Video and Key Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Video Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
iii

Contents

Description of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Dual Chroma Keyer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Borderline Key Edge Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Secondary Wipe Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Safe Title/Action Area Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Mix/Effects Clean Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Frame Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Effects Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Tally Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Tally Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Remote Auxiliary Bus Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Chroma Key Auto Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Main Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Auto Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Subpanel Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Menu Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Primary Source Selection (Primary Crosspoints) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Shift Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Crosspoint Button Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Secondary Source Selection (Re-entry Crosspoints) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Uncal Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Key Delegation Indicators (Model 3000-2 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Transition Subpanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Next Transition Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
M/E Next Transition Buttons (Standard Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
M/E Next Transition Buttons (Layered Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
PGM-PST/DSK Next Transition Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Transition Type Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Transition Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Key Transition Buttons (3000-3 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Key Mix Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
DSK Key Transition Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Contents
Mix/Effects Effects Memory Subpanel (3000-3 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learn and Recall Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-MEM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learning Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crosspoint Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mix/Effects E-MEM Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mix/Effects E-MEM Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-24
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-26
2-27

Keyer Subpanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyer Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEY ON Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Type Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Source Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Split Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Key Modifier Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Borderline Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Preview Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mask Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-33
2-34
2-35
2-35
2-38
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-41
2-42

Matte Subpanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matte Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATTE SEL Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Background Mattes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matte Modifier Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-43
2-44
2-44
2-45
2-45

Chroma Keyer Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chroma Keyer Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chroma Keyer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chroma Keyer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-48
2-49
2-49
2-50

Preview Subpanel (3000-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-MEM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effects and Keyframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learning Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crosspoint Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keypad with Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master E-MEM Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effect Editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Working Buffer Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modes of Insertion/Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-55
2-56
2-56
2-57
2-60
2-61
2-61
2-62
2-62
2-72
2-73
2-77
2-88
v

Contents

Positioner Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Wipe Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Wipe Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Pattern Select Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Wipe Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Rotation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Pattern Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Wipe Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Pattern Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Positioner Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Masks Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Mask Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Mask Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Mask Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Frame Stores Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Input Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Output Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
Still Image Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
Dropshadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
External Interface Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Crosspoint Name Displays (3000-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
Preview/Mask/Aux Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
Preview Only Select Buttons (3000-2 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
Bus Delegate Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
Preview Bus Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
Mask Bus Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
Aux Bus Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
Effects Send Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Effects Send – Looping Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
Effects Send – Frame Store Looping Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Effects Send – Non-Looping Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
Remote Aux Bus Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Joystick Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
Chop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123

Contents

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Menu Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
User Preferences Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Keyer Preferences Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Preview Preferences Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Beeper Prefs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Define Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
E-MEM Preferences Menu (3000-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Learn A Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Auto Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Auto Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Effects Dissolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Recall A Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
300 Style Mode (3-M/E Switchers Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Operational Defaults in Either Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
System Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Set Clock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Inputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Input Digital Resolution Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
External Key Sync Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Setup on Key Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Map Inputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Name Crosspoint Button Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Chroma Key Inputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
GPI Inputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Outputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Output Digital Resolution Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
External Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Editor Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
DPM Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Peripheral Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
GPI Outputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Aux Bus Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

vii

Contents

M/E Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
M/E Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
System Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Installation Information Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Blanking Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Keyer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Chroma Trap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Keyer Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Video Process Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Key 1 NAM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Chroma Key Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Chroma Key Secondary Color Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Chroma Key Hue Modifiers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Chroma Key Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Wipe Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Wipe Pattern Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Wipe Texture Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Wipe Modifiers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Wipe Modulation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Wipe Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
E-MEM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
E-MEM Register Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Source Hold Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Peripheral Devices Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Keyframe Path Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
GPI & PBus Triggers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
Keyframe Timeline Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Example 1 – Inserting a Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Example 2 – Inserting a Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Effect Run with Auto Run Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Effect Run with Auto Run On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Aux Bus Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Mask Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Matte Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Matte Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Matte Texture Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
viii

Contents
Frame Store Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Picture Process Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Compress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Bevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Parameter Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
Video Store Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
Video Store Mosaic Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
Video Store Pseudo Color Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
Video Store Crop Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
Video Store Reposition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Video Store Filter Menu (Blur) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Video Store Filter Menu (Hue Rotate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
Key Store Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
Key Store Crop Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
Key Store Reposition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121
Key Store Filter Menu (Blur–Video Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Key Store Filter Menu (Blur–Key Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
Key Store Filter Menu (Hue Rotate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
Mask Store Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
Miscellaneous Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
Signal Processing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
Safe Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130
Disk Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-131
3-134
3-136
3-139
3-140

Section 4 — Menu Trees
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Main Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Soft Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Menu Tree Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Index
ix

Contents

Preface

Welcome to the Model 3000
This manual provides detailed descriptions of the switches and
knobs on the control panel, the functions accessed through the
menu display, and graphic representations of the menu tree
structure for the Model 3000-2 and the Model 3000-3 Digital
Switching Systems.
Refer to the Model 3000 User Guide for setup and configuration
procedures and task-oriented operating procedures.

Organization of This Manual
The main sections of this manual are arranged as follows:
1 System Overview — Describes the basic architecture of the
Model 3000 switcher.
2 Control Panel Descriptions — Describes the Model 3000
panel functions provided via the various buttons and knobs.
3 Menu Descriptions — Describes the menu displays and the
functions made available through them.
4 Menu Trees — Illustrates the paths through the menu levels.
One tree is provided for each top-level Menu button.
Index — Provides an alphabetical listing of the functions,
operations, controls, and menus discussed in this manual.

Contents

How to Use This Manual
This manual, the Model 3000 Operation Reference, is intended to
be used in conjunction with the Model 3000 User Guide.
Begin by reading the System Overview so that you will be familiar
with the basic terminology used in this manual and the structure
of the hardware/software system.
Next, turn on the system as described in the Startup section of the
User Guide and verify the switcher parameters set up for your site
or studio. It is assumed that the system has been installed
according to your studio plan and that all inputs and outputs are
connected properly.
If you are an experienced switcher operator, you may choose to go
directly from Startup to operating the switcher, and refer to the
Control Panel and Menu Descriptions sections of this manual only
when you need to know more about the operation of a specific
control.
If you are not an experienced operator, you should read or scan
the Control Panel and Menu Descriptions section to get an idea of
the functions of the subpanels, controls, and menus.
Whenever you need to know more about a particular switcher
term, turn to the Glossary at the back of the User Guide.
For quickly locating specific areas of interest, refer to the Table of
Contents at the front of this manual, to the “local” table of contents
provided behind each tabbed divider, or to the Index at the rear of
the manual. (The “local” tables of contents allow you to locate the
information you want without having to go all the way to the
front of the manual.)

xii

Contents

How to Contact Us
If you have any comments about this manual, we would like to
hear from you. You may FAX comments to Grass Valley Technical
Writing at (916) 478-4140 or you may write to us at the following
address:

Tektronix, Inc.
Grass Valley Products
Technical Publications Department
PO Box 1114
Grass Valley, CA 95945

Conventions Used in This Manual
The following graphical and typestyle conventions are used
throughout this manual.

Button and Panel Knob References
A control panel button is shown as follows:
CLEAR
WORK
BUFR

Similarly, a control panel knob is shown as follows:

BRIGHTNESS

Or, when used in the text, they are shown in the following type:
CLR WORK BUFR — (button)
BRIGHTNESS — (knob)

xiii

Contents

Menu References
Many Model 3000 features may be accessed via the menu display
and its associated “soft” buttons and “soft” knobs. The term “soft”
merely means that the function of the button or knob is temporary,
being assigned via the menu display.
An illustration similar to the following may be used when you
need to access a function via the menu.

KEYER MENU

OPACITY
= 100.00%

keyer

M/E 1

KEY 1

OFF

KEY 2

AUTO

KEY A

AUTO

KEY B

AUTO

HORIZ KEY POSITION
= 0.00 clocks

M/E 1
M/E 2

M/E 3

OFF

DSK

KEY 1

AUTO

M/E
SELECT

KEYER
SELECT

SHAPING

CHROMA
TRAP >

KEYER
COPY >

CALIBRATE

VIDEO
PROCESS >

KEY 1
NAM >

Soft Button and Soft Knob References
In the text, soft buttons and soft knobs are shown in the same type
as the panel buttons and knobs, using the button or knob label in
the display:
KEYER SELECT — (soft button)
OPACITY — (soft knob)

xiv

System Overview

Introduction
This section presents a general description of the Grass Valley
Group Model 3000 Switching System, pointing out specific areas
of interest to the operator. Both the 3000-2 (a two-effects switcher)
and the 3000-3 (a three-effects switcher) are covered.
The Control Panel and Signal Processor descriptions given in this
section will provide you with a basic knowledge of the Model
3000 structure. Any differences between the two models will be
noted.

General Description
The Model 3000 is a multi-format digital switcher that can
manipulate a variety of composite digital and analog video and
key signals through the use of 10-bit digital processing. Video
inputs and outputs can be a combination of analog, digital bit
serial, and digital bit parallel, depending upon the configuration
of your installation and the optional input and output modules
installed.
The Model 3000-2 provides two mix/effects (M/E) systems, a
program/preset mixer with dual downstream keyers, and up to
32 video inputs and 32 key inputs selectable at one time from the
control panel.
The Model 3000-3 has all the features of the 3000-2 plus a third
M/E and up to 48 video inputs and 48 key inputs selectable at one
time.

1-1

Section 1 — System Overview

The layout of the control panel is user-friendly and the menu
structure is easy to navigate, allowing quick and easy control of
video signals.

Standard Features

1-2

■

Auto-Timed Inputs

■

Multi-format Input capability - Composite Analog, Serial
Digital, and Parallel Digital

■

Multi-format Output capability

■

Tineline Keying

■

Complex Matte Generators

■

Full Complement of Wipe Patterns

■

Key Channel Throughout

■

10-Bit Processing Throughout

■

Shaped Video Inputs and Outputs

■

100 E-MEM registers

■

User-Preference Programming

■

Disk Storage of E-MEM and System Parameters

■

Extensive Masking

■

Mask Draw capability

Optional Features

Optional Features
■

Additional video and key inputs, up to 64 total

■

Additional video and key outputs

■

A Second Wipe Pattern Generator (one module that provides
a second wipe pattern for each M/E)

■

Borderline on each Keyer

■

Dual Chroma Keyers for each M/E

■

Preview Outputs

■

Aux Buses

■

Safe Title/Action Area Generators

■

Four-Channel Effects Send

■

Redundant Power Supplies (frame and panel)

■

Video channel, Key channel, and Mask channel Frame Store

■

Chroma Key Auto Setup

Refer to the end of this section for descriptions of the optional
features.

1-3

Section 1 — System Overview

Physical Description
The switcher consists of three main areas: the Control Panel, the
Signal Processor Frame, and the Frame Power Supply (see
Figure 1-1). The electronic circuitry in the Model 3000 is primarily
contained on circuit boards and modules in the Signal Processor
Frame and Control Panel.

Signal Processor Frame
The Signal Processor Frame is a large rack-mounted unit that
houses the system controller, effects logic, video and key
processors, and input/output interfaces.
In addition to the basic system, a typical system may have several
options such as Chroma Keyers, Secondary Wipe Generator, and
Frame Store. Most options are available as circuit board modules
to be installed in the Signal Processor Frame.
Refer to the Model 3000 Installation and Service manual for a
complete description of the Signal Processor.
A main processor (HOS, or Head-Of-State) and separate
M/E processors reside within the Signal Processor Frame. Since
each M/E has its own processor, failure of one processor may not
disable the entire switcher. Individual effects can continue to
operate independently in a limited capacity.

1-4

Physical Description

Power Supplies

TP0348-01

Two power supplies are used in the basic Model 3000 system: a
control panel power supply, located in the control panel tub, and
a 19" rack mount power supply used by the Signal Processor
Frame. Optional Redundant power supplies are available.

Video/Key
Signals In

INPUTS
AND
CROSSPOINTS

EFFECTS
PROCESSORS

OUTPUT
AND
EXPANSION

Video/Key
Signals Out

Pointing
Device
(bitpad)
EFFECTS
LOGIC

CONTROL
PANEL

Frame
to
Panel
Link

CONTROLLER/
HEAD-OF-STATE
PROCESSOR

Signal
Processor
Frame

CONTROL PANEL
POWER SUPPLY

Control Panel

Frame
Power Supply

Figure 1-1. Simplified Block Diagram of the Model 3000 Switcher

1-5

Section 1 — System Overview

Control Panel

TP0348 01

The Control Panel is the operator interface for the Model 3000
system. The operator performs all actions via physical buttons
and knobs and a software-driven menu.

Video/Key
Signals In

INPUTS
AND
CROSSPOINTS

EFFECTS
PROCESSORS

OUTPUT
AND
EXPANSION

Pointing
Device
(bitpad)
EFFECTS
LOGIC

CONTROL
PANEL

Frame
to
Panel
Link

CONTROLLER/
HEAD-OF-STATE
PROCESSOR

Signal
Processor
Frame

CONTROL PANEL
POWER SUPPLY

Control Panel

Frame
Power Supply

Figure 1-2. Functional Areas of Model 3000-2 Control Panel

1-6

Video/Ke
Signals O

Physical Description

The Control Panel also provides connectors for the Mask Draw
option and the data link to the Signal Processor Frame.

Upper
Panel

12B. Menu
Display
Buttons

13. Frame
Store
Subpanel

11. Mask
Subpanel

12A. Menu
Display

10. Wipe
Subpanel
TP0702-06B

15.
14. External
Floppy
Interface
Disk Drive Subpanel

Grass Valley Group

16.
Crosspoint
Name
Display
(Option)

MASKS

WIPE

FRAME STORES
EXTERNAL INTERFACE
EDIT

GPI

PERPH

CONFG

AUX

H
POSITION

V
POSITION

OPACITY

VIDEO
STORE

FIELD
1

GRAB

KEY
STORE

M/E
MODE

STAT

SOFT
TOP / GAIN

KEYER

CHR
KEY

E-MEM

KEY
FRAME

AUX
BUS

MASK

MATTE

FRAME
STORE

LAST
MENU

MISC

DISK

SYMMETRY

SOFTNESS

OPACITY

WIDTH

PRESET SIZE

ASPECT

USER
2

USER
1

WIPE
USER
3

DROP
SHDW

FRZE

FIELD
2

MASK
STORE

USER
4

BORD
LEFT

RIGHT

ASPCT

BOTTOM / CLIP

MASK
INV

ROTATION TYPE

PRI
WIPE

SEC
WIPE

MASK
BUS

M/E1
KEY 1

M/E2
KEY 1

M/E3
KEY 1

DSK
1

INH
MASK

M/E1
KEY 2

M/E2
KEY 2

M/E3
KEY 2

DSK
2

FORCE
MASK

BOX

MASK
STORE

ROT
POS

ROT
SPD

NORM

FLIP
FLOP

REV

TEXTURE

USER
5

USER
6

USER
WIPE
UNDO

LEARN
USER
WIPE

POSITIONER

PATTERN MODIFIERS

WIPE DIRECTION

ROT
MAG

RANDOM

SPLIT

H
MULTI

V
MULTI

POS
NORM

POS
AUTO

ROTATE
DELEGATE

17.
Preview/
Mask/Aux
Bus

EXIT

M/E1
PRI
WIPE

PATT
MIX

M/E1
SEC
WIPE

M/E2
PRI
WIPE

M/E 2
SEC
WIPE

M/E3
PRI
WIPE

M/E 3
SEC
WIPE

PATTERN MIX

AUX 1-4 EFFECTS SEND ONLY

PVW/AUX

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1
PGM

M/E 2
PGM

M/E 3
PGM

PGM

M/E 1
A

M/E 1
B

M/E 1
KEY 1

M/E 1
KEY 2

M/E 2
A

M/E 2
B

M/E 2
KEY 1

BUS DELEGATE

M/E 2
KEY 2

M/E 3
B

M/E 3
A

M/E 3
KEY 1

M/E 3
KEY 2

PVW

AUX 1
A/B

MASK

AUX 2
A/B

AUX 3
A/B

AUX 4
A/B

AUX 5
A/B

AUX 6
A/B

Grass Valley Group
2

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

88888888
LOCK

RUN

BANK
0

LRN

EFF

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

EFF

EFF
DIS

M/E
2

M/E
3

BLACK

KEY 1

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
3

UNCAL

KEY 2

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
3

UNCAL

SHIFT

UNDO

COLOR
BKGD

UNCAL

BANK

TRAN
RATE

•

KEY
2

MIX

WIPE

CUT

AUTO
TRAN

BORD

SHDW

EXTD

OUT
LINE

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

FORCE
MASK

INV

SHOW
KEY

VIDEO
FILL

MATTE
FILL

SPLIT
KEY

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

LIN
KEY

LUM
KEY

CHR
KEY

PRI
PST
PTTN

SEC
PST
PTTN

KEY
ON

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

KEY
1

KEY
2

NORM

BORD

SHDW

EXTD

OUT
LINE

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

FORCE
MASK

INV

SHOW
KEY

NORM

BORDERLINE
SIZE / POS

KEY 1
MIX

PST
BLK

BANK
1

ENTER

KEY 1
CUT

KEY
PRIOR

ON
OVER

EFF

KEY 2
CUT

KEY 2
MIX

888

POSITIONER

MATTES

EFF

KEY
1

OVER

LAYERED
SEQ

KEYERS

TRANSITION

EFFECTS MEMORY

BLK

KEY 2

KEY 1

M/E
1

HUE/
SOFTNESS

BORDERLINE
OPACITY

SATURATION/
OFFSET
GAIN

PRI
WIPE
WASH

SEC
WIPE
WASH

FLAT
MATTE

MATTE
2

K1 FILL

K1 BORD

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

PRI WIPE

SEC WIPE

M/E 1
PRI

M/E 2
PRI

M/E 1
SEC

M/E 2
SEC

M/E 2
PRI

M/E 2
SEC

9.
Positioner
Subpanel

MATTE
SEL
CTR

CLIP
BRIGHTNESS

TRANSITION

M/E
2

EFF

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

KEY
1

KEY
2

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
3

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

KEY 1

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

KEY 2

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

M/E
3

88888888

UNCAL

CUT

WIPE

PST
BLK

RUN

SEQ

BANK
0

VIDEO
FILL

MATTE
FILL

SPLIT
KEY

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

EFF
DIS

BANK
1

LIN
KEY

LUM
KEY

CHR
KEY

PRI
PST
PTTN

SEC
PST
PTTN

TRAN
RATE

ENTER

KEY 2
CUT

KEY 2
MIX

888

AUTO
TRAN

LRN

OVER

EFF

MATTES

BORDERLINE
SIZE / POS
LOCK

KEY 1
MIX

UNCAL
MIX

Lower
Panel

OVER

LAYERED

KEYERS

EFFECTS MEMORY
KEY 1
CUT

KEY
PRIOR

UNDO
BANK

•

KEY
ON

BKGD
B

KEY 1
CUT

NORM

BORD

SHDW

EXTD

OUT
LINE

KEY 1
MIX

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

FORCE
MASK

INV

SHOW
KEY

KEY
1

BKGD
A

HUE/
SOFTNESS

BORDERLINE
OPACITY

CHROMA KEYERS

PRI
WIPE
WASH

SEC
WIPE
WASH

FLAT
MATTE

MATTE
2

K1 FILL
SATURATION/
OFFSET

GAIN

R
M

K1 BORD

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

PRI WIPE

SEC WIPE

MATTE
SEL

KEY
2

M/E 1
KEY 1

CLIP

M/E 1
KEY 2

LUM

SELECTIVITY

M/E 2
KEY 1

SHADOW
OPACITY

CHROMA

SHDW
ON

BKGD
SUPR

M/E 2
KEY 2

M/E 3
KEY 1

M/E 3
KEY 2

BRIGHTNESS

TRANSITION

EFFECTS MEMORY

88888888
LOCK

RUN

LRN

M/E
3

EFF

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

KEY
1

KEY
2

OVER

LAYERED
SEQ

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

EFF
DIS

BANK
1

TRAN
RATE

ENTER

•

OVER

WIPE

AUTO
TRAN

PST
BLK

EFF

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

DSK 2

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

BKGD

PST
BLK

CUT

PRESET

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

KEY 2
CUT

KEY 2
MIX

888

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

LUM
KEY

CHR
KEY

PRI
PST
PTTN

SEC
PST
PTTN

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

KEY
1

KEY
2

MATTE
FILL

HUE/
SOFTNESS

BORDERLINE
OPACITY

SEC
WIPE
WASH
MATTE
2

K1 FILL
SATURATION/
OFFSET

GAIN

EFFECTS MEMORY

PVW

PRI
WIPE
WASH
FLAT
MATTE

PVW
PRI

M/E
1

CLEAR
WORK
BUFR

CONST
DUR

GET

PUT

GO
TO
TIME

GO
TO
KF

K1 BORD

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

PRI WIPE

SEC WIPE

M/E
2

EFF
DUR

KF
DUR

MARK

CUT

COPY

PASTE

MOD

MOD
EVENT

INSRT
BEFOR

INSRT
AFTER

MARK
BLOCK

M/E
3

MATTE
SEL

DSK

CLIP
BRIGHTNESS

DSK 1

PROGRAM

SPLIT
KEY

LIN
KEY

KEY
ON

VIDEO
FILL

MIX

CUT

TRANSITION

1.
Source
Selection

BORDERLINE
SIZE / POS

BANK
0

UNDO
BANK

MATTES

KEYERS

KEY
PRIOR

M/E
3

DSK
1

DSK
2

OVER

060
AUTO
TRAN

NORM

BORD

SHDW

EXTD

OUT
LINE

INV

SHOW
KEY

SPLIT
KEY

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

BORDERLINE
SIZE / POS

DSK 1
MIX

DSK 2
CUT

DSK 2
MIX

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

VIDEO
FILL

MATTE
FILL

LIN
KEY

LUM
KEY

KEY
ON

DSK
1

TIME
ALIGN

7.
Preview
Subpanel

MATTES

DOWNSTREAM KEYERS
DSK 1
CUT

8.
Chroma
Keyer
Subpanel

HUE/
SOFTNESS

BORDERLINE
OPACITY

USER
DEF
WASH

SEC
WIPE
WASH

AUTO
RCL

FLAT
MATTE

MATTE
2

DPM
1

K1 FILL
SATURATION/
OFFSET

K1 BORD

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

PRI WIPE

SEC WIPE

GAIN
MATTE
SEL

DSK
2
CLIP

GLOBL
INHIB

8888888888888888

RE
WIND

ENABL
ALL

M/E
1

LOCK

DPM
2

MISC

M/E
2

SEQ

BANK
0

REV

DPM
3

BKGD

M/E
3

EFF
DIS

BANK
1

AUTO
RUN

DPM
4

DSK

PGM
PST

BANK

TRAN
RATE

ENTER

STOP
NEXT
KF

RUN

LRN

UNDO
•

BRIGHT/TEX

FLIP
FLOP

6.
Master
Effects
Memory
Subpanel

4. Keyer
2. Transition
Subpanels 3. M/E Subpanels
5. Matte
Effects Memory
Subpanels
Subpanels

Figure 1-3. Functional Areas of Model 3000-3 Control Panel

1-7

Section 1 — System Overview

Video and Key Inputs and Outputs
Inputs
Three types of input options may be installed in the Signal
Processor Frame to suit the needs of your installation. Each input
module supports four inputs and provides auto-timing of each
input.
The following types of input modules are available.

NOTE: Each of these inputs can be treated by the switcher as either a
video input or a key input.
■

Analog 10-bit Composite Quad Input Module – Provides
noise filtering, anti-aliasing, and auto-timing of the input
signals, then performs an analog-to-digital conversion of each
signal and multiplexes the data onto a video or key bus.

■

Digital Bit-Parallel Quad Input Module – Converts the inputs
from ECL to TTL, auto-times the signals, and multiplexes
them onto the video or key bus.

■

Digital Bit-Serial Quad Input Module – Decodes the inputs
from serial to parallel, auto-times the signals, and multiplexes
the data onto the video or key bus.

In addition, RGB input modules are available with the Dual
Chroma Keyer option. Each module supports two sets of RGB
inputs (see Figure 1-4).
Refer to the Configuration section of the Getting Started manual
for information on assigning input formats and adjusting timing.

1-8

DUAL RGB
INPUT
MODULE

QUAD
PARALLEL DIGITAL
INPUT MODULE

QUAD
SERIAL DIGITAL
INPUT MODULE

Signal
Processor
Frame
Module Cells C1 through C16

Up to 16 Quad Input Modules
(Any mix of module types)

QUAD
ANALOG INPUT
MODULE

0702-03

DUAL RGB
INPUT
MODULE

Module Cells A1 through A3

Up to 3 Dual RGB
Input Modules

Video and Key Inputs and Outputs

Figure 1-4. Video and Key Inputs

1-9

Section 1 — System Overview

Outputs
Regardless of the format of the input signals, the Signal Processor
can provide outputs in any composite format.
Signal outputs are provided by output modules installed in the
Signal Processor Frame (see Figure 1-5). Each output module
provides four video/key signal outputs of a given type, with up
to three buffered outputs per signal channel.
Since each output module cell is dedicated to specific functions,
the format of each output signal is determined by the type of
output module installed in that cell. The following choices of
output modules are available:
■

■
■

Composite Analog (4 signal channels; 3 outputs of each
signal)
Parallel Digital (4 signals; 1 output of each signal)
Serial Digital (4 signals; 3 outputs of each signal)

Standard (Analog) outputs include:
■
■
■
■

(DSK) Program Video
(DSK) Program Key
Mask Bus
Switched Preview Video

Optional outputs (Analog and/or Digital) include:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

1-10

M/E 1 Program Video, M/E 1 Program Key
M/E 1 Preview Video
M/E 2 Program Video, M/E 2 Program Key
M/E 2 Preview Video
M/E 3 Program Video, M/E 3 Program Key (3000-3 only)
M/E 3 Preview Video (3000-3 only)
DSK Preview
DSK Preview Video
Aux Buses 1A-4B, Aux Buses 5A-7B
Clean Feed Video
Frame Store Video and Key

QUAD
ANALOG OUTPUT
MODULE

4 Signal Channels
per Module
3 Outputs of
each Signal

QUAD
PARALLEL DIGITAL
OUTPUT MODULE

4 Signal Channels
per Module
1 Output of
each Signal

QUAD
SERIAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT MODULE

4 Signal Channels
per Module
3 Outputs of
each Signal

Up to 14 Quad Output Modules
(Any mix of module types)

Signal
Processor
Frame

Module Cells A4 through A17

Video and Key Inputs and Outputs

Figure 1-5. Video and Key Outputs

1-11

Section 1 — System Overview

Functional Description
Overview
Figure 1-6 shows the video flow in a typical Model 3000 switching
system.
Video and key signals enter the Input Section of the Model 3000,
which consists of analog, parallel digital, and/or serial digital
modules. The analog signals are converted to digital format, and
all inputs are timed and conditioned.
The digital signals are then passed to the Video and Effects Section
where keying and mixing take place. This section also provides
effect modifications, such as wipes, that can be applied to selected
inputs.
In the Output Section, digital video and key signals are converted
to any desired composite format (analog, parallel digital, or serial
digital), as predetermined by the type of output modules
installed, before leaving the Signal Processor.

Video Processing
Input video and key signal selections are made by the Crosspoint
Matrix under control of the system Controller, according to
operator assignments entered via the Control Panel.
In addition to primary (external) video, secondary (internal)
sources such as Masks, M/E re-entry video, and optional Frame
Store are available as inputs to the crosspoint matrix.
Two sets of RGB signals may be applied per optional Dual RGB
input module. These inputs are forwarded to a Dual Chroma
Keyer module.
Keyers in each Mix/Effects bank provide outputs to the Effects
Loop crosspoints for sending outside the switcher for external
processing or for routing to the M/E mixers and wipe generators.
1-12

Functional Description

The Effects Send outputs can also be directed to the Frame Store
option for image capture. One optional Effects Loop Crosspoint
module services all three Mix/Effects banks.
Each M/E has two keyers and two background buses (A and B) as
inputs. In standard mode, Keyers 1 and 2 can be mixed into a
composite video and key which can be forwarded to the DSK, the
other M/E, or output. In layered mode, Backgrounds A and B are
also used as keyers that operate in a manner similar to Keyers 1
and 2.
Optional preview capability allows monitoring of sources at
certain points in the signal flow. You can preview video from the
M/E mixers, Flip/Flop Mix and DSK mixer, switched preview
bus, or mask bus.
Eight pulse- or level-sensitive GPI inputs are provided. You can
assign each of these inputs via the GPI Input menu to perform a
specific function when triggered.
The editor interface consists of an asynchronous RS-422, 38.4K
baud serial communications port, managed by a communications
processor.

1-13

Section 1 — System Overview

RGB
Inputs

Video Signals
In
Key Signals
In

DUAL
RGB INPUT
MODULES

DUAL
CHROMA
KEYERS

M/E1,
M/E2 & M/E3
Chr. Key

80 X 48
M/E
VIDEO
Video
CROSSPOINT
and
MATRIX

QUAD
INPUT
MODULES

Key

ANALOG,
PARALLEL
DIGITAL,
AND
SERIAL
DIGITAL

Aux Bus
1A-4B

QUAD
KEYER
MODULES –
M/E 1,
M/E 2,
& M/E 3

EFFECTS
LOOP
CROSSPOINTS

Frame Store Video and Key

M/E Program Video and Key

Clipped Mask and
Mask Store Video
Switched Preview and Mask

0702-05L

Clocks

Program, Preset, and DSK Video and Key
SYNC
GENERATOR

Black,
Background,
and
Test
Signals
Aux Bus 5A-7B Video and Key
CONTROL PANEL

CONTROLLER

(control buses not
shown for simplicity)

1-14

To/From
All Circuits

Functional Description

0702-05R

SECONDARY
WIPE
OPTION

Aux Bus 1A-4B
Video and Key

M/E 1, M/E 2
& M/E 3
MIXERS

Frame Store
Video
and Key

FRAME STORE
FOR VIDEO, KEY,
AND MASK
STORAGE

Mask
Store
Output

Mask
Store
Input

M/E 1, M/E 2,
& M/E 3
Program Video
and Key

M/E Pvw
Video
PREVIEW

DSK Pvw
Video

PGM/PST
MIXER
AND
DUAL DSK

Mask and
Switched Preview

Program
Video
& Key

QUAD
OUTPUT
MODULES
ANALOG,
PARALLEL
DIGITAL,
AND
SERIAL
DIGITAL

Outputs

Frame Store Video and Key
M/E 1, M/E 2, & M/E 3
Program Video and Key
Program Video and Key

& Clean
Feed
Video

Clean Feed Video
DSK Preview Video

M/E and DSK Preview

Mask
Switched Preview
M/E1, M/E 2, & M/E 3
Preview
DSK Preview

NOTE:
Primary Video Paths are
Indicated by Wide Arrows

Aux Bus Video and Key

Figure 1-6. Video Flow Diagram of Typical Model 3000 Switching System

1-15

Section 1 — System Overview

Description of Options
The following options are currently available for the Model 3000
Switcher. For more details on these options, refer to the
appropriate subpanel descriptions later in this manual.

Dual Chroma Keyer
Up to six analog component (RGB, YUV, or Betacam®) or
composite inputs can be chroma keyed, two per Dual Chroma
Keyer module. Each module is added to a specific M/E.

Borderline Key Edge Generation
Borderline ® Key Edge Generators are available for each keyer in
the switcher. The Borderline feature is implemented as a
mezzanine board that plugs onto the Keyer module of any M/E.
Each Borderline generator supports 1, 2, or 3 line wide borders for
border and outline modes and 1 to 6 line wide edges for shadow
and extrude modes. Fill within the key edges may be either video
or matte.

Secondary Wipe Generator
A Secondary Wipe Generator module provides a second pattern
for each of the M/E systems. Only one module is required for
enhancing all mix/effect systems.

1-16

Description of Options

Safe Title/Action Area Generator
The Safe Title/Action Area Generator provides up to four
different patterns that can be superimposed on the switched
preview output of the switcher. It may be used to define a safe title
area, safe action area, or for screen centering and horizontal/
vertical alignment of picture elements.

Mix/Effects Clean Feed
A clean feed output of the wipe/mix signals (the two background
bus video signals without any keys added) is provided by a LookAhead Preview mezzanine board installed on the Mixer and
Primary Wipe Generator module.

Frame Store
The Frame Store option allows storage and retrieval of images at
a resolution of 10 bits. Either two two-field pictures and keys or
one four-field picture and key can be frozen in the Frame Store. A
two-field mask store is also provided.

Effects Send
Effects Send provides a method of integrating digital effects
devices into the switcher mix/effects system. Up to four send
channels can be used to route the video and key from an M/E to
and from an external digital effects system.

1-17

Section 1 — System Overview

Tally Output
The Tally Relay module provides tally outputs that reflect the
switcher status. A rear-panel interconnect board provides the
relay contacts at two connectors for on-air Tally A and on-air Tally
B. Pinouts for the Tally connectors are given in the Installation
section of the System Information manual.

Tally Expansion
The Tally Expansion Option increases the number of tally outputs
from the Model 3000 Switcher. An unlimited number of Tally
Expansion frames, each with up to three tally modules, can be
added to the switcher.

Remote Auxiliary Bus Control Panels
Three models of Remote Aux Control Panels are available for
controlling your switcher auxiliary buses from a remote location.
The one- and two-RU panels each control a single aux bus; the
three-RU panel provides delegated control of any number of aux
buses.

Chroma Key Auto Setup
The Chroma Key Auto Setup option is a software option that
automatically sets up a chroma key when you identify the
background color. This option requires the presence of the Frame
Store option.

1-18

Control Panel Descriptions

Introduction
User control of the Model 3000 Switcher is provided through a
control panel containing a source-select button matrix, various
“subpanels” and a flat panel text and graphics display called the
“menu display.”
This section provides an overview of the Model 3000-2 and
Model 3000-3 control panels, and detailed descriptions of the
subpanels. Operation of the 3000-2 and the 3000-3 is essentially
identical; however, the 3000-3 has one more M/E, additional
crosspoint buttons on the panel, discrete (rather than delegated)
key buses, an E-MEM panel for each M/E, and keyer mix and cut
buttons.

Main Control Panel
The control panel is physically divided into two areas referred to
as the “upper” and “lower” panels (see Figure 2-1 and 2-2).
The upper panel contains the main menu subpanel and the menu
display, as well as the Wipes, Masks, Frame Stores, and External
Interface subpanels and a 3.5-inch floppy disk drive used for
storing setups and other data.
Menu control for selecting and executing software functions is
provided by the main menu buttons at the left of the display, plus
eight “soft” buttons below the display and four “soft” knobs to the
right of the display. The term “soft” means that the functions of
these buttons and knobs are defined by software.

2-1

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Functions available through the Menus are described in the next
section of this manual
Frequently-used controls are located on the lower panel for ease
of reach by the operator. Rows of subpanels for the Mix/Effects
and Program/Preset/Downstream Keyer systems are provided in
line with the corresponding source selection buttons for making
transitions, keying, creating mattes, and manipulating effects.
Buttons for the Preview bus, Effects Send, Mask bus, and
Auxiliary bus selections are located along the top of the lower
panel for the Model 3000-2, or along the bottom of the upper panel
for the 3000-3.
The subpanel descriptions in this section are arranged in the
following sequence, starting at the lower left and moving
counterclockwise around the panel:

13. Frame
Store
Subpanel

12B. Menu
Display
Buttons

11. Mask
Subpanel

12A. Menu
Display

Grass Valley Group ®

MASKS

Upper
Panel

GPI

PERPH

DROP

AUX

WIPE
SOFT

FRAME STORES

EXTERNAL INTERFACE
EDIT

10. Wipe
Subpanel

CONFG

M/E
MODE

STAT

KEYER

CHR
KEY

WIPE

E-MEM

KEY
FRAME

AUX
BUS

MASK

MATTE

FRAME
STORE

LAST
MENU

MISC

DISK

SHDW

15.
Floppy
Disk
Drive

H
POSITION

FRZE

V
POSITION

GRAB

TOP / GAIN

SYMMETRY

OPACITY

FIELD

OPACITY

WIDTH

PRESET SIZE

ASPECT

ASPCT

BOTTOM / CLIP

MASK
STORE

USER
3

USER
4

USER
5

USER
6

RIGHT

MASK
INV

ROTATION TYPE
KEY
STORE

USER
2

USER
1

SOFTNESS

BORD
LEFT

PRI
WIPE

SEC
WIPE

M/E1
KEY 1

M/E2
KEY 1

DSK
1

M/E1
KEY 2

M/E2
KEY 2

DSK
2

BOX
VIDEO
STORE

EXIT

MASK
BUS

MASK
STORE

FORCE
MASK

INH
MASK

ROT
POS

ROT
SPD

NORM

FLIP
FLOP

REV

RANDOM

USER
WIPE
UNDO

TEXTURE

PATTERN MODIFIERS

WIPE DIRECTION

ROT
MAG

H
MULTI

SPLIT

LEARN
USER
WIPE

POSITIONER

V
MULTI

POS
NORM

POS
AUTO

ROTATE
DELEGATE

M/E1
PRI
WIPE

PATT
MIX

M/E1
SEC
WIPE

M/E2
PRI
WIPE

M/E 2
SEC
WIPE

PATTERN MIX

17.
Preview/
Mask/Aux
Bus

PREVIEW ONLY

AUX 1-4 EFFECTS SEND ONLY

PVW
AUX

BLACK

BKGD
1

BKGD
2

SHIFT

M/E 1
PGM

M/E 2
PGM

M/E 1
B

PGM

M/E 1
A

M/E 1
KEY 1

M/E 1
KEY 2

M/E 2
A

M/E 2
B

M/E 2
KEY 1

M/E 2
KEY 2

M/E 1
PVW

TRANSITION

KEY

BLACK

BKGD
1

BKGD
2

SHIFT

KEY 1
KEY 2

M/E
2

UNCAL
UNCAL

EFF
SEND

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

KEY
1

KEY
2

LAYERED

BLACK

BKGD
1

BKGD
2

SHIFT

M/E
2

UNCAL

BLACK

BKGD
1

BKGD
2

SHIFT

M/E
2

UNCAL

MIX

WIPE

CUT

AUTO
TRAN

OVER

M/E 2
PVW

BORD

SHDW

PVW

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

FORCE
MASK

EXTD

INV

SHOW
KEY

SPLIT
KEY

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

LIN
KEY

LUM
KEY

CHR
KEY

PRI
PST
PTTN

SEC
PST
PTTN

KEY
ON

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

KEY
1

KEY
2

VIDEO
FILL

PST
BLK

MATTE
FILL

TRANSITION

KEY

BLACK

BKGD
1

BKGD
2

SHIFT

M/E
1

BLACK

BKGD
1

BKGD
2

SHIFT

EFF
SEND

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

KEY
1

KEY
2

NORM

BORD

SHDW

EXTD

KEY 2 UNCAL

M/E
1

MIX

BLACK

BKGD
1

BKGD
2

SHIFT

M/E
1

BLACK

BKGD
1

BKGD
2

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

PGM

BLACK

BKGD
1

BKGD
2

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

PST

BLACK

BKGD
1

BKGD
2

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

LAYERED

UNCAL

DSK

UNCAL
CUT

WIPE

AUTO
TRAN

KEY
PRIOR

DSK
1

ON
OVER

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

FORCE
MASK

INV

ON
OVER

VIDEO
FILL

MATTE
FILL

SPLIT
KEY

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

PST
BLK

LIN
KEY

LUM
KEY

CHR
KEY

PRI
PST
PTTN

SEC
PST
PTTN

060

KEY
ON

BKGD
B

NORM

BORD

BKGD
A

KEY
1

SHOW
KEY

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

VIDEO
FILL

MATTE
FILL

LIN
KEY

LUM
KEY

KEY
ON

DSK
1

SPLIT
KEY

EXTD

HUE/
SOFTNESS

1. Source Selection

060

2. Transition
Subpanels

K2 BORD
SEC WIPE

FLAT
MATTE

OPACITY

K1 FILL

SATURATION/
OFFSET
GAIN

KEY
2

INV

SHOW
KEY
AUTO
SEL
KEY

BRIGHTNESS

HUE/
SOFTNESS

SHADOW
OPACITY

HUE

OPACITY

SATURATION/
OFFSET

MATTE
2

K1 BORD

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

PRI WIPE

SEC WIPE

USER
DEF
WASH

SEC
WIPE
WASH

FLAT
MATTE

MATTE
2

K1 FILL

K1 BORD

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

BKGD 1

BKGD 2

MATTE
SEL
CLIP

9.
Positioner
Subpanel

CHROMA

SHDW
ON

BKGD
SUPR

M/E 1
PRI
WIPE

M/E 1
SEC
WIPE

M/E 2
PRI
WIPE

M/E 2
SEC
WIPE

CTR
M/E 1
KEY 1

M/E 1
KEY 2

M/E 2
KEY 1

M/E 2
KEY 2

CLR
WORK
BUFR

CONST
DUR

GET

PUT

GO
TO
TIME

GO
TO
KF

FLIP
FLOP

MARK
BLOCK

TIME
ALIGN

EFF
DUR

KF
DUR

REV

MARK

CUT

COPY

PASTE

AUTO
RUN

INSRT
BEFOR

INSRT
AFTER

MOD

MOD
EVENT

AUTO
RCL

ENABLES

DPM
1

ENABL
ALL

6.
Effects
Memory
(E-MEM®)
Subpanel

RE
WIND

STOP
NEXT
KF

MATTES

DSK
2

4. Keyer
Subpanels

POSITIONER

LUM

EFFECTS MEMORY
SEC
WIPE
WASH

MATTE
SEL
CLIP

SIZE / POS

OUT
LINE

VIDEO
KEY

AUX
6

SELECTIVITY

K1 BORD

K2 FILL
PRI WIPE

PRI
WIPE
WASH

DOWNSTREAM KEYERS
SHDW

AUX 5

MATTE
SEL

GAIN

AUTO
TRAN

AUX
4

R
Y

BRIGHTNESS

OUT
LINE

DSK
2

OVER

AUX
3

CHROMA KEYERS

MATTE
2

MATTES

OVER

PST
BLK

CUT

AUX
2

SEC
WIPE
WASH

FLAT
MATTE

K1 FILL
SATURATION/
OFFSET

GAIN

SIZE / POS

TRANSITION

BKGD

AUX
1

PRI
WIPE
WASH

OPACITY

KEYERS

EFF
SEND

HUE/
SOFTNESS

060

KEY 1 UNCAL

MASK

MATTES
OUT
LINE
SIZE / POS

KEY
PRIOR

8.
Chroma
Keyer
Subpanel

BUS DELEGATE

DSK
PVW

KEYERS
NORM

CLIP

Lower
Panel

TP0348-06B

14. External
Interface
Subpanel

DPM
2

MISC

DPM
3

BKGD

DPM
4

DSK

GLOBL
INHIB

M/E
1

M/E
2

8888888888888888
LOCK

RUN

LRN

SEQ

EFF
DIS

PGM
PST

BANK
1

BANK
2

TRAN
RATE

ENTER

UNDO
BANK

•

BRIGHT / TEX

5. Matte
Subpanels

Figure 2-1. Functional Areas of Upper and Lower Control Panels (3000-2)

2-2

Main Control Panel

Source Selection

10. Wipe Subpanel

Transition Subpanels

11. Mask Subpanel

M/E E-MEM Subpanels (3000-3 only) 12. Menu Display Subpanel

Keyer Subpanels

13. Frame Store Subpanel

Matte Subpanels

14. External Interface Subpanel

Master Effects Memory Subpanel

15. floppy Disk Drive

Preview Subpanel (3000-3 only)

16. Crosspoint Name Display (3000-3 Option)

Chroma Keyer Subpanel

17. Preview/Mask/Aux Bus

Positioner Subpanel

18. Preview/Mask/Aux Bus

Upper
Panel

13. Frame
Store
Subpanel

12B. Menu
Display
Buttons

12A. Menu
Display

11. Mask
Subpanel

10. Wipe
Subpanel
TP0702-06B

15.
14. External
Floppy
Interface
Disk Drive Subpanel

Grass Valley Group

16.
Crosspoint
Name
Display
(Option)

MASKS

WIPE

FRAME STORES
EXTERNAL INTERFACE
EDIT

GPI

PERPH

M/E
MODE

STAT

KEYER

CHR
KEY

WIPE

E-MEM

KEY
FRAME

AUX
BUS

CONFG

AUX

H
POSITION

V
POSITION

OPACITY

FRZE

VIDEO
STORE

FIELD
1

GRAB

KEY
STORE

SOFT
TOP / GAIN

SYMMETRY

SOFTNESS

OPACITY

WIDTH

USER
2

USER
1

USER
3

DROP
SHDW

FIELD
2

MASK

LAST
MENU

MASK
STORE

MATTE

MISC

USER
4

BORD
LEFT

RIGHT

FRAME
STORE

ASPCT

BOTTOM / CLIP

DISK

MASK
INV

PRESET SIZE

SEC
WIPE

MASK
BUS

M/E2
KEY 1

M/E3
KEY 1

DSK
1

INH
MASK

M/E1
KEY 2

M/E2
KEY 2

M/E3
KEY 2

DSK
2

FORCE
MASK

BOX

RANDOM

TEXTURE

USER
6

USER
WIPE
UNDO

LEARN
USER
WIPE

ASPECT
ROTATION TYPE

PRI
WIPE

M/E1
KEY 1

USER
5

MASK
STORE

ROT
POS

ROT
SPD

NORM

FLIP
FLOP

REV

POSITIONER

PATTERN MODIFIERS

WIPE DIRECTION

ROT
MAG

SPLIT

H
MULTI

V
MULTI

POS
NORM

POS
AUTO

ROTATE
DELEGATE

17.
Preview/
Mask/Aux
Bus

EXIT

M/E1
PRI
WIPE

PATT
MIX

M/E1
SEC
WIPE

M/E2
PRI
WIPE

M/E 2
SEC
WIPE

M/E3
PRI
WIPE

M/E 3
SEC
WIPE

PATTERN MIX

AUX 1-4 EFFECTS SEND ONLY

PVW/AUX

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1
PGM

M/E 2
PGM

M/E 3
PGM

PGM

M/E 1
A

M/E 1
B

M/E 1
KEY 1

M/E 1
KEY 2

M/E 2
A

M/E 2
B

M/E 2
KEY 1

BUS DELEGATE

M/E 2
KEY 2

M/E 3
B

M/E 3
A

M/E 3
KEY 1

M/E 3
KEY 2

PVW

AUX 1
A/B

MASK

AUX 2
A/B

AUX 3
A/B

AUX 4
A/B

AUX 5
A/B

AUX 6
A/B

Grass Valley Group
14

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

BLK

88888888
LOCK

RUN

BANK
0

LRN

EFF

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

EFF

MIX
EFF
DIS

M/E
2

UNDO

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
3

UNCAL

KEY 1

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
3

UNCAL

KEY 2

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
3

UNCAL

BANK

BANK
1

TRAN
RATE

ENTER

•

BORD

SHDW

EXTD

OUT
LINE

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

FORCE
MASK

INV

SHOW
KEY

VIDEO
FILL

MATTE
FILL

SPLIT
KEY

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

NORM

BORDERLINE
SIZE / POS

PST
BLK

EFF

AUTO
TRAN

KEY 1
CUT

KEY
PRIOR

KEY 1
MIX

ON
OVER

WIPE

CUT

KEY
2

ON
OVER

KEY 2
CUT

LIN
KEY

KEY 2
MIX

PRI
PST
PTTN

CHR
KEY

LUM
KEY

SEC
PST
PTTN

KEY
ON

BKGD
B

NORM

BORD

SHDW

EXTD

OUT
LINE

RUN

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

FORCE
MASK

INV

SHOW
KEY

888

KEY
1

BKGD
A

POSITIONER

MATTES

EFF

KEY
1

LAYERED
SEQ

KEYERS

TRANSITION

EFFECTS MEMORY

KEY 2

KEY 1

M/E
1

HUE/
SOFTNESS

BORDERLINE
OPACITY

SATURATION/
OFFSET
GAIN

PRI
WIPE
WASH

SEC
WIPE
WASH

FLAT
MATTE

MATTE
2

K1 FILL

K1 BORD

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

PRI WIPE

SEC WIPE

M/E 1
PRI

M/E 2
PRI

M/E 1
SEC

M/E 2
SEC

M/E 2
PRI

M/E 2
SEC

9.
Positioner
Subpanel

MATTE
SEL

KEY
2

CTR

CLIP
BRIGHTNESS

TRANSITION

M/E
2

EFF

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

KEY
1

KEY
2

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
3

M/E
1

M/E
3

88888888

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

KEY 1

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

KEY 2

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

CUT

WIPE

AUTO
TRAN

LRN

OVER

PST
BLK

EFF

MATTES

BORDERLINE
SIZE / POS

LOCK

KEY 1
MIX

UNCAL
MIX

Lower
Panel

OVER

LAYERED

KEYERS

EFFECTS MEMORY
KEY 1
CUT

KEY
PRIOR

SEQ

BANK
0

VIDEO
FILL

MATTE
FILL

SPLIT
KEY

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

EFF
DIS

BANK
1

LIN
KEY

LUM
KEY

CHR
KEY

PRI
PST
PTTN

SEC
PST
PTTN

TRAN
RATE

ENTER

KEY 2
CUT

KEY 2
MIX

888

UNDO
BANK

•

KEY
ON

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

NORM

BORD

SHDW

KEY
1

HUE/
SOFTNESS

CHROMA KEYERS

PRI
WIPE
WASH

SEC
WIPE
WASH

FLAT
MATTE

MATTE
2

R
Y

BORDERLINE
OPACITY

K1 FILL
SATURATION/
OFFSET

GAIN

K2 BORD
SEC WIPE

MATTE
SEL

KEY
2

M/E 1
KEY 1

CLIP

LUM

K1 BORD

K2 FILL
PRI WIPE

SELECTIVITY

M/E 1
KEY 2

M/E 2
KEY 1

SHADOW
OPACITY

CHROMA

SHDW
ON

BKGD
SUPR

M/E 2
KEY 2

M/E 3
KEY 1

M/E 3
KEY 2

BRIGHTNESS

TRANSITION

EFFECTS MEMORY

88888888
LOCK

RUN

LRN

M/E
3

EFF

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

KEY
1

KEY
2

EFF
DIS

BANK
1

TRAN
RATE

ENTER

•

MIX

WIPE

CUT

AUTO
TRAN

KEY 1
MIX

PST
BLK

EFF

DSK 1

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

DSK 2

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

PROGRAM

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

BKGD

PST
BLK

CUT

PRESET

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

KEY 2
MIX

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

VIDEO
FILL

MATTE
FILL

LIN
KEY

LUM
KEY

KEY
ON

BKGD
B

FORCE
MASK

INV

SPLIT
KEY

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

CHR
KEY

PRI
PST
PTTN

SEC
PST
PTTN

BKGD
A

KEY
1

SHOW
KEY

KEY
2

BORDERLINE
OPACITY

SEC
WIPE
WASH
MATTE
2

FLAT
MATTE

K1 FILL
SATURATION/
OFFSET

GAIN

PVW
PRI

CLEAR
WORK
BUFR

M/E
1

M/E
3

DSK
1

DSK
2

OVER

060
AUTO
TRAN

NORM

BORD

SHDW

EXTD

OUT
LINE

INV

SHOW
KEY

SPLIT
KEY

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

BORDERLINE
SIZE / POS

DSK 1
MIX

DSK 2
CUT

DSK 2
MIX

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

VIDEO
FILL

MATTE
FILL

LIN
KEY

LUM
KEY

KEY
ON

DSK
1

GET

GO
TO
TIME

PUT

K2 BORD
SEC WIPE

M/E
2

GO
TO
KF

EFF
DUR

KF
DUR

MARK

CUT

COPY

PASTE

MOD

MOD
EVENT

INSRT
BEFOR

INSRT
AFTER

MARK
BLOCK

M/E
3

MATTE
SEL

DSK

TIME
ALIGN

7.
Preview
Subpanel

MATTES

DOWNSTREAM KEYERS
DSK 1
CUT

CONST
DUR

K1 BORD

K2 FILL
PRI WIPE

CLIP
BRIGHTNESS

TRANSITION

1.
Source
Selection

KEY 2
CUT

888

HUE/
SOFTNESS

EFFECTS MEMORY

PVW

PRI
WIPE
WASH

OUT
LINE

OVER

BANK
0

UNDO

EXTD

BORDERLINE
SIZE / POS

OVER

LAYERED
SEQ

BANK

MATTES

KEYERS
KEY 1
CUT

KEY
PRIOR

8.
Chroma
Keyer
Subpanel

HUE/
SOFTNESS

BORDERLINE
OPACITY

USER
DEF
WASH

SEC
WIPE
WASH

AUTO
RCL

FLAT
MATTE

MATTE
2

DPM
1

K1 FILL
SATURATION/
OFFSET

K1 BORD

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

PRI WIPE

SEC WIPE

GAIN
MATTE
SEL

DSK
2
CLIP

GLOBL
INHIB

8888888888888888

RE
WIND

ENABL
ALL

M/E
1

LOCK

DPM
2

MISC

M/E
2

SEQ

BANK
0

REV

DPM
3

BKGD

M/E
3

EFF
DIS

BANK
1

AUTO
RUN

DPM
4

DSK

PGM
PST

BANK

TRAN
RATE

ENTER

STOP
NEXT
KF

RUN

LRN

UNDO
•

FLIP
FLOP

BRIGHT/TEX

6.
Master
Effects
Memory
Subpanel

4. Keyer
2. Transition
Subpanels 3. M/E Subpanels
5. Matte
Effects Memory
Subpanels
Subpanels

Figure 2-2. Functional Areas of Upper and Lower Control Panels (3000-3)

2-3

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Auto Delegation
Subpanel Delegation
Some of the subpanels on the Model 3000 Switcher are delegated
to other subpanels under conditional control of the operator or
system. This feature is called “auto delegation.” The effect of auto
delegation is that pressing a button on one subpanel may activate
the related controls on another subpanel. For example, the single
Chroma Keyer subpanel is used for controlling all Chroma
Keyers, and is activated by pressing the CHR KEY button on any of
the M/E Keyer subpanels.

NOTE: Since the joystick positioner can be ganged to several M/E wipe
generators, the POS NORM and the POS AUTO buttons on the Wipe
subpanel do not delegate the joystick.
Table 2-1 shows some of the delegations present in the Model 3000
Switcher.
Table 2-1. Subpanel Delegation
Subpanel

Button Pressed

Delegated Subpanel

Transition (M/E)

KEY 1 or KEY 2

Keyer, Key Bus
(same M/E)
Mask
Chroma Keyer

Transition (M/E)
(Layered Mode)

BKGD B or BKGD A

Keyer (same M/E)

Transition (M/E)

WIPE

Wipe

2-4

Conditions and
Comments

INH MASK or
FORCE MASK must
be on
CHR KEY must be on

Auto Delegation

Table 2-1. Subpanel Delegation - (continued)
Subpanel

Button Pressed

Delegated Subpanel

Transition (DSK)

DSK 1 or DSK 2

Downstream Keyer,
DSK Bus
Mask

Any Input Bus

BKGD 1 or BKGD 2

DSK Matte

Crosspoint

Conditions and
Comments

INH MASK must be on

Lights BKGD 1 or
BKGD 2 indicator on
DSK Matte subpanel

3000-2 PVW/Aux Bus
or
3000-3 Preview Panel

Any PREVIEW ONLY
Crosspoint (2 M/E)
or any PREVIEW
Crosspoint (3 M/E)

Preview Bus

Keyer (M/E)

KEY 1 or KEY 2

Key Bus (same M/E)
Mask
Chroma Keyer

PRI PST PTTN or SEC
PST PTTN

Wipe

CHR KEY

Chroma Keyer

INH MASK or FORCE
MASK

Mask

INH MASK or FORCE
MASK must be on

CHR KEY must be on

INH MASK or FORCE
MASK button must be

turned on by the
press
Keyer (M/E) or
Downstream Keyer

Any Borderline mode
button except NORM

Matte (same M/E or
DSK)

Lights K1 BORD or K2
BORD indicator on
Matte subpanel,
depending on Keyer
or DSK subpanel
delegation

2-5

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Table 2-1. Subpanel Delegation - (continued)
Subpanel

Button Pressed

Delegated Subpanel

Conditions and
Comments

Keyer (M/E) or
Downstream Keyer

MATTE FILL

Matte (same M/E or
DSK)

Lights K1 FILL or K2
FILL indicator on
Matte subpanel,
depending on Keyer
or DSK subpanel
delegation

Downstream Keyer

DSK 1 or DSK 2

DSK Bus
Mask

INH MASK

Mask

PRI WIPE WASH or
SEC WIPE WASH

Wipe1 2
Matte

E-MEM

Keyer and Key Bus

Mask

PRI WIPE or SEC
WIPE

Wipe

BORD

Matte (same M/E)

Matte (M/E or DSK)

INH MASK must be on
INH MASK button
must be turned on by
the press

If Wipe BORD is on

BORD button must be
turned on by the
press
Lights PRI WIPE or
SEC WIPE indicator
on Matte subpanel

1. On an M/E Matte subpanel: Pressing the PRI WIPE WASH button causes the Wipe subpanel to be
auto delegated to the primary wipe pattern generator for the calling M/E. Pressing the SEC WIPE
WASH button on the M/E Matte subpanel causes the Wipe subpanel to be auto delegated to the secondary wipe pattern generator for the calling M/E.
2. On the DSK Matte subpanel: Pressing the SEC WIPE WASH button causes the Wipe subpanel to
be auto delegated to the secondary wipe pattern generator for M/E 1.

2-6

Auto Delegation

Menu Delegation
The Model 3000 also delegates certain menus to be displayed
when specific buttons on the subpanels are double-pressed. (The
second press must occur within a predetermined amount of time.)
Table 2-2 lists the buttons that support this function.

NOTE: An opened menu is delegated, where appropriate, to the button
that opened the menu. For example, double-pressing the KEY 1
delegation button on the M/E 1 Keyer panel causes the keyer menu to
open and the menu controls to be delegated to Keyer 1 of M/E 1.

Table 2-2. Menu Delegation
Subpanel

Button DoublePressed

Delegated Menu

Transition

WIPE

Wipe Pattern menu

Keyer (any M/E)

KEY 1 and KEY 2

Keyer menu

Keyer (any M/E)
(Layered Mode)

BKGD B, BKGD A,
KEY 1, and KEY 2

Keyer menu

Keyer (any M/E)

PRI PST PTTN or
SEC PST PTTN

Wipe menu

CHR KEY

Chroma Key menu

Downstream Keyer

DSK 1 and DSK 2

Keyer menu

Chroma Keyer

M/E 1 KEY 1 through
M/E 2 KEY 2 -3000-2
or through M/E 3
KEY 3 on 3000-3

Chroma Key menu

DSK Matte

USER DEF WASH

Matte menu

Comments

Used to set default font
parameters

2-7

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Table 2-2. Menu Delegation - (continued)
Subpanel

Button DoublePressed

Delegated Menu

Frame Store

VIDEO STORE, KEY
STORE or MASK
STORE

Frame Store menu

Wipe

Wipe Pattern MENU

Wipe Pattern menu

M/E 1 PRI through
M/E 2 SEC on 3000-2
or through M/E 3
SEC on 3000-3

Wipe Modifiers menu

Wipe Pattern
TEXTURE

Wipe Texture menu

Crosspoint Source
Select

SHIFT

User Preference
menu

Mask

INH MASK or MASK
BUS

Mask menu

2-8

Comments

Source Selection

0702-07

The Source Select portion of the control panel consists of Primary
source select buttons, Secondary (re-entry) source select buttons,
SHIFT buttons, and uncalibrated indicators (see Figure 2-3). Each
M/E on the 3000-2 has a delegated key bus, rather than the two
discrete key buses shown for the 3000-3 and key bus delegation
indicators that show which bus is currently delegated.

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

KEY 1

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

KEY 2

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

KEY 1

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
3

UNCAL

KEY 2

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
3

UNCAL

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
3

UNCAL

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
3

UNCAL

KEY 1

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

KEY 2

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

UNCAL

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

DSK 1

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

DSK 2

BLK

CLR
BKGD

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

UNCAL

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

PROGRAM

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

PRESET

BLACK

COLOR
BKGD

Figure 2-3. Source Select Panel (3000-3 shown)

2-9

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

All buttons on the Source Select panel have three levels of
illumination, known as “tally”:
■

OFF indicates not selected

■

DIM or “low tally” indicates selected, but not on-air

■

BRIGHT or “high tally” indicates selected and on-air

Only one button in each row is illuminated at any time (not
including the SHIFT button).

Primary Source Selection (Primary Crosspoints)

BLACK

...

Each row of primary source selection buttons consists of 16
buttons
the 3000-2 or 24 buttons for the 3000-2, each having a
BKGD forBKGD
1
2
customer-specified
designation under a clear lens cap.
Each input, including BLACK and BKGD, can be mapped to any
vertical column of source select (“crosspoint”) buttons. Thus, each
column of buttons may be visualized as an input bus of video and
key crosspoints.
External video and key inputs connected to the switcher are
numbered 1 through 64. Each input can be treated as either a video
signal or a key signal, as defined in the Configuration menu.
For the 3000-2, up to 32 video/key pairs may be assigned at one
time to the crosspoint buttons — 16 “unshifted” and 16 “shifted”
selections. For the 3000-3, up to 48 video/key pairs may be
assigned at one time to the crosspoint buttons — 24 “unshifted”
and 24 “shifted.”
On each column of crosspoint buttons, you can map a video
signal, a key signal, and a chroma key signal. The video and
luminance keys can be any combination of external video,
external key, and a variety of internal signals.
When you press the crosspoint button at the intersection of the
column and the row, the appropriate signal on each input column
is switched onto any output bus (horizontal row)—the mapped
key signal onto the selected key bus or the mapped video signal

2-10

Source Selection

onto the selected video bus (Background A, Background B,
Program, or Preset).
Any video or key input may be selected on any number of output
buses; however, only one output signal may selected at one time
on each output bus.

SHIFT

The SHIFT button located at the right end of each primary source
selection row is used to access the 16 or 24 shifted inputs. In
Normal mode, you select a shifted input by holding SHIFT down
(button lamp comes on) and pressing a crosspoint button on that
bus. The SHIFT button lamp then remains lit to show that the
selection is a shifted selection.

NOTE: In Normal mode (Shift Lock off) the Shift mode will turn off if
another selection is made on that bus without holding down the SHIFT
button. So, even if the SHIFT button is already lit, in order to select
another shifted crosspoint on that bus, you must press and hold the
SHIFT button while selecting the new crosspoint.

Shift Lock Mode
A Shift Lock mode is also available that allows a bus to be held in
the shifted state. This will allow ready access to those input
sources that have been mapped to shifted crosspoints. This mode
is enabled in the Configuration/User Preferences Menu by
selecting LATCH.
When in Shift Lock mode (with the SHIFT button lamp off), to
select a shifted input, press and hold the SHIFT button (lamp
comes on) and press a crosspoint button on that bus. The SHIFT
button lamp then remains lit to show that the selection is a shifted
selection and that the bus is in the shifted state. (So far it looks
pretty much the same as Normal mode). The difference comes
when you select another crosspoint on the same bus. In Shift Lock
mode, whenever the SHIFT button is lit, if you make another
selection on that bus without pressing the SHIFT button, the
2-11

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

selection will be a shifted crosspoint, whereas in Normal mode it
would be an unshifted crosspoint.
In Shift Lock mode, to select an unshifted crosspoint, press and
hold the SHIFT button (lamp goes out) and select a crosspoint on
that bus.

NOTE: In Shift Lock mode, you must press SHIFT plus a crosspoint
button in order to revert to the unshifted state. Simply pressing SHIFT
will not have any effect.

Crosspoint Button Flashing
A primary crosspoint button may flash if the timing of a selected
input cannot be corrected by the automatic input timing circuit.
This flashing caution can be disabled through the Configuration
menu.

2-12

Source Selection

Secondary Source Selection (Re-entry Crosspoints)
M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

The secondary source (“M/E re-entry”) buttons, M/E 1,
M/E 2, and M/E 3 (3000-3 only) are located at the right end
of each row of primary crosspoint buttons.

Unlimited re-entry is supported for outputs of the Mix/Effects
(M/Es). The program output of any M/E may be reentered as an
input on any other M/E or in the Flip-Flop Mix/DSK system, or it
may be used as a key source on any other M/E or the DSK.
Since multiple re-entry is allowed, lockout logic prevents one
M/E from entering another M/E at the same time the other M/E
is entering the first. If a circular re-entry is attempted, the request
for the second re-entry will be ignored.

Uncal Indicators
UNCAL

Each UNCAL indicator LED, located in line with a row of source
select buttons, lights if one or more of the following variables are
set to non-default values for the selected crosspoint on that bus:
opacity, luminance gain, chroma gain, dc offset, coring, or
horizontal key position.

Key Delegation Indicators (Model 3000-2 Only)
KEY 1
KEY 2

The KEY 1 and KEY 2 indicator LEDs, located adjacent to the
reentry source selection buttons and in line with each row of key
crosspoint buttons, light to indicate which keyer the row of
buttons is currently delegated to control.

2-13

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Transition Subpanels

TRANSITION
EFF
SEND

EFF
SEND

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

KEY
1

KEY
2

OVER

LAYERED

MIX

WIPE

CUT

AUTO
TRAN

KEY
PRIOR

TP0348-08

A Transition subpanel is supplied for each M/E and for the PGMPST/DSK mixer (see Figure 2-4 and 2-5). Controls common to all
Transition subpanels are: a lever arm for manual transitions;
transition direction indicators; CUT, AUTO TRAN, and PST BLK
buttons; and a three-digit LED display that shows the auto
transition duration in frames.

PST
BLK

060

Figure 2-4. Mix/Effects Transition Subpanel

BKGD

DSK
1

TP0348-09

TRANSITION

DSK
2

OVER

PST
BLK

CUT

AUTO
TRAN

060

Figure 2-5. DSK Transition Subpanel
2-14

Transition Subpanels

Next Transition Buttons
The five next transition buttons in each M/E—BKGD B, BKGD A,
KEY 1, KEY 2, and KEY PRIOR—select the M/E output signals that
will change during the next transition.
The three next transition buttons in the PGM-PST/DSK—BKGD,
DSK 1, and DSK 2—similarly select the PGM-PST output signals
that will change during the next transition.
ON

An ON indicator located beneath each key next transition button
is lit when the associated signal is an active part of the M/E
output.

NOTE: The way the M/E Next Transition buttons operate depends on
whether the M/E is operating in Standard Mode or in Layered Mode. The
mode of operation is set in the M/E MODE menu, described in the next
section of this manual.

EFF

The EFF (Effects Send) indicator located above each key next
transition button is lit when the associated keyer output is
selected as an effects send output by one of the AUX 1-4 EFFECTS
SEND ONLY buttons.

M/E Next Transition Buttons ( Standard Mode )
In Standard Mode, only the BKGD A, KEY 1, KEY 2, and KEY PRIOR
next transition buttons and the ON and OVER indicators below the
KEY buttons are functional. (The BKGD B button and the ON
indicators below the BKGD buttons are not functional and the
LAYERED indicator is not lit.)
The transition can affect Background only, Key 1 only, Key 2 only,
Key Priority only, or any combination thereof. Multiple-layer
transitions are selected by simultaneously pressing more than one
button.

2-15

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

BKGD
A

Pressing BKGD A selects background video to change during the
next transition. That is, the background video output of the M/E
will change from the source selected on the A Background bus to
the source selected on the B Background bus.
At the end of the transition, the inputs selected on the background
buses will interchange, or “flip-flop.” The “new video” on the B
Background bus will transfer to the A Background bus, and the
“old video” on the A Background bus will transfer to the B
Background bus.

KEY
1

KEY
2

Activating the KEY 1 or KEY 2 button (lamp lit) causes the next
transition to bring on or remove the selected key. Selecting KEY 1
or KEY 2 delegates the M/E Keyers subpanel and Key bus to the
selected keyer so that the characteristics of that key may be
adjusted (see Keyer subpanel description).
One or both of the KEY buttons can be activated at the same time
and one or both keys can be on (ON indicator lit) at the same time.

KEY
PRIOR

OVER

Pressing KEY PRIOR causes the next transition to swap the
Key 1/Key 2 priority. This can be performed as a mix, wipe, or cut
transition. Key priority always involves both Key 1 and Key 2
The OVER indicator indicates whether Key 1 is over Key 2, or Key
2 is over Key 1. (The key whose OVER indicator is lit is over the
other key.)

M/E Next Transition Buttons ( Layered Mode )
LAYERED

In Layered Mode, all of the next transition buttons and indicators
are functional and the LAYERED indicator is lit. In this mode,
BKGD B and BKGD A are keyers.
The transition can affect Background A only, Background B only,
Key 1 only, Key 2 only, Key Priority only, or any combination
thereof. Multiple-layer transitions can be selected by
simultaneously pressing more than one button.

2-16

Transition Subpanels

NOTE: Flip-flop operation occurs only when operating in Standard
mode. Operating in layered mode causes the A and B Background layers
to transition in a manner similar to the Key 1 and Key 2 layers (see the
descriptions for Key 1 and Key 2).

BKGD
B

In Layered mode, the BKGD A and BKGD B buttons also delegate
the keyers subpanel. (The key bus delegation remains unchanged
when the keyer subpanel is delegated to either of the background
layers.)

BKGD
A

PGM-PST/DSK Next Transition Buttons

BKGD

DSK
1

DSK
2

The PGM-PST/DSK next transition buttons function the same
as the M/E next transition buttons in Standard Mode, except
that there is no KEY PRIOR button. (The PGM-PST/DSK
BKGD, DSK 1, and DSK 2 buttons correspond to the M/E
BKGD A, KEY 1, and KEY 2 buttons.)

Transition Type Buttons
The type of transition at the next transition is determined by the
WIPE, MIX, and PST BLK buttons.
The WIPE and MIX buttons are mutually exclusive; pressing one
selects it and de-selects the other.
WIPE

MIX

A WIPE transition uses the output of the wipe generator to shape
the selected transition(s). Your selected wipe pattern appears over
the old video/key and moves across the screen, revealing the new
video/key as it moves. Use either the lever arm or the AUTO TRAN
button to perform the WIPE transition.
Pressing MIX selects a transition that mixes video, keys or
backgrounds, during the change from one source to the other. A
mix transition gradually fades the new video and/or key over the
old video and/or key. You can use either the lever arm or AUTO
TRAN button to perform a MIX transition.

2-17

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

PST
BLK

Pressing the PST BLK button selects a two-stage transition that
inserts black between the two video sources being mixed, wiped,
or cut. For example, instead of mixing directly between the A
Background and B Background buses during a background
transition, a preset black transition mixes, wipes, or cuts from the
A Background bus to black. When a second transition is
performed, black mixes, wipes, or cuts, away to the B Background.
After completion of the two transitions, PST BLK turns itself off
automatically.
In addition to this automatic cancellation, you can toggle PST BLK
on and off manually. If you turn off PST BLK while the transition
is on the black limit, the M/E or PGM-PST output will
immediately switch from black to the original signal. If you turn
off PST BLK when it is off limit, the transition to or from black will
stop.
The PST BLK function is provided in each M/E and in the PGMPST mixer. PST BLK affects only the effect where it is selected and
not the entire switcher. The button lights when pressed and turns
off automatically when the second transition is complete. The
BLACK video input button on the A Bus remains lit while the M/E
is on the black limit. The preview output for the M/E does not go
to black. The preview monitor continues to show the final result of
the two-stage preset black transition.
MIX and WIPE are unaffected when PST BLK is turned on. MIX and
WIPE can be changed at any time during a preset black operation.

Preset Black always fades to a full screen black regardless of
whether the switcher is operating in layered mode or standard
mode.
An abort of Preset Black occurs when the operator selects a
crosspoint on the A Background bus while the M/E transition is
on the black limit. This abort causes the following to occur: the
preset black transition is cancelled, the PST BLK button lamp turns
off, all keys are dropped, and the selected crosspoint is taken fully
on-air. If the abort occurs in Layered Mode, the M/E is forced to
Standard Mode to ensure that the selected crosspoint is a full
raster image.

2-18

Transition Subpanels

A new background source may be selected on the B Background
bus when you are at the midpoint of a preset black mix. In the
same manner, next-transition delegation buttons, keyer modes, or
keyer sources may also be changed. None of these changes will
abort the preset black transition.

BLACK

Configuring the BLACK Crosspoint — When mapping inputs to
pushbuttons, one of the choices in the Configuration menu is
BLACK, and another choice is NONE. Your selection will have an
effect on how PST BLK operates, and what will happen in the
event the controller CPU fails.
When the first transition during a preset black operation is
completed, the BLACK crosspoint is automatically selected on the
A Background bus. If black has not been assigned to any
pushbutton, the PST BLK button is disabled and the preset black
function is not permitted. On the other hand, if black has been
assigned to more than one pushbutton, preset black will select the
leftmost BLACK pushbutton. If a pushbutton is assigned to NONE,
black appears when that button is selected; however the preset
black function will not use this as the BLACK crosspoint. This
action permits the user to have a known signal appear when an
undefined pushbutton is pressed, while also allowing the preset
black function to select a specific BLACK crosspoint.
To summarize operation: if the user has NONE assigned to one or
more pushbuttons, but does not have black assigned to any
pushbutton, the preset black function will think black is not
available and will be disabled as described above.
Processor Failure—The BLACK crosspoint is also important in the
situation where the Controller main CPU fails while one of the
M/Es is performing a re-entry. When it fails, the M/Es are
required to abandon their re-entry crosspoints and select BLACK
on the same bus. In the case where black was never assigned to a
pushbutton, the M/E selects the leftmost crosspoint on the bus.

2-19

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Transition Controls

AUTO
TRAN

CUT

You can perform a transition using any of three different controls:
the lever arm, the AUTO TRAN button, or the CUT button.
The lever arm is used to perform “manual” transitions. The BKGD
B, BKGD A, KEY 1, KEY 2, KEY PRIOR buttons, or any combination
thereof, can be delegated to the lever arm to perform the transition.
You can move the lever arm in either direction due to the flip-flop
architecture of the buses. Moving the lever arm from one limit to
the other always performs a complete transition.
Using the lever arm, it is possible to start a transition, stop it at
any point, reverse it, and even return to the original limit,
without completing the transition. The green arrow at the top
or bottom of the lever arm travel lights to indicate the direction
that the lever arm has to move to complete the transition.
You can use the lever arm in combination with the AUTO TRAN
button to perform a transition. You can start the transition by
moving the lever arm off its limit, and finish the transition by
pressing AUTO TRAN. The transition is completed at a rate
proportional to the rate set for a full AUTO TRAN transition. For
example, if the lever arm is moved halfway and the transition is
completed by pressing AUTO TRAN at a rate of 200 frames, the
remaining half of the transition will take 100 frames.

NOTE: The lever arm will be left off-limit any time you begin a
transition with the lever arm and finish it with AUTO TRAN. The lever
arm will not function properly again until is moved to either limit (this
action will not change the M/E output). While the lever arm is nonfunctional, both lever arm direction indicators are on.
Pressing CUT cannot, however, complete a transition begun with
the lever arm. In this case, CUT reverses the inputs during the
background transitions. During key transitions, it changes the
logic state of the key.

2-20

Transition Subpanels

E-MEM recall operations result in another set of conditions for
lever arm transitions. When an E-MEM recall places a transition at
a point different from that of the lever arm, the lever arm becomes
inactive until it is moved to catch up with the transition. For
example, assume the lever arm is on a limit and an E-MEM recall
puts the transition at some midpoint. In such a case, the lever arm
would be inoperative until you moved it far enough to catch up
with the transition. At that point, you could use the lever arm to
complete the transition or return it to the beginning limit. (Or, you
could press AUTO TRAN to complete the transition). Another
example of use with E-MEM is a case where the lever arm is off
limit and an E-MEM recall puts the transition on a limit. In this
instance, both lever direction lights would be lit, indicating the
lever arm is inoperative. Moving the lever arm to either limit will
turn the direction lights off and reactivate the lever arm. (You
could also use AUTO TRAN to resume the transition since auto
transitions continue to function even when the lever arm is
inoperative.)

AUTO
TRAN

060

Pressing the AUTO TRAN button starts an automatic S-linear
transition at the rate displayed on the LEDs next to the button. The
AUTO TRAN button supports the same transitions as the lever arm:
BKGD B, BKGD A, KEY 1, KEY 2, KEY PRIOR, or any combination
thereof.
You can specify a transition rate by entering a value from 0 to 999
frames on the numeric keypad on the Effects Memory subpanel. A
zero frame transition is equivalent to a cut. (Refer to the M/E and
Master Effects Memory subpanel descriptions later in this section
for further information on setting the rate.) The lamp in the AUTO
TRAN button remains lit for the duration of the transition.
Pressing AUTO TRAN a second time during a transition, stops the
transition at the current point. The transition can be completed by
pressing the button a third time or by moving the lever arm to its
opposite limit. The lever arm becomes active when it catches up
with the auto transition in progress. Pressing the CUT button
leaves the transition where it stopped but reverses the two videos
or the logic state of a key. Similarly, you can start a transition by
using the lever arm and complete it by pressing the AUTO TRAN
2-21

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

button. However, performing a transition in such a manner leaves
the lever arm off limit.

CUT

Pressing the CUT button causes an immediate transition. The M/E
or PGM-PST output changes instantaneously. (The CUT button
lights for one-half second.) The CUT button supports the same
transitions as the lever arm: BKGD B, BKGD A, KEY 1, KEY 2, KEY
PRIOR, or any combination thereof.

Key Transition Buttons (3000-3 Only)
M/E
Trans

DSK
Trans

KEY 1
CUT

DSK 1
CUT

KEY 1
MIX

DSK 1
MIX

KEY 2
CUT

DSK 2
CUT

KEY 2
MIX

DSK 2
MIX

2-22

The four key transition buttons at the right edge of each transition
panel provide a quick way of doing a simple cut or mix on any
keyer in that M/E or DSK.
Pressing the KEY 1 CUT or KEY 2 CUT button on the M/E
Transition subpanel cuts the corresponding key ON if it was OFF,
or OFF if it was ON, as indicated by the ON LED under the next
transition button for that key. Similarly, pressing the KEY 1 MIX or
KEY 2 MIX button mixes the key ON if it was OFF, or OFF if it was
ON.
Pressing the DSK 1 CUT or DSK 2 CUT button on the DSK
Transition subpanel cuts the corresponding key ON if it was OFF,
or OFF if it was ON; pressing the DSK 1 MIX or DSK 2 MIX button
mixes the key ON if it was OFF, or OFF if it was ON.

Transition Subpanels

Key Mix Rates
The mix rates used by the KEY 1 MIX and KEY 2 MIX buttons on the
M/E Keyer panels are independently programmable, as detailed
under the E-MEM panel TRAN RATE button description. After the
M/E keyer mix rate has been programmed for each button, the
rate is shown in the Transition panel readout only while the mix is
in progress or while the SHOW KEY button on the Keyer or DSK
panel is being pressed.
The mix rates used by the DSK 1 MIX and DSK 2 MIX buttons at the
right edge of the PGM-PST/DSK Transition panel are similarly
independently programmable, but those rates may also be used as
auto transition rates by the DSK 1 and DSK 2 buttons on the PGMPST/DSK Transition panel.

DSK Key Transition Rates
When an auto transition is done on the PGM-PST/DSK Transition
panel, all transitions (BKGD, DSK 1, and/or DSK 2) take place at
the same rate. What that rate is depends on what transitions are
enabled at the time, with the programmed rate for the left-most
enabled button taking precedence.
In other words, if a BKGD transition is enabled (BKGD button lit),
the auto transition rate will be the rate displayed in the readout on
the Transition panel. However, if BKGD is not enabled, the auto
transition rate will be the programmed rate for the leftmost DSK
button—DSK 1 if it is enabled, or DSK 2 if that is the only enabled
transition.

2-23

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Mix/Effects Effects Memory Subpanel (3000-3 Only)
The Effects Memory (E-MEM®) subpanel for each M/E (see
Figure 2-6) allows you to learn and recall effects setups for the
mix/effects system in which the subpanel resides. It also provides
effects dissolves and sequences between effects stored in its own
registers.
Refer to the Master Effects Memory subpanel description, later in
this section, for a description of the use of the mix/effects E-MEM
panels when controlled by Master E-MEM to produce the overall
output of the switcher.

NOTE: Much of the following information is repeated in the description
of the Master E-MEM panel; however, it is included here so that you can
see the differences between the operation of the mix/effects E-MEM panel
and that of the Master E-MEM keypad and readout.

TP0702-25

EFFECTS MEMORY

NO REG
LOCK

RUN

SEQ

BANK
0

EFF
DIS

BANK
1

TRAN
RATE

ENTER

LRN

UNDO
BANK

•

Figure 2-6. Mix/Effects E-MEM Subpanel (3000-3 Only)

2-24

Mix/Effects Effects Memory Subpanel (3000-3 Only)

Learn and Recall Operations
Effects setups are stored in E-MEM registers. The following
parameters are learned and recalled in learn/recall operations on
the mix/effects E-MEMs: standard or layered mode operation,
crosspoint settings, transition settings, keyer settings, masks and
mattes, chroma key settings, wipes, positioner settings and full
additive mix (FAM) settings.

E-MEM Registers
There is a total of 100 registers in each mix/effects E-MEM,
grouped in ten banks of ten registers. Each register belongs to a
specific bank (0 through 9) and has a unique number (0 through 9)
within that bank. For example, register 46 means bank 4,
register 6.
When the system is powered up, the keypad readout comes up
with a “NO REG” message.

Learning Effects
To learn an effect setup into a register, press the following
sequence of buttons on the E-MEM subpanel:
LRN, BANK, bank number, register number

2-25

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Recalling Effects
To recall a register, press the following buttons:
BANK, bank number, register number

(The previous NOTE for learning applies also to recalling.)
When an E-MEM register is recalled, the key memory for any
recalled crosspoint is updated.

Crosspoint Override
During an E-MEM recall, if you don’t want the crosspoint to
change, you can manually hold down the present crosspoint
button while the E-MEM register is recalled. If key memory is off
at this time, the video and key crosspoint are held. If key memory
is on, the video and key crosspoint and the current keyer memory
state are held.

Mix/Effects E-MEM Keypad

NO REG
LOCK

RUN

SEQ

BANK
0

EFF
DIS

BANK
1

TRAN
RATE

ENTER

LRN

UNDO
BANK

2-26

•

In addition to learning and recalling effects, the
E-MEM keypad is used as a numerical entry pad for
the following buttons: TRAN RATE, LRN, LRN SEQ,
LOCK, and BANK.
Pushing a numerical button at any time other than
when preceded by one of the above buttons recalls
the corresponding register within the current bank.
To recall a register in a different bank, enter the recall
sequence described on the previous page.

Mix/Effects Effects Memory Subpanel (3000-3 Only)

Mix/Effects E-MEM Readout

L B0 R04

The alphanumeric readout at the top of the E-MEM keypad
provides status information about E-MEM operations and
registers.
During normal learn and recall operations, the display informs
you what the current Bank (“B...”) and Register (“R...”) are. If the
register is locked, there is an “L” shown at the left end of the
display. Other messages on the E-MEM readout include “NO
REG” at bootup, and “NO EMPTY” if no register is available for a
LRN • operation.

BANK

≠/BANK is a two-function key that can be used for bank selection
or for accessing “second” functions, for example, LOCK and
UNDO. Pressing the ≠/BANK button enables single-digit bank

selection (0 through 9) on the keypad, and delegates buttons with
second functions to the second function. The button lights when
pressed, and stays lit until the delegation is completed. Pressing
↑/BANK a second time terminates the delegation.
Refer to the “Learn and Recall Operations” description earlier in
this section for use of the BANK button, and to the LOCK and
UNDO headings for use of the ↑ (second) function button.

LOCK
LRN

LRN is used for storing or “learning” the current panel setup into
a register or for learning a register sequence.

Refer to the “Learn and Recall Operations” description earlier in
this section for learning effects into E-MEM registers. Also refer to
the SEQ button description for learning a register sequence.

LOCK

BANK

LRN

The LOCK function locks a single register. Locking a register
prevents the contents of that register from being changed. To lock
the current register whose number is displayed, press the
following buttons:
≠, LOCK

2-27

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

When locked, an “L” is displayed at the left end of the
E-MEM readout. To unlock the register, press the buttons again:
≠, LOCK

NOTE: You cannot lock an entire E-MEM bank from the subpanel; a
menu selection is provided for this action.

BANK
0

BANK
1

TRIM
ENTER

Pressing the BANK 0 button makes bank 0 the current bank, and
causes buttons 0 through 9 on the keypad to become one-button
recall registers for registers 00 through 09. This button is lit
whenever bank 0 is the current bank.
Pressing BANK 1 makes bank 1 the current bank, and causes
buttons 0 through 9 on the keypad to become one-button recall
registers for registers 10 through 19. This button is lit whenever
bank 1 is the current bank.
ENTER confirms a numerical entry on the keypad, such as for
TRAN RATE. The ENTER button lights only when pressed.
SEQ is used for creating automated register-recall sequences.

SEQ

Sequences are created by pressing the following buttons
(parameters in parentheses are optional):
SEQ, LRN,
register, TRAN RATE, delay,
register, TRAN RATE, delay,

...

2-28

Mix/Effects Effects Memory Subpanel (3000-3 Only)

NOTE: SEQ and LRN may be pressed in either order to start the
command sequence;
TRAN RATE and delay, in parentheses, are optional.
TRAN RATE enables a user-defined delay to be introduced between
register recalls;
delay is a 1- to 3-digit number entered on the keypad that specifies an
amount of delay in TV frames. (If the number entered is a 1- or 2-digit
number, the entry must be terminated by pressing ENTER;
register is any desired register number, as described previously (that is,
BANK, bank number, register number).
A sequence loop may be created by again pressing the first register
button as the last register in the sequence.
Sequences are initiated by pressing the following buttons:
SEQ, register

The sequence starts at the register indicated, and proceeds
through the linked sequence to the last register. If a loop has been
programmed, the sequence loop continues until the SEQ button is
pressed to terminate the sequence.
A sequence loop can be broken by double-pressing a register
button. This clears the sequence link that existed in that register
and makes that the last register in the sequence.
Different sequence delays may be learned into the different
mix/effects E-MEM registers. With software version 3.1 and later,
these sequence delays are completely independent; thus the
sequencing may be occurring at different times on the different
M/Es.

EFF
DIS

EFF DIS causes an S-linear transition from the current state to the

next recalled register. The current state may be a setup you have
just done on the mix/effects panel or the state of the panel
resulting from a register recall.

2-29

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

An effects dissolve may be learned into a register, so that recalling
that register will initiate a dissolve to another specified register.
The following button sequence is used to learn a dissolve
(parameters in parentheses are optional):
LRN, EFF DIS, (TRAN RATE, eff dissolve rate), register

NOTE: LRN and EFF DIS may be pressed in either order to start the
command sequence;
TRAN RATE enables a user-defined effects dissolve rate to be introduced
in the dissolve;
eff dissolve rate is a 1- to 3-digit number entered on the keypad that
specifies the effects dissolve rate in number of TV frames. (If the number
entered is a 1- or 2-digit number, the entry must be terminated by
pressing ENTER);
register is any desired register number, as described previously (that is,
BANK, bank number, register number).
The effects dissolve rate is the same as the auto transition rate
indicated in the readout on the Transition subpanel of that M/E.
When the register with the learned effects dissolve is recalled, the
EFF DIS button high tallies, turning off when the dissolve ends.
Different sequence delays may be learned into the different
mix/effects E-MEMs. With software version 3.1 and later, these
sequence delays are completely independent; thus the sequencing
may be occurring at different times on the different M/Es.
As with sequence delays, the effects dissolve rates on different
mix/effects are completely independent. Different effects dissolve
rates may be learned separately into different mix/effects EMEMs; thus the dissolves may be running at different rates on the
different M/Es.

UNDO
•

2-30

The • (dot button is used to represent the next empty register when
used with the LRN operation. (At register 99, the search for an
empty register will wrap around to 0).

Mix/Effects Effects Memory Subpanel (3000-3 Only)

LRN • learns the current switcher state into the next empty

NOTE: If there are no empty registers, the operation will not be done,
an error beep will sound, and the keypad readout will show “NO
EMPTY.”

UNDO
BANK

•

UNDO is used to back out of a recall, learn, or another UNDO
register operation. The UNDO button lights when pressed,
confirming that it has been pressed. An UNDO must be done
immediately after an undesired operation, otherwise it may not be
able to undo the operation.

For these register functions, pressing ↑, UNDO repeatedly allows
you to toggle back and forth between the two last states. (For
toggling UNDO, you have to press ↑/BANK then UNDO each time.)

TRAN
RATE

TRAN RATE is used with the keypad to set the transition/mix rates
used by the AUTO TRAN (auto transition) and KEY MIX buttons on
the Transition subpanels, and by the EFF DIS button on the M/E

E-MEM keypad.
When TRAN RATE is pressed, the E-MEM readout displays the
currently set auto transition rate, for example:
AUTO:030

To change the auto transition rate for that M/E, enter the desired
rate using the number buttons on the M/E E-MEM keypad.
Pressing three number buttons on the keypad automatically
enters the rate. If only one or two number buttons are pressed, the
entry must be completed by pressing ENTER. Rates from zero
through 999 frames may be entered. (If one or two incorrect
number keys have been pressed, the entry may be aborted and the
previous rate restored by pressing TRAN RATE again.)
As soon as the new rate is confirmed, it is displayed in the auto
transition rate display on the Transition subpanel and the E-MEM
readout will then display the Key 1 mix rate, for example:

2-31

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

KEY1:060

This display refers to the mix rate of the KEY 1 MIX button at the
right edge of the Transition panel. To change the Key 1 mix rate,
follow the same procedure as described above for the auto
transition rate.
As soon as the new rate is confirmed, it is entered into memory for
that M/E, but is not displayed. The readout then displays the
third transition/mix rate:
KEY2:060

Repeat the procedure again to set the mix rate for the KEY 2 MIX
button.

NOTE: The mix rate for either key is displayed on the auto transition
readout when the KEY 1 MIX or KEY 2 MIX button is pressed (initiating
a mix) or when the SHOW KEY button is pressed and the desired key is
enabled (KEY 1 or KEY 2 button on Keyer panel lit).
Any of the three transition/mix rates can be skipped simply by
pressing the ENTER button when the display appears.
When the sequence of transition/mix rates has been completed,
the TRAN RATE button turns off and the keypad display returns to
its previous state.

RUN

2-32

The RUN button on the M/E E-MEM panel is non-functional at
this time.

Keyer Subpanels

Keyer Subpanels
One Keyer subpanel is provided for each M/E, and one Keyer
subpanel serves the two Downstream Keyers (see Figure 2-7 and
Figure 2-8).

EXTD

OUT
LINE

FORCE
MASK

INV

SHOW
KEY

MATTE
FILL

SPLIT
KEY

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

LIN
KEY

LUM
KEY

CHR
KEY

PRI
PST
PTTN

SEC
PST
PTTN

KEY
ON

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

KEY
1

KEY
2

NORM

BORD

SHDW

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

VIDEO
FILL

BORDERLINE
SIZE / POS

TP0702-10

KEYERS

BORDERLINE
OPACITY

GAIN

CLIP

Figure 2-7. Mix/Effects Keyers Subpanel

NORM

BORD

KEY
OVER

INH
MASK

VIDEO
FILL

MATTE
FILL

LIN
KEY

LUM
KEY

KEY
ON

DSK
1

SHDW

EXTD

OUT
LINE

INV

SHOW
KEY

VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

BORDERLINE
SIZE / POS

SPLIT
KEY

TP0702-11

DOWNSTREAM KEYERS

BORDERLINE
OPACITY

GAIN

DSK
2
CLIP

Figure 2-8. Downstream Keyers Subpanel

2-33

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

The Keyer subpanels provide control over the following features
for a specified M/E or DSK:
■

Key masking

■

Video key type selection—preset pattern, chroma key,
luminance key, or linear key. (The DSK has only luminance
and linear keys.)

■

Key fill: matte or video fill

■

Key source: video key or auto-selection of key signals based
on user preferences

■

Show key on Switched Preview monitor

■

Borderline settings

■

Key invert

■

Key priority

■

Clip and Gain

Keyer Delegation
KEY
1

2-34

KEY
2

BKGD
B

BKGD
A

DSK
1

DSK
2

In standard mode, the Keyer subpanel located in each M/E row
can be delegated between Key 1 and Key 2.

KEY
1

KEY
2

In layered mode, four keyers are available—Key
1, Key 2, Background B, and Background A.

The Downstream Keyer subpanel can be delegated to DSK 1 or
DSK 2.

Keyer Subpanels

KEY ON Indicator
KEY
ON

The KEY ON indicator lamp displays whether the delegated keyer
is in use or not. This indicator is a logical AND of the ON indicator
in the transition subpanel and the keyer delegation selection.

Key Type Buttons
LIN
KEY

CHR
KEY

LUM
KEY

LIN
KEY

CLIP

GAIN

PRI
PST
PTTN

SEC
PST
PTTN

The second row of buttons from the bottom
of each Keyer subpanel selects one of five
keyer modes.

Pressing the LIN KEY button selects a linear key with a gain fixed
at unity, clip fixed at 50%, and no S-shaping. The LIN KEY lamp
(only) is illuminated when this linear key is selected.
If a linear key is desired, but the key signal is not at the correct
level, adjustments can be made with the CLIP and GAIN knobs.
CLIP adjusts the offset of the key signal (over a small range) in
linear key mode. GAIN adjusts the amplitude of the key signal
(over a small range).
If either knob is adjusted away from unity, the LUM KEY button
lights in addition to the LIN KEY button lamp. When both buttons
are illuminated, that indicates to the operator that a linear key is
being performed with non-unity gain and/or clip. If key memory
is on, the non-unity clip and gain settings are recalled whenever
the input associated with these settings is selected.
When gain and clip are returned to unity, the LUM KEY button
lamp goes off. Because it is difficult to adjust the knobs back to
exact unity, provision is made to force the unity values by pressing
the LIN KEY button a second time while the button is lit. This
action restores unity and turns off the LUM KEY button lamp.

LUM
KEY

The LUM KEY button selects a luminance key that has variable clip
and gain adjustment and S-shaping of the key signal. Key CLIP
(offset) and GAIN (amplitude) settings are remembered for each
source on each keyer when key memory is enabled via the

2-35

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

software menu. The CLIP control has enough range to clip down
to superblack.
A menu selection is available that switches a chroma trap into the
key path to remove unwanted chroma from video used for
keying.

CHR
KEY

PRI
PST
PTTN

Pressing the CHR KEY button delegates the Chroma Keyer
subpanel to that M/E. (The CHR KEY button is functional only
when the chroma keyer option is installed.) Refer to the Chroma
Keyer subpanel description later in this section for details on
chroma keyer operation. CHR KEY does not function with
background keyers (layered mode), and is not available on the
DSKs.
Pressing the Primary Preset Pattern PRI PST PTTN button selects
the output of the primary (transition) wipe generator as the key
source. Pattern adjustment is provided by the Wipe subpanel (see
the Wipe subpanel description later in this section for details). The
key CLIP and GAIN knobs are non-functional when this mode is
selected.
In the signal path through the Model 3000 switcher, keys,
including preset patterns, occur before the effect send crosspoints.
This allows any key, including a preset pattern, to be sent to an
external digital video effects device via an effects send. Transition
wipes, however, occur after the effects send crosspoints.
After pressing PRI PST PTTN, the VIDEO KEY and AUTO SELECT
KEY functions are ignored and the SPLIT KEY indicator is turned
off; however the VIDEO KEY and AUTO SELECT KEY buttons and
lamps continue to operate.

NOTE: Double-pressing the PRI PST PTTN or SEC PST PTTN button
in the Keyer Subpanel opens up a menu that allows you to set the preset
pattern wipe direction. A single press of either the PRI PST PTTN or the
SEC PST PTTN button auto delegates the Wipe Subpanel.

2-36

Keyer Subpanels

SEC
PST
PTTN

Pressing the SEC PST PTTN (Secondary Preset Pattern) button
selects the optional secondary wipe generator as the key source.
Operation of the keyer while SEC PST PTTN is selected is similar
to that when PRI PST PTTN is selected.
The secondary wipe generator option provides wipe pattern
selection independent of the primary wipe generator (no
interaction occurs between them). Without the secondary wipe
option, only secondary preset pattern edge attributes are
independent (preset size, softness, soft symmetry, border width,
border matte, border opacity, and normal/reverse).
All pattern controls are present on the Wipe subpanel and Wipe
menus. Refer to the Wipe subpanel description, later in this
section, for a discussion of these controls.
Primary and Secondary Preset Patterns can be used with all
keyers in layered mode. Preset patterns are not available on the
DSKs.

VIDEO
FILL

MATTE
FILL

The VIDEO FILL and MATTE FILL buttons determine whether the
key is filled with key bus video or a locally generated matte. These
buttons are mutually exclusive; pressing one button de-selects the
other. One of the two buttons is always active and illuminated.
VIDEO FILL and MATTE FILL operate independently from the key
source buttons. All keyer modes except the A and B keyers operate
with either video or matte fill.

When the key bus is contributing to the switcher Program output,
pressing MATTE FILL does not low tally the key bus, even though
the key fill video is not visible.
Video fill mode operates with background keyers in layered
mode. When the keyer is delegated to a background layer, the
VIDEO FILL button is turned on automatically (MATTE FILL is
turned off).

2-37

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Key Source Buttons
VIDEO
KEY

AUTO
SEL
KEY

The VIDEO KEY and AUTO SELECT KEY buttons determine the
source of the key, or “hole cutter.”
Pressing the VIDEO KEY button forces derivation of the key from a
video source. The “video source” is the video selected on the key
bus (for Keyers 1 and 2) or on the background bus (for
background keyers in layered mode only).
If VIDEO KEY and VIDEO FILL are both selected, the result is a selfkey.
Pressing VIDEO KEY while in Chroma Key mode causes an
encoded chroma key, using the fill video as the source for the
encoded chroma keyer.
Pressing the AUTO SEL KEY button forces the key to be derived
from a user-defined source.
User preferences selected in the Configuration/User Preferences
menu determine whether a luminance or linear key is a self-key or
an external key (and determine which external key is used). They
also specify whether chroma keys are encoded or analog
component (YUV, BETA or RGB).

Split Key Operation
A Split Key uses any key source other than a key derived from the
key fill (self key) or a key source pre-selected in user preferences
or a preset pattern. Split Keys can be used in all keyers, in either
standard or layered mode.
A Split Key is set up by first selecting the key fill source on the Key
bus, then holding down the VIDEO KEY button or the AUTO
SELECT button while pressing a second button on the key bus.
The second source provides the key signal. For AUTO SELECT that
key is the external key signal mapped to that column of crosspoint
buttons; for VIDEO KEY the key is the video signal mapped to that
column of crosspoints.

2-38

Keyer Subpanels

SPLIT
KEY

When a split key is operational with an auto select key or a video
key, the SPLIT KEY indicator is lit.

Other Key Modifier Buttons
KEY
OVER

Pressing KEY OVER swaps the priority of the two keyers, KEY 1
and KEY 2, regardless of which keyer the subpanel is delegated to.
The KEY OVER button lights when the Keyer subpanel is
delegated to the key that is over the other. It may be pressed
whether or not either keyer is on-air.
In Layered mode, the KEY OVER button does not light if the keyer
subpanel is delegated to either background keyer, but the button
still controls the priority of Keyers 1 and 2. It does not affect the
priority of the background keyers, which have a fixed priority.

OVER

INV

SHOW
KEY

One of the two key OVER indicators on the associated Transition
subpanel is always on, indicating the priority of Keyers 1 and 2.
The indicator is on regardless of the on-air status of either keyer.
The INV toggle button inverts the polarity of the delegated key
source. Inversion is applied to the incoming key source before key
processing is applied. INV operates in all keyers in layered mode.
The SHOW KEY button is used for viewing the key signal on a
particular keyer. This button does not affect the on-air video.
When held down, the Switched Preview bus output shows the key
signal from the keyer currently delegated to the Keyer subpanel.
The key signal displayed is the key after clipping, masking, and
chroma trapping have taken place.
The SHOW KEY button does not affect the program output of the
M/E or DSK, and operates in all keyers in layered mode.

2-39

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Borderline Controls
NORM

BORD

SHDW

EXTD

OUT
LINE

The buttons at the top of the Keyer subpanel
control the Borderline option. The NORM,
BORD, SHDW, EXTD, and OUTLINE buttons
are interlocked; only
one button can be active at a time. Pressing a
button de-selects any other button.

NOTE: The background keyers (layered mode) do not have Borderline
capability.
Border, Shadow, and Extrude modes operate with video or matte
filled keys. The Borderline matte is separate from the fill matte and
has its own delegate button in the Matte subpanel.
The Borderline matte is adjusted on the Matte subpanel after
selecting K1 BORD or K2 BORD, as appropriate, with the MATTE
SEL delegation button.

NORM

BORD

SHDW

EXTD

2-40

The NORM button turns Borderline off.
The BORD button turns on symmetrical Borderline mode. The
border width may be one, two, or three video lines wide, as
adjusted by the SIZE/POS control. (This adjustment is shared with
Outline mode.)
The SHDW button turns on Shadow mode. The SIZE/POS knob is
used to adjust the shadow width and position from one to six lines
down and to the to the right or left.
The EXTD (extrude) button operates like SHDW except for the
aesthetic appearance of the shadow effect on the screen. The
shadow width and position adjustments are shared with Shadow
mode.

Keyer Subpanels

OUT
LINE

BORDERLINE
SIZE/POS

Pressing the OUTLINE button produces an outline of the key
signal. The border width is adjustable to one, two, or three lines.
In Outline mode, there is no fill video or fill matte; only the
background video and outline border matte are output. As a
result, the VIDEO FILL and MATTE FILL buttons have no effect
when OUTLINE is active.
The BORDERLINE SIZE/POS knob adjusts the width of all
Borderline borders. The control also moves the shadow or
extruded shadow either down to the left or down to the right.
The BORDERLINE OPACITY knob adjusts the transparency of the
Borderline borders.

BORDERLINE
OPACITY

Auto Preview Operation
In normal operation, the Switched Preview output of the system
may be set to monitor any of the M/E preview outputs, DSK
preview output, or preview primary bus.
The Auto Preview feature is activated by pressing one of the keyer
delegate buttons (KEY 1, KEY 2, BKGD B, or BKGD A) for 1/2
second or longer. When Auto Preview is active, the delegated key
is inserted over the M/E preview or DSK preview output on the
Switched Preview bus so that you may preview the key setup.
Holding down the keyer delegate button or turning the CLIP
and/or GAIN controls prolongs the Auto Preview mode. The
preview returns to normal after the delegate button is no longer
held down and there is no activity on the CLIP or GAIN controls.

2-41

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Mask Control
INH
MASK

FORCE
MASK

The INH MASK and FORCE MASK toggle buttons are illuminated
when turned on, and can be turned on individually or together.
When either button is pressed, the Masks subpanel is
automatically delegated for adjusting the mask, if auto delegation
is enabled.
The background keyers (layered mode) do not have mask
capabilities and the mask buttons are inoperative when the
subpanel is delegated to a background keyer.
Pressing INH MASK inhibits the key from being displayed
wherever the mask is present. (Normally, the mask generator is
used to define areas of the screen where the key is inhibited.)
Pressing FORCE MASK causes the key to be fully turned on where
the mask is present, rather than suppressing the key.
The INH MASK and FORCE MASK buttons are inoperative for
preset pattern keys.

2-42

Matte Subpanels

Matte Subpanels
Matte subpanels (Figure 2-9 and 2-10) are provided in each M/E
and the DSK. Controls are provided in the Matte subpanels for
creating and modifying mattes and for assigning the delegation of
the subpanels.

HUE/
SOFTNESS

PRI
WIPE
WASH

SEC
WIPE
WASH

FLAT
MATTE

MATTE
2

K1 FILL
SATURATION/
OFFSET

0702_13

MATTES

K1 BORD

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

PRI WIPE

SEC WIPE

MATTE
SEL
BRIGHTNESS

Figure 2-9. Mix/Effects Matte Subpanel

HUE/
SOFTNESS

SATURATION/
OFFSET

USER
DEF
WASH

SEC
WIPE
WASH

FLAT
MATTE

MATTE
2

K1 FILL

K1 BORD

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

BKGD 1

BKGD 2

TP0702-14

MATTES

MATTE
SEL
BRIGHT/TEX

Figure 2-10. DSK Mattes Subpanel

2-43

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Matte Delegation
MATTE
SEL

Each Matte subpanel has a MATTE SEL button used to select which
of the six matte generators that particular subpanel will control.
Above the MATTE SEL button are six indicators, which illuminate
to show the current delegation at any given time. Pressing the
MATTE SEL button repeatedly cycles the selection through all six
matte generators. Holding the button down causes it to cycle
through the selections automatically until the button is released. If
the Borderline option is not installed in Key 1 or Key 2, the
K1 BORD and/or K2 BORD selections will be skipped.

MATTE SEL Indicators
The six indicators above the MATTE SEL button indicate
delegation as follows:
K1 FILL and K2 FILL LEDs—Indicate that the Matte subpanel is

K1 FILL

K1 BORD

delegated to one of the matte generators for an area determined by
the key hole cutter. However, when the keyer is in Video Fill
mode, the matte is not visible. All key types (LIN, LUM, CHR, PST
PTTN) are operational with matte fill.

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

K1 BORD and K2 BORD LEDs—Indicate that the Matte subpanel is

PRI WIPE

SEC WIPE

M/E Mattes
Panel

delegated to a matte generator for adjusting the characteristics of
the key border matte in all Borderline modes. (See the Keyer
subpanel description for related keyer buttons BORD, SHDW,
EXTRUDE, and OUTLINE.)
PRI WIPE LED on the M/E Matte subpanel—Indicates delegation

of the matte generator for controlling the transition wipe border
matte. The PRI WIPE LED also indicates that the M/E Matte
subpanel is delegated to create the primary preset pattern border
in preset pattern mode. (See the PRI PST PTTN button description
under the Keyer subpanel description.)

2-44

Matte Subpanels

SEC WIPE LED on the M/E Matte subpanel—Indicates that the
DSK Mattes
Panel
K1 FILL

K1 BORD

K2 FILL

K2 BORD

BKGD 1

BKGD 2

M/E Matte subpanel is delegated to create the secondary preset
pattern border in preset pattern mode (see SEC PST PTTN button
under the Keyer subpanel description).
BKGD 1 and BKGD 2 LEDs on the DSK Matte subpanel—Indicate

that the DSK Matte subpanel is delegated to background
generator 1 or 2.

System Background Mattes
When BKGD 1 and BKGD 2 are delegated on the DSK Matte
subpanel, the controls on that subpanel adjust the characteristics
of the two system background mattes that are mapped to the
BKGD 1 and BKGD 2 source selection buttons.

Matte Modifier Controls
Four buttons and three control knobs on each Matte subpanel
control the characteristics of the delegated background matte.
FLAT
MATTE

MATTE
2

The FLAT MATTE button selects a non-wash matte for the
delegated matte generator. Pressing this button deselects all other
matte mode buttons (MATTE 2, PRI WIPE WASH, and SEC WIPE
WASH on the M/E Matte subpanel, or MATTE 2, USER DEF WASH,
and SEC WIPE WASH on the DSK Matte subpanel).
The MATTE 2 button delegates the matte controls to the second
matte generator when a matte wash is selected. To select a matte
wash, press either PRI WIPE WASH or SEC WIPE WASH on the M/E
Matte subpanel or USER DEF WASH or SEC WIPE WASH on the
DSK Matte subpanel.

2-45

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

PRI
WIPE
WASH

SEC
WIPE
WASH

USER
DEF
WASH

PRI WIPE WASH on the M/E Matte subpanel selects the primary
(Transition) wipe generator to modulate between the two mattes
during a wash. Pressing and holding this button allows you to
change the transition softness with the HUE/SOFTNESS knob and
the offset (position) with the SATURATION/OFFSET knob.
SEC WIPE WASH causes the secondary (optional) wipe generator
to be used to modulate between the two mattes in a wash.
Holding down this button performs the same function as with PRI
WIPE WASH.
USER DEF WASH on the DSK Matte subpanel selects the user wash
generator to modulate between the two mattes during a wash.
The USER DEF WASH pattern is a straight line that can be rotated
via the USER DEF WASH ANGLE soft knob located in the Matte
menu. (This menu may be opened by double-pressing the USER
DEF WASH button.)

When USER DEF WASH is held down, the HUE/SOFTNESS knob
adjusts the transition softness, the SATURATION/OFFSET knob
adjusts the transition offset (position), and the BRIGHT/TEX knob
adjusts the texture.
The texture consists of a random-like pattern (the same as the
texture wipe pattern) that is mixed with the USER DEF WASH
pattern. To control the texture, you make adjustments in the same
manner as the wipe texture control, except that the buttons are in
the Matte Texture menu.

2-46

Matte Subpanels

HUE/SOFTNESS knob—Adjusts the hue of the matte. The knob

HUE/
SOFTNESS

also adjusts the softness (gain) of the transition between the two
matte generators when you hold down the PRI WIPE WASH, SEC
WIPE WASH, or USER DEF WASH button. Softness is not adjustable
while FLAT MATTE is active.
SATURATION/OFFSET knob—Adjusts the color saturation of the

SATURATION/
OFFSET

matte. The knob adjusts the offset (position) of the wash
modulation when you hold down the PRI WIPE WASH, SEC WIPE
WASH, or USER DEF WASH button. Offset is not adjustable while
FLAT MATTE is active.
BRIGHTNESS, BRIGHT/TEX knob—Adjusts the color brightness of

BRIGHTNESS

the matte. On the DSK Matte subpanel, this knob also allows
adjustment of the texture of the matte when the USER DEF WASH
is held down.
When a Matte subpanel is delegated away from a matte generator
and then returned, the status of the knobs and buttons is
remembered.

2-47

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Chroma Keyer Subpanel
The Chroma Keyer option, which consists of a dual Chroma Key
input module and a dual Chroma Keyer (processor) module, adds
two Chroma Keyers to an M/E.
With a Chroma Keyer option installed in one or more M/Es, the
Model 3000 switcher can generate key signals on the basis of color
information contained in a video picture. User control of chroma
keying is provided by the Chroma Keyers subpanel (Figure 2-11)
and the CLIP and GAIN controls on the Keyer subpanel.
In addition to the controls provided on the Chroma Keyers
subpanel, several Chroma Keyer controls are provided via the
Menu Display.

TP0702-12

CHROMA KEYERS

R
Y

B
C

M/E 1
KEY 1

LUM

SELECTIVITY

M/E 1
KEY 2

M/E 2
KEY 1

SHADOW
OPACITY

CHROMA

SHDW
ON

BKGD
SUPR

M/E 2
KEY 2

M/E 3
KEY 1

M/E 3
KEY 2

Figure 2-11. Chroma Keyers Subpanel (3000-3 shown)

2-48

Chroma Keyer Subpanel

Chroma Keyer Delegation
M/E 1
KEY 2

M/E 1
KEY 1

M/E 2
KEY 1

M/E 2
KEY 2

M/E 3
KEY 1

M/E 3
KEY 2

The Chroma Keyers subpanel may be
delegated between any of the chroma
keyers using the four (2 M/E) or six
(3 M/E) buttons located at the bottom
of the subpanel.

Chroma Keyer Controls
R
Y

The HUE control sets the color in the chroma key scene from
which the key signal will be derived. The foreground and
background suppress mattes also use this color unless
otherwise set in the menu. The six indicators near the HUE
knob indicate the color the knob is currently set to (R=red;
M=magenta; B=blue; C=cyan; G=green; Y=yellow).

SELECTIVITY sets the acceptance angle of hues used to make the

key signal.
SELECTIVITY

SHDW
ON

The SHDW ON button turns the chroma key shadow on or off.

The SHADOW OPACITY control sets the opacity of the chroma key
shadow.
SHADOW
OPACITY

BKGD
SUPR

The BKGD SUPR button turns background suppression on or off.
When suppression is turned on, the associated control knobs are
used to define the amount of suppression.

2-49

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

The BKGD SUPR LUM control adjusts the amount of luminance
subtracted from the background region of the foreground video.
LUM

The BKGD SUPR CHROMA control adjusts the amount of
chrominance subtracted from the background region of the
foreground video.
CHROMA

Chroma Keyer Operation
The following procedure describes manual adjustment of a
chroma key. Automatic adjustment is provided by the Chroma
Key Auto-Setup Option.
The chroma keyer performs the fundamental suppression
operation by subtracting mattes from the foreground. This results
in a shaped foreground without a multiply operation. The
primary hue selector chooses the hue to be subtracted out of the
foreground. Chroma is subtracted off first, followed by a
luminance subtraction.

NOTE: Adjustment of chroma keys is aided by having a waveform
monitor mounted in or near the control room console.
1.

Select CHR KEY on the appropriate Keyer panel.

For an RGB chroma key, select AUTO SEL on the Keyer panel;
for an encoded chroma key (with a Decoder board installed),
select VIDEO KEY on the Keyer panel.

Select the chroma key source on the KEY bus.

Bring up the Chroma Key menu by pressing the main menu
CHR KEY button.

2-50

Set BACKGROUND VIDEO to OFF and set FOREGROUND
CORING to FIXED in the Chroma Key menu.

Chroma Keyer Subpanel

Select the background hue to be suppressed. Select BKGD
SUPR on the Chroma Keyer panel, then set the CHROMA and
LUM knobs fully counterclockwise. Turn the HUE knob for
maximum effect on the desired suppression hue.

Adjust the SELECTIVITY knob for the desired amount of
selectivity (range of hues admitted by the hue selector).
Counterclockwise widens the selectivity; clockwise narrows
the selectivity.

Adjust the CHROMA knob until all chroma has been
subtracted out of the background. Clockwise allows greater
suppression.

SELECTIVITY and CHROMA may be readjusted to optimize

suppression of the background chroma.
10. Adjust the LUM knob until the background is subtracted down
to black.
11. In the Chroma Key menu, set BACKGROUND VIDEO to ON. To
aid in the adjustment of background video, you may also wish
to set FOREGROUND VIDEO to OFF.
12. Select a background on the M/E to present the desired
background. Adjust the CLIP and GAIN controls on the Keyer
subpanel to achieve the desired effect. Use the lowest gain
that still allows a fully opaque key. Small adjustments of the
HUE and LUM knobs may be made as desired.
13. If you turned off FOREGROUND VIDEO in step 11, turn it back
on at this time.
14. You may verify the desired appearance of the chroma key by
selecting SHOW KEY on the Keyer subpanel and observing the
key on the Preview monitor. Readjustment of the CLIP and
GAIN controls on the Keyer subpanel may be made, if desired.

2-51

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

A secondary hue selector in the Model 3000 adds a color vector
opposite the background hue to selected foreground objects. This
can be used to tint foreground objects to counteract the color from
the background. The secondary hue selector affects only the
chroma suppression of the foreground. It does not contribute to
the background key signal nor to luminance suppression. This
function is enabled by the SECONDARY COLOR SUPPRESS
selection in the Chroma Key/Secondary Color menu.
Refer to the Menu Descriptions section of this manual for
additional features provided by the Chroma Key menu.

2-52

Preview Subpanel (3000-3 only)

Preview Subpanel (3000-3 only)
The Preview subpanel (Figure 2-12) allows you to select the
preview output to be viewed on the switched preview monitor.
Choices available on the switched preview output are Preview
Primary (current selection on PVW/AUX bus),
M/E 1 Preview, M/E 2 Preview, M/E 3 Preview, and DSK
(switcher) Preview.
The buttons on the Preview panel are mutually exclusive, such
that pressing one button de-selects any other button that was
active.

PVW
PRI

TP0702-24

PREVIEW

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

DSK

Figure 2-12. Preview Subpanel (3000-3 only)

PVW
PRI

PVW PRI selects the currently active input on the PVW/AUX bus.

This selection can be any primary or secondary input.

2-53

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

M/E
1

M/E 1 through M/E 3 select the corresponding M/E preview

output.
M/E
2

M/E
3

DSK

2-54

DSK selects the preview output of the Program /Preset and
Downstream Keyers.

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel
The Effects Memory (3000-2) or Master Effects Memory (3000-3)
subpanel shown in Figure 2-13 allows you to define, store, and
recall effects setups for the entire switcher. (See the following page
for definitions of effects and keyframes.)

EFFECTS MEMORY

AUTO
RCL

AUTO
RUN

CLEAR
WORK
BUFR

CONST
DUR

TIME
CURSR

MARK
CURSR

GET

PUT

EFF
DUR

KF
DUR

GO
TO
TIME

GO
TO
KF

CUT

COPY

PASTE

MARK

MOD

INSRT
BEFOR

INSRT
AFTER

MARK
BLOCK

NO CURRENT REG

DPM
1

ENABL
ALL

M/E
1

LOCK

DPM
2

MISC

M/E
2

DPM
3

BKGD

DPM
4

DSK

STOP
NEXT
KF

+/–

HOLD
INPUT

SEQ

BANK
0

REV

M/E
3

EFF
DIS

BANK
1

RE
WIND

PGM
PST

BANK

TRAN
RATE

LRN

UNDO
•

TRIM
ENTER

TP0702-15

The (Master) E-MEM subpanel contains enable buttons, a keypad
with readout, effect editing buttons, effect run buttons, and a run
lever arm.

RUN

Figure 2-13. Effects Memory Subpanel (3000-3 shown)

2-55

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

E-MEM Registers
Effect setups are stored in E-MEM registers. There is a total of 100
registers in the Master E-MEM, grouped in ten banks of ten
registers. Each register belongs to a specific bank (0 through 9) and
has a unique number (0 through 9) within that bank. For example,
register 46 means bank 4, register 6.
When the system is powered up, the keypad readout comes up
with a “NO CURRENT REG” message.

Effects and Keyframes
An E-MEM “effect” has generally been considered to be whatever
was stored in an E-MEM register. This consisted of the status of
enabled levels of the switcher as set up on the control panel and in
the menus, at the time the E-MEM effect was stored (“learned”).
However, the Model 3000 Switcher is now able to store more than
one switcher state (“a keyframe”) on each enabled level in a single
E-MEM register, and to transition, or “run,” between keyframes.
Therefore, a keyframe effect is considered to be a sequence of
keyframes stored in a single E-MEM register.
You may think of an E-MEM effect as being the same as a
keyframe effect, but consisting of a single keyframe on each
enabled level. This mode of operation (single-keyframe effects)
may still be used, and may be preferable to multiple-keyframe
effects in many instances.

2-56

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

Enable Buttons
When you learn a switcher state (or insert a keyframe) into an
E-MEM register, the only switcher parameters that are learned are
those that are enabled by the Enable buttons on the E-MEM
subpanel.
AUTO
RCL

AUTO
RUN

DPM
1

ENABL
ALL

M/E
1

DPM
2

MISC

M/E
2

DPM
3

BKGD

M/E
3

DPM
4

DSK

PGM
PST

Each E-MEM register is partitioned into sections (or “levels”)
corresponding to the Enable buttons and representing functional
areas of the control panel and associated menu selections.
All register manipulations, including Learn, Recall, Put, Get, and
Run operations, affect only the enabled register levels. This allows
you to build independent effects on each level and to recall or run
the levels independently.
For example, an effect using both M/E 1 and M/E 2 could be built
with both being enabled, and either the M/E 1 or M/E 2 part of
the effect could run separately by enabling only one and recalling
the register. Conversely, separate effects built at different times, in
different levels of the same register, could run together by
enabling both M/E 1 and M/E 2.
The M/E 1, M/E 2, M/E 3 (3000-3 only), PGM PST, and DSK buttons are
also used when setting transition rates in the effects systems, as
described later (see TRAN RATE).

ENABL
ALL

Pressing ENABL ALL lights all Enable buttons (enables all levels) if
any or all of them are not presently on, or turns all Enable buttons
off if all of them are already on. This action allows all levels to be
enabled or disabled with a maximum of two button presses.

2-57

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E 1, M/E 2, and M/E 3 (3000-3 only) enable the following areas for

learn and recall operations on a specific M/E: standard or layered
mode operation, crosspoint settings, transition settings, keyer
settings, masks and mattes, chroma key settings, wipes, positioner
settings and full additive mix (FAM) settings.

M/E
3

PGM
PST

DSK

BKGD

MISC

PGM PST enables the crosspoint settings and transition settings for

learn and recall operations on the Program and Preset buses.
DSK enables the following areas for learn and recall operations on
the two downstream keyers: DSK crosspoints, DSK keyer settings,
DSK masks, and four mattes (K1 FILL, K1 BORD, K2 FILL, and K2
BORD on the DSK Mattes subpanel), excluding matte wash.
BKGD enables the two background matte generator settings
(BKGD 1 and BKGD 2 on the Mattes subpanel) for learn and recall
operations, excluding matte wash.
MISC enables the following user-defined areas for learn and recall
operations: frame store settings, peripheral settings, GPI settings,
aux bus settings, mask bus settings, preview bus settings, and
matte wash settings for Backgrounds 1 and 2 and the DSK. All aux
buses default to the MISC level unless assigned to a DPM level
using the Config/DPM Setup and DPM Map Aux Buses menus.

All aux buses are user-definable to be assigned to the MISC button
or to the DPM 1, DPM 2, DPM 3, or DPM 4 buttons. Unless assigned
to a DPM level using the Configuration/DPM Setup and DPM
Map Aux Buses menus, all aux buses default to the MISC level.

2-58

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

DPM 1, DPM 2, DPM 3, and DPM 4 enable certain parameters of the
DPM
1

DPM
2

DPM
3

associated DPMs (Digital Picture Manipulators) for learn and
recall operations. The specific functions to be learned and/or
recalled are determined by the type of DPM, its capabilities, and
the configuration of the DPM port.
Aux buses can be assigned to a DPM level by use of the
Config/DPM Setup menu. Refer to the Startup section of the User
Guide for setting up the DPMs.

DPM
4

AUTO
RCL

AUTO RCL allows the state of the Enable buttons to be learned or
recalled as part of an effect.

If AUTO RCL is on while an effect is learned, the state of the Enable
buttons is learned as part of the effect. If AUTO RCL is off while an
effect is learned, the enables are not learned, and any subsequent
recall (even if AUTO RCL is on during the recall) does not change
the state of the enables.
If AUTO RCL is on during a recall, the enables (as learned) are first
recalled, then the resulting enabled portions of the switcher are
recalled. If AUTO RCL is off during a recall, the enables remain as
set on the Enable panel, and those parts of the effect are recalled.

AUTO
RUN

AUTO RUN enables effect Recall-and-Run operations. When AUTO
RUN is active, a register recall causes a recall of the register, sets the

Time Cursor at Time 0, and causes an immediate run if the effect
contains more than one keyframe.

NOTE: Refer to “Effect Editing Controls,” later in this section, for a
description of inserting keyframes into existing stored effects.

2-59

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Learning Effects
To learn the first (and perhaps the only) keyframe of an effect into
an E-MEM register, enable the appropriate register levels, then
press the following sequence of buttons on the E-MEM subpanel:
LRN, BANK, bank number, register number

NOTE: If the next desired register is in the current bank, you may omit
BANK and bank number in the above sequence.
Also, if the desired bank is 0 or 1, you may substitute BANK 0 or BANK
1 for BANK, bank number in the above sequence.
A Learn operation initializes a register as a single-keyframe effect
(that is, a single keyframe on each enabled level). More keyframes
can be added to a single-keyframe effect by using INSRT BEFOR,
INSRT AFTER, or PASTE (if there is a keyframe on the clipboard to
be pasted).

CAUTION
If a Learn is done in a register that already has a multiple-keyframe
effect, the Learn erases all existing keyframes at all enabled levels
and stores the new state. An immediate Undo will restore the
erased effect!

The LRN button may also be used to learn the current state of each
enabled level into the next unlocked empty register by pressing
LRN •.

NOTE: More information on adding, deleting, moving, and modifying
keyframes is provided in the User Guide.

2-60

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

Recalling Effects
To recall an effect in an E-MEM register, press the following
buttons:
BANK, bank number, register number

or use the shortcuts described in the NOTE under “Learning
Effects”.
On recall, registers are positioned at Time 0 with Keyframe 1 data.
If Auto Run mode is enabled and there is more than one keyframe
in the effect, an immediate run then occurs.

NOTE: When an E-MEM register is recalled, the key memory for any
recalled crosspoint is updated, if Key Memory is enabled in the Keyer
menu.

Crosspoint Override
During an E-MEM recall, if you don’t want the crosspoint on an
individual bus to change, you can manually hold down the
present crosspoint buttons while the E-MEM register is recalled.
This is referred to as “crosspoint override.” When this is done, the
video and key crosspoints are held, and if key memory is on at this
time, the current keyer memory state is also held.
See the HOLD INPUT button description, later in this section, for a
method of holding all sources while E-MEM registers are recalled.

2-61

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Keypad with Readout

NO CURRENT REG
LOCK

+/–

SEQ

BANK
0

EFF
DIS

BANK
1

TRAN
RATE

LRN

UNDO
BANK

•

TRIM
ENTER

The Master E-MEM keypad is used for effect learns and
recalls, and serves as a numerical entry pad for the
following buttons: TRAN RATE, LRN, LOCK, BANK, LRN
SEQ, KF DUR, GET, PUT, GO TO KF, and GO TO TIME. (The
last four of these buttons are located in the E-MEM effect
editing group of buttons.)
Pushing a numerical button at any time other than when
preceded by one of the above buttons recalls the
corresponding register within the current bank. To recall
a register in a different bank, enter the recall sequence
described previously.

Master E-MEM Readout
The alphanumeric readout at the top of the
Master E-MEM keypad provides status
information about E-MEM operations and
registers.

L B0 REG 04

During normal Learn and Recall operations, the display informs
you what the current Bank (“B...”), Register (“REG...”), and
Keyframe (“KF ...) are. If the register is locked, an “L” is shown at
the left end of the display. Other messages on the Master E-MEM
readout include “NO CURRENT REG” at bootup, “NO EMPTY
REGS” if no register is available for a LRN • or PUT • operation, and
“REG IS LOCKED” if you attempt to put an effect into a locked
register. During Gets and Puts, the display provides prompts
asking you for the source or destination register.
One condition that can exist under certain circumstances is having
two different enabled levels that were recalled by two different
registers. In this case there are actually two Current Registers, but
only one can be shown in the display.

L B0∆REG04 KF01

2-62

The existence of this condition is indicated by a “∆”
between the apparent current bank number and
the apparent Current Register number.

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

This condition would occur if (with AUTO RCL off) you enabled
one level, recalled a register, turned off that enable, turned on
another enable, recalled another register, and re-enabled the first
level. In this situation, the locations of the contributing registers
can be determined by turning on one enable at a time.

BANK

↑/BANK is a two-function key that can be used for bank selection
or for accessing “second” functions, e.g., LOCK and UNDO.
Pressing the ↑/BANK button delegates the numeric keypad to
single-digit bank selection, and delegates buttons with second
functions to the second function. The button lights when pressed,
and stays lit until the delegation is completed. Pressing ↑/BANK a
second time will also terminate the delegation.

Refer to “Learning Effects” and “Recalling Effects” earlier in this
section for use of the BANK button, and to the LOCK and UNDO
headings for use of the ↑ (second) function button.

LOCK
LRN

LRN is used for storing or “learning” the Current Switcher State as
a single keyframe (on each enabled level) in an register, or for
learning a register sequence.

Refer to “Learning Effects” earlier in this section for learning
switcher data into E-MEM registers, and to the SEQ button
description for learning a sequence of registers.
In a multiple-keyframe effect, a LRN MOD operation is used to
change register header information, such as Auto Recall on/off
status, Effects Dissolve rate or on/off status, DPM Effect Number,
and Source Hold. The LRN MOD operation is described in the User
Guide and under the heading Learn Modify on page 2-84 of this
section.

2-63

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

LOCK

BANK

LRN

The LOCK function locks a single register. Locking a register
prevents the contents of that register from being changed. To lock
the Current Register whose number is displayed, press the
following buttons:
↑, LOCK

When locked, an “L” is displayed at the left end of the
E-MEM readout, next to the register number. To unlock the
register, press the buttons again:
↑, LOCK

NOTE: You cannot lock an entire E-MEM bank from the subpanel; a
menu selection is provided for this action. (Refer to the E-MEM Menu
description in the Menu section of this manual.)

BANK
0

BANK
1

TRIM
ENTER

Pressing the BANK 0 button makes Bank 0 the current bank, and
causes buttons 0 through 9 on the keypad to become one-button
recall registers for registers 00 through 09. This button is lit
whenever bank 0 is the current bank.
Pressing BANK 1 makes Bank 1 the current bank, and causes
buttons 0 through 9 on the keypad to become one-button recall
registers for registers 10 through 19. This button is lit whenever
Bank 1 is the current bank.
ENTER confirms a numerical entry on the keypad, such as for the
following functions: GET, PUT, KF DUR, GO TO TIME, GO TO KF,
and TRAN RATE. The ENTER button lights when pressed. (The
TRIM function of this button is not implemented at this time.)
SEQ is used for creating automated register-recall sequences.

SEQ

2-64

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

Sequences are created by pressing the following buttons
(parameters in parentheses are optional):
SEQ, LRN,
register, TRAN RATE, delay,
register, TRAN RATE, delay,
...

NOTE: SEQ and LRN may be pressed in either order to start the
command sequence;
TRAN RATE and delay, in parentheses, are optional.
TRAN RATE enables a user-defined delay to be introduced between
register recalls;
delay is a 1- to 3-digit number entered on the keypad that specifies an
amount of delay in TV frames. (If the number entered is a 1- or 2-digit
number, the entry must be terminated by pressing ENTER;
register is any desired register number, as described previously (e.g.,
BANK, bank number, register number).
A sequence loop may be created by again pressing the first register
button as the last register in the sequence.
Sequences are initiated by pressing the following buttons:
SEQ, register

2-65

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

If AUTO RUN is off, a sequence that includes a multiple-keyframe
effect will recall the first keyframe in the register, but will not run
the effect, then will proceed on to the next register in the sequence.
If AUTO RUN is on, the sequence will recall the first keyframe, then
run the effect before proceeding to the next register.
During a sequence of registers with multiple levels, the SEQ
button will high tally if any of the enabled levels was learned with
a sequence. However, this does not necessarily mean that all
enabled levels are sequencing.
Different sequence delays may be learned separately into different
enabled levels. The sequence delays on different levels are
completely independent, and thus the sequencing may be
occurring at different times on different levels. (The register
sequence information is displayed in the E-MEM Register menu.
If an E-MEM level is disabled (its Enable button turned off) while
it is actively sequencing, the sequence will continue. Turning off
the SEQ button at that time will not halt the sequence, because the
sequencing level is not delegated. To ensure halting all actively
running sequences, all E-MEM levels must be enabled (ENABL
ALL) and then SEQ turned off.

EFF
DIS

EFF DIS causes an S-linear transition from the Current Switcher
State to the next recalled register. The Current Switcher State may
be a setup you have just done on the control panel or the state
resulting from a register recall.

An effects dissolve may be learned into a register, so that recalling
that register will initiate a dissolve to another specified register.
Note that only the levels that are enabled on the E-MEM Enable
subpanel will be learned as effects dissolves.
If AUTO RUN is off, an effects dissolve to a multiple-keyframe
effect will stop at the first keyframe of the effect. If AUTO RUN is
on, the current state will dissolve to the first keyframe and the
effect will run.

2-66

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

The following button sequence is used to learn an effects dissolve
(parameters in parentheses are optional):
LRN, EFF DIS, (TRAN RATE, eff dissolve rate), register

NOTE: LRN and EFF DIS may be pressed in either order to start the
command sequence;
TRAN RATE enables a user-defined effects dissolve rate to be introduced
in the dissolve;
eff dissolve rate is a 1- to 3-digit number entered on the keypad that
specifies the effects dissolve rate in number of TV frames. (If the number
entered is a 1- or 2-digit number, the entry must be terminated by
pressing ENTER);
register is any desired register number, as described previously (for
example, BANK, bank number, register number).
The effects dissolve rate is the same as the auto transition rate
indicated in the readout on the corresponding Transition
subpanel.
When the register with the learned effects dissolve is recalled, the
EFF DIS button will high tally until the dissolve is completed, then
will turn off.
During a recall of a register with multiple levels, the EFF DIS
button will high tally if any of the enabled levels contains an
effects dissolve. This does not necessarily mean that all enabled
levels are dissolving.
Different effects dissolve rates may be learned separately into
different enabled levels. The effects dissolve rates on different
levels are completely independent, and thus the dissolves may be
running at different rates on different levels.
A LRN MOD operation can be used to change the effects dissolve
rates on delegated levels of the effect.

2-67

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

UNDO
•

The • (dot) button is used to represent the next unlocked empty
register when used with the LRN and PUT buttons. The next
unlocked empty register is defined as the next register that is
unlocked and empty on all levels, not just enabled levels. The
search for an unlocked empty register starts at the Current
Register and proceeds to register 99, then wraps around to register
0 and continues.
LRN • learns the enabled levels of the Current Switcher State

into the next unlocked empty register, and that register
becomes the Current Register. This initiates the register as a
single-keyframe effect.
PUT • ENTER copies the enabled levels of the Current Register
into the next unlocked empty register. If multiple keyframes
are contained in the enabled levels of the Current Register,
they are copied into the new register. The Current Switcher
State and the Current Register are not affected by this
operation.

NOTE: If there are no unlocked empty registers, the operation will not
be done, an error beep will sound, and the keypad readout will show “NO
EMPTY REGS”
GET • ENTER clears out all levels of the Current Register, which

makes it an empty register. The Current Switcher State is not
affected.
The • function is also used to separate seconds, frames, and field
parameters in time entry commands such as GO TO TIME and KF
DUR.
UNDO
BANK

2-68

•

UNDO is used to back out of a Recall, Learn, Put, Get, or another
Undo register operation. The UNDO button lights when pressed,
confirming that it has been pressed. An Undo must be done
immediately after an undesired operation, otherwise it may not be
able to undo the operation.

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

For the above register functions, pressing ↑, UNDO repeatedly
allows you to toggle back and forth between the two last states.
(For toggling UNDO, you have to press ↑/BANK then UNDO each
time.)

NOTE: Editing operations such as Cut, Copy, Paste, and Mod cannot
be undone with the UNDO function on the E-MEM keypad.

TRAN
RATE

TRAN RATE is used with the keypad to set the transition/mix rates
used by the AUTO TRAN (auto transition), KEY MIX, and DSK MIX
buttons on the Transition subpanels, and by the EFF DIS button on

the E-MEM keypad.
When TRAN RATE is pressed, the E-MEM display queries:
SET WHICH RATE?

and any Enable buttons that are on turn off.
The transition rate is then delegated to the desired Transition
subpanel by pressing M/E 1, M/E 2, M/E 3 (3000-3 only), PGM PST, or
DSK. All of these functions may be enabled simultaneously by
pressing ENABL ALL.

NOTE: When TRAN RATE has been selected, ENABL ALL enables only
those levels that have programmable transition rates (M/E 1, M/E 2, M/E
3 (3000-3 only), BKGD, DSK, and PGM PST).
After the desired levels are enabled, the display queries:
RATE = ? (3000-2)
or
AUTO RATE = ? (3000-3)

(This is the first of 3 rates that the display will ask for.)

2-69

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

To set the auto transition rate for all enabled levels, enter the
desired rate using the number buttons on the keypad. Pressing
three number buttons on the keypad automatically enters the rate.
If only one or two number buttons are pressed, the entry must be
completed by pressing ENTER. Rates from zero through 999
frames may be entered. (If one or two incorrect numbers have
been entered, the entry may be cleared and the previous rate
restored by pressing TRAN RATE again.)
As soon as the new rate is confirmed, it is displayed in the auto
transition rate display on the Transition subpanel of each enabled
level.
The Master E-MEM display then queries:
KEY 1 RATE = ?

This refers to the mix rate of the KEY 1 MIX buttons or DSK 1 MIX
button at the right edge of each Transition panel. To set the Key 1
and/or DSK 1 mix rate for all enabled levels, follow the same
procedure as described above for the auto transition rate. (If you
want to set each key mix rate separately, enable each level
separately.)
As soon as the new rate is confirmed, it is entered into memory for
each enabled level, but is not displayed. The display then asks for
the third rate to be set:
KEY 2 RATE = ?

Repeat the procedure again to set the mix rate for the KEY 2 MIX
buttons and DSK 2 button.

NOTE: The mix rate for either key is displayed on the auto transition
readout when the KEY 1 MIX/DSK 1 MIX or KEY 2 MIX/DSK 2 MIX
button is pressed (initiating a mix) or when the SHOW KEY button is
pressed on the appropriate panel and the desired key is enabled (KEY
1/DSK 1 or KEY 2/DSK 2 button on Keyer panel lit).

2-70

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

Any of the three transition/mix rates can be skipped simply by
pressing the ENTER button when the query appears.
If there are no enabled levels that require one of the abovementioned rates, that query will be skipped. For example, PGM
PST does not require a key rate, and DSK does not require an auto
transition rate.
When the sequence of transition/mix rates has been completed,
the TRAN RATE button turns off and the Enable buttons return to
their previous state, as does the keypad readout display.
The +/– key is provided for future keypad operations.
+/–

2-71

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Effect Editing Controls
The effect editing controls are located in the upper portion of the
Master E-MEM subpanel.
CLEAR
WORK
BUFR

CONST
DUR

TIME
CURSR

MARK
CURSR

GET

PUT

EFF
DUR

KF
DUR

GO
TO
TIME

GO
TO
KF

CUT

COPY

PASTE

MARK

MOD

INSRT
BEFOR

INSRT
AFTER

MARK
BLOCK

CLEAR
WORK
BUFR

The CLEAR WORK BUFR, GET, and PUT buttons on the effect
editing panel are at low tally whenever they are enabled to
perform their respective functions.
All other buttons on the effect editing panel must be enabled
by a menu selection in the main Keyframe menu. (Select
ENABLE with the KEYFRAME EDITING soft button.)
When enabled, the effect editing buttons are at low tally;
when disabled, the effect editing buttons are off. (Some of
the buttons may also be off under certain conditions, as
described under the individual button descriptions.)

CLEAR WORK BUFR is used to restore user-defined default

switcher state values to the Working Buffer, clearing out any
previous values that were stored there. This button is normally
off, but lights for one-half second when pressed.
CLEAR WORK BUFR is always functional, even when the other
effects editing buttons are not enabled (KEYFRAME EDITING set to
DISABLE in the Keyframe menu).

NOTE: The “Current Register” is defined as the active register on each
E-MEM level. If all enabled levels are in the same register, the Current
Register is the same as that shown in the E-MEM keypad display.
However, if the enabled levels have different Current Registers, as
indicated by a “∆” between the bank number and the register number, the
Get and Put operations will operate on different registers. For example,
if enabled level M/E 1 is in Register 1, and enabled level M/E 2 is in
Register 2, a “PUT CUR INTO 03” operation will copy M/E 1 Register
1 into M/E 1 Register 3, and M/E 2 Register 2 into M/E 2 Register 3.

2-72

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

Clear Working Buffer Modes of Operation
With Version 5.0 and later software, there are four modes of
operation for the [CLEAR WORK BUFR] button:
1.

Single press of the [CLEAR WORK BUFR] button — Clears the
Current Working Buffer except Keyers. This clears the CWB to
User-Defined Defaults for all enabled levels, but leaves the
key memory portion of the CWB unaffected.

Double press of the [CLEAR WORK BUFR] button — Clears the
Current Working Buffer including Keyers. This is the same as
a single press of the button, with the addition of key memory
parameters being cleared (crosspoints are unaffected).

Single press of the [CLEAR WORK BUFR] button while holding
down a key bus crosspoint button — Clears only the key
memory portion of the Current Working Buffer for the
selected key crosspoint. (This includes clearing any split keys
for that key crosspoint.)

Double press of the [CLEAR WORK BUFR] button while
holding down a key bus crosspoint button — Clears the
Current Working Buffer for a selected E-MEM level and clears
any split keys for that key crosspoint.

2-73

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

GET provides a method of copying or “getting” the contents of a
GET

specified register into the Current Register.
The Current Switcher State and the Current Register number are
not affected by the Get operation.
The GET button is at low tally whenever a Get operation is
permissible and off when the operation is not permissible (when
there is no Current Register or the Current Register is locked).
When pressed, the GET button high-tallies and the E-MEM
readout provides a prompt. For example, if Bank 0 and Register 7
are currently selected, the display will prompt:
GET 0x INTO CUR

(If the bank were 1 and the Current Register 7, the display
would show: GET 1x INTO CUR)
To get the effect from a specific bank and register, change the bank
number if the correct bank is not already selected, then enter the
register number of the effect to be copied. Press ENTER to
complete the Get operation.
The Get operation does not copy sequence link information
(sequence link register or sequence delay) to the Current Register.
An Undo of the Get operation will restore the previous contents to
the current register, without affecting the Current Switcher State
or changing the current register number.
Also, as mentioned previously under the • button description, the
GET button may be used for clearing out the Current Register by
pressing GET • ENTER.

2-74

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

PUT

The PUT button provides a method of copying or “putting” the
contents of the Current Register into another
E-MEM register. If multiple keyframes are contained in the
enabled levels of the Current Register, they are copied into the
new register.
The PUT button is at low tally whenever a Put operation is
permissible and off when the operation is not permissible (no
Current Register).
When pressed, the PUT button high-tallies and the E-MEM
readout provides a prompt. For example, if a register in Bank 0 is
currently selected, the display will prompt:
PUT CUR INTO 0x?

To put the current effect into a specific bank and register, change
the bank number if the correct bank is not already selected, then
enter the destination register number. Press ENTER to confirm the
Put operation.
The Put operation does not copy sequence link information
(sequence link register or sequence delay) to the destination
register.
If the destination register is locked, the Put operation will not be
performed, an error beep will sound, and the keypad readout will
show “REG IS LOCKED”.
An Undo of the Put operation will restore the previous contents to
the destination register, without affecting the Current Switcher
State or changing the Current Register number.
Also, as mentioned previously, the PUT button may be used to
copy the Current Register contents into the next empty register by
pressing PUT • ENTER.

2-75

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

NOTE: The remainder of the Effect Editing controls deal primarily with
effect keyframes and effect timelines.
Refer to “Effects and Keyframes” near the beginning of this
section for general definitions of effects and keyframes.
In the Model 3000, a Timeline is a graphical representation (in the
Timeline menu) of the keyframes and their time relationships on
a given enabled level in the current
E-MEM register. Each enabled register has its own timeline.
The Master Timeline (the top timeline in the Timeline menu) is a
composite representation of the timelines of all enabled levels in
the current E-MEM register. All time positions of the effect are
referenced to the Master Timeline.
A Master Timeline Keyframe is a point on the Master Timeline that
has a keyframe on one or more levels at that point in time.
The Current Time is the time position of the Time Cursor on the
Master Timeline of the effect.
The Current Keyframe is the keyframe and its duration on which
the Time Cursor is positioned.

TIME
CURSR

MARK
CURSR

2-76

Pressing the TIME CURSR button once brings up the Timeline
menu of the current E-MEM register. If there is more than one
keyframe in the effect, the position of the Time Cursor may be
positioned on the timeline by the RUN TIME) soft knob in the
menu, the Run lever arm on the
E-MEM panel, or any of the effects positioning buttons GO TO KF,
GO TO TIME, NEXT, PREV, or REWIND).
The MARK CURSR button is provided for future editing
operations; however, pressing MARK CURSR once brings up the
Timeline menu.

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

Modes of Insertion/Deletion
The editing mode selected determines the way keyframes are
added to or removed from an effect. The editing mode is selected
by the CONST DUR button on/off) on the E-MEM Effects Editing
panel and by the DELEGATES/ENABLES selection in the Main
Keyframe menu or the Timeline menu.
The four editing functions that add keyframes or delete keyframes
from an effect (Cut, Paste, Insert Before, and Insert After) are
affected by the selected editing mode and by the position of the
Time Cursor on the Master Timeline.

NOTE: Cuts, Inserts, and Pastes cannot be performed on any locked
level of an E-MEM register.
Only those levels that are delegated are affected by timeline editing.
When ENABLES is selected in the Timeline menu or the main
Keyframe menu, all enabled levels are also delegated; thus all
levels are affected. When DELEGATES is selected in the menu,
only specified enabled levels are delegated; all other enabled
levels are enabled but not delegated.
With previous software versions
■

If the Master Timeline cursor was on a keyframe, an Insert
operation (Insert Before or Insert After) used the “on a
keyframe” rule; that is, a new keyframe was added before or
after the current keyframe on each delegated level, and that
added keyframe lengthened the overall duration of those
timelines.

■

If the Master Timeline cursor was not on a keyframe, the
Insert operation used the “on the path” rule; that is, a new
keyframe was added at that point-in-time on each delegated
level, subtracting the added keyframe’s duration from the
current keyframe’s duration. Therefore, the added keyframe
did not add to the overall duration of that timeline.

2-77

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

With software version 5.2, the system makes decisions as to
whether to use the “on a keyframe” or “on the path” rules based
on whether keyframes are present on the delegated levels, not
whether they are present on the Master Timeline.
The new rules are as follows:
■

If any delegated level has no keyframe at the current time
(location of cursor), an Insert operation does an insert “on the
path” on each delegated level. As before, an insert “on the
path” does not increase the overall length of the timelines.

■

If any delegated level has a keyframe at the current time, an
Insert operation does an insert “on a keyframe” on each
delegated level. An insert “on a keyframe” increases the
length of the timeline of each delegated level(s) by the
duration of the inserted keyframe (equal to the duration of the
current keyframe on the Master Timeline).
Note that in Constant Duration mode, inserting “on a
keyframe” is inhibited because that would add to the
duration of the delegated timeline.

These new rules apply to all corresponding Insert, Paste, and Mod
operations.

Constant Duration Off
The following pages describe the operation of the keyframe
insertion/deletion functions when not in Constant Duration mode
(CONST DUR button at low tally) and with ENABLES selected in
the Timeline menu or main Keyframe menu.

NOTE: Refer to the CONST DUR button description for the operation
of keyframe insertions and deletions in Constant Duration mode.
The DELEGATES selection in the Timeline menu is discussed in the
Menus section of this manual.

2-78

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

When CONST DUR is off, the overall duration of the effect is the
sum of the durations of the individual keyframes (on the Master
Timeline). Adding or deleting keyframes or changing the duration
of one or more keyframes may change the overall duration of the
effect.

INSRT
BEFOR

Insert Before, On a Keyframe. When the Time Cursor is positioned
on a Master Timeline keyframe, INSRT BEFOR inserts a keyframe

and its duration into each delegated level just prior to the current
keyframe. All subsequent keyframes are “rippled” (pushed out)
in time by an amount equal to the newly inserted keyframe
duration. This increases the overall duration of the effect by the
duration of the inserted keyframe.
The data entered into the keyframe on each delegated level is the
data in the Current Working Buffer, which is the same as the
Current Switcher State for that level.
Unless otherwise specified (see KF DUR), the duration of the
inserted keyframe is the same as that of the current keyframe.

Any delegated level that does not have a keyframe at that
point in time will have a keyframe and its duration inserted
at the location of the Time Cursor.
Insert Before, On-the-Path. When the Time Cursor is “on-the-path”
(not on a Master Timeline keyframe), the INSRT BEFOR button is

tallied off and the Insert operation is not allowed.

2-79

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

INSRT
AFTER

Insert After, On a Keyframe. When the Time Cursor is positioned
on a Master Timeline keyframe, INSRT AFTER inserts a keyframe

and its duration into each delegated level immediately following
the duration of the current keyframe (in other words, just before the
next keyframe on the Master Timeline). All subsequent keyframes are
“rippled” (pushed out) in time by an amount equal to the newly
inserted keyframe duration. This increases the overall duration of
the effect by the duration of the inserted keyframe.
The data entered into the keyframe on each delegated level is the
data in the Current Working Buffer, which is the same as the
Current Switcher State for that level.
The position of the Time Cursor moves to the location of the
newly-inserted keyframe.
Unless otherwise specified (see KF DUR), the duration of the
inserted keyframe is the same as that of the current keyframe.
Any delegated level that does not have a keyframe at that point in
time will have a keyframe and its duration inserted at the same
point in time as the other inserted keyframes (that is, just before
the next keyframe on the Master Timeline).
Insert After, On-the-Path. When the Time Cursor is located “on-thepath” (not on a Master Timeline keyframe), INSRT AFTER inserts

a keyframe on each delegated level but does not add time to the
overall effect.
The data entered into the keyframe on each delegated level is the
data in the Current Working Buffer, which is the same as the
Current Switcher State for that level. This includes the values of all
parameters at that point, interpolated on-the-path between the
two keyframes, plus any changes that may have been made on the
control panel and in the menus since stopping at that point on the
timeline.
The duration of the inserted keyframe is the difference between
the point of insertion and the position of the next keyframe. The
duration of the previous keyframe (what had been the current
keyframe) is decreased by the same amount. The current time
position remains at the point of the newly-inserted keyframe.
2-80

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

CUT

When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master Timeline
keyframe, CUT deletes the keyframe from any delegated level that
has a keyframe, and deletes the duration of the Master Timeline
keyframe from all delegated levels, even those that do not have a
keyframe at that point. All subsequent keyframes are rippled
backward in time (toward Time 0) by an amount equal to the
duration on the Master Timeline of the deleted keyframe. This
decreases the overall duration of the effect by the duration of the
cut keyframe.
The Cut operation can also be used to clear a single keyframe to
produce an empty register.
When the Time Cursor is not on a Master Timeline keyframe, the
CUT button is tallied off and the Cut operation is not permitted.
COPY makes a copy of the data in the Current Working Buffer, for

COPY

all delegated levels, and places it in the Clipboard Buffer. No
changes are made to the effect.
If the Time Cursor is on a keyframe on the Master Timeline when
the Copy is done, the duration of the copied keyframe is the
duration of the Master Timeline keyframe. If the current time
position is on-the-path on the Master Timeline, the keyframe
duration is the difference between the current time position and
the position of the next keyframe.
The keyframe can then be pasted into another effect (same levels)
or into another point in the same effect (same levels).

PASTE

The PASTE button inserts a keyframe (on all delegated levels) into
an effect. This operation is essentially the same as doing an Insert
After, with the following exceptions: For a Paste, the data to be
inserted comes from the Clipboard Buffer, rather than from the
Current Working Buffer, and the keyframe duration also comes
from the Clipboard if the Paste is done on a keyframe. If the Paste
is done on-the-path, the keyframe duration is handled the same as
that of an Insert After, adding no time to the effect.

2-81

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Constant Duration Mode
The following paragraphs describe the operation of keyframe
insertion/deletion in Constant Duration mode. Refer to the
previous portion of this section for operation with Constant
Duration turned off.
CONST
DUR

CONST DUR forces the overall duration of an effect to be constant

during editing, except as noted here. The length of the existing
effect is unchanged by keyframe deletions (cuts) or additions
(inserts or pastes). When CONST DUR is on, the button is hightallied; when off, it is low-tallied if edit mode is enabled, or tallied
off if edit mode is off.
Also, in Constant Duration mode, the KF DUR button is tallied off,
indicating that keyframe duration modifications are not allowed.
All Inserts and Pastes in Constant Duration mode must be made
on-the-path—they are not allowed on keyframes—except as follows:
An Insert Before may be done on the first keyframe of an
effect, or an Insert After or Paste may be done on the last
keyframe of an effect. The duration and timing of the original
effect are not affected, but the inserted keyframe is appended
to the effect, increasing its overall duration.
When an Insert or Paste is done on-the-path in Constant Duration
mode, the duration of the inserted keyframe is subtracted from
that of the previous keyframe.
A Paste operation in Constant Duration mode is similar to an
Insert After, except that the data to be pasted comes from the
Clipboard Buffer, rather than the Current Working Buffer.
A Cut must be made on a keyframe, whether CONST DUR is on or
off. If a Cut is done in Constant Duration mode, the keyframe state
is deleted and the duration of the cut keyframe is added to the
duration of the previous keyframe. The Time Cursor remains
positioned at the point of deletion.

NOTE: The following operations are the same whether CONST DUR is
on or off.

2-82

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

Modify Keyframes
MOD

When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master Timeline
keyframe, pressing the MOD button once enters any modification
that has been made on any delegated level. When MOD is pressed,
the button high-tallies for one-half second to confirm the Mod
operation.
If an individual delegated level does not have a keyframe at the
time location where a Mod is being done, the Mod operation will
insert a keyframe on-the-path if any changes have been made on
that level. The duration of the inserted keyframe is taken from that
of the previous keyframe. No change is made to the overall effect
duration.

Modify All Keyframes (Relative)
When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master Timeline
keyframe, pressing the MOD button twice applies any modification
that has been made on any delegated level to all keyframes on that
level. For instance, if you want to change the background color by
180° in all keyframes on the M/E 1 level, place the cursor on any
keyframe, change the background color, and press MOD twice
(generally referred to as Mod All Relative operation).
It is also possible to modify all keyframes on a given level to a
single value (for example, changing the background to Blue in all
keyframes on that level) by doing a Mod All Absolute operation.
This function is accessed through the Keyframe menu, as
described in the menu descriptions portion of this manual.

2-83

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Learn Modify
LOCK

MOD

E-MEM Register

LRN

Keyframe
Data

Each E-MEM register contains a block of data called “register
header” information. This data is not changeable on a keyframe
basis, but it can be modified for the entire register using a LRN
MOD operation. The following header data can be modified:
■

Auto Recall on/off

■

Effects Dissolve on/off

■

Effects Dissolve rate

■

DPM Effect Number (DPM level)

■

Source Hold (in the E-MEM/Source Hold menu)

The differences between the “learn” operations are defined below:
■

An E-MEM “Learn” operation modifies both the register
header data and the keyframe data

■

An Effect Editing operation modifies only the keyframe data

■

A “Learn Mod” operation modifies only the register header
data

To use LRN MOD, modify the desired parameter and enter:
[LRN] [MOD]

CAUTION
A simple “Learn Register” operation not using [MOD] erases all
keyframes in a multiple keyframe E-MEM register.

2-84

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

KF
DUR

KF DUR allows you to change the duration of the current keyframe
or to set the duration of a keyframe to be inserted. If not all
delegated levels are on a keyframe, or if different delegated levels
have differing keyframe durations, pressing KF DUR will add an
appropriate change to the current keyframe duration on all levels.

When pressed, KF DUR high-tallies and the E-MEM display shows
the current keyframe duration:
KF DUR SSS:FF.f

where SSS=Seconds, FF=Frames, and f=field(s) of the desired
keyframe duration.
A new duration may be entered as follows on the E-MEM keypad:
[S] [S] [S] [•] [F] [F] [•] [f] [ENTER]*

The keyframe duration is then applied to all delegated levels by
pressing MOD once.
__________________
*Not all digits are required for defining the time. The system will
recognize the • button presses to determine which digits are
seconds, which are frames, and which are fields. For instance, to
enter 2 seconds and 5 frames (65 frames or 130 fields), you would
need only to enter:
[2] [•] [5] [ENTER]
or [•] [6] [5] [ENTER]
or [•] [•] [1] [3] [0] [ENTER]

In all of these cases, the display will show:
KF DUR 002:05.0

2-85

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

EFF
DUR

EFF DUR permits editing of the overall length of an effect. The
duration of an effect is the time from the beginning of the effect
(time 0) to the last keyframe. Effect duration “slides” the overall
duration of an effect and scales the delegated levels. Setting Effect
Duration applies to all delegated levels.

A “natural” duration is one that results from building an effect
from scratch. A “forced” duration results when you modify a
duration from the “sum of all keyframes” time.
When EFF DUR is pressed, the E-MEM Subpanel displays
EFFDUR N — for natural duration, or EFFDUR F — for forced
duration. If any delegated levels have a forced duration, the
display indicates forced duration.
EFF DUR applies only to delegated levels. If the delegated levels
are not the same as the enabled levels, the display will show
DELDUR N, OR DELDUR F, to indicate the effect duration of the
delegated levels.

The EFF DUR button may be used to change the overall duration
of an effect by scaling the effect proportionately.
PREV and NEXT are used to step the effect forward or backward to
PREV

the next keyframe on the Master Timeline.
When the PREV or NEXT button is pressed, it high-tallies for onehalf second to confirm the operation.
The PREV button is off at the beginning of an effect or if the effect
has zero or one keyframe. The NEXT button is off at the end of an
effect or when the effect has zero or one keyframe.

GO
TO
TIME

GO TO TIME enables positioning of the effect to a specific position
on the Master Timeline. When GO TO TIME is active, the desired

time is entered as follows on the E-MEM keypad:
[S] [S] [S] [•] [F] [F] [•] [f] [ENTER]

where SSS=Seconds, FF=Frames, and f=field(s) of the desired
point in time or as abbreviated previously under KF DUR.

2-86

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

GO
TO
KF

GO TO KF moves the Time Cursor to the specified keyframe on the

Master Timeline.
To move to the desired keyframe, press the GO TO KF button, enter
the number on the keypad, then press the ENTER button. (A 3digit number is entered automatically without pressing ENTER).
The MARK button is provided for future clipboard operations.

MARK

MARK
BLOCK

The MARK BLOCK button is provided for future clipboard
operations.

NOTE: Refer to the User Guide for additional information on use of the
Effect Editing controls.

2-87

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Run Controls
The Run controls on the Master E-MEM subpanel
determine the manner in which the selected E-MEM
effect will run.

STOP
NEXT
KF

HOLD
INPUT

REV

RE
WIND

RUN

STOP
NEXT
KF

HOLD
INPUT

RUN

2-88

Pressing STOP NEXT KF causes an effect to be stepped through,
one Master Timeline keyframe at a time. When on, STOP NEXT KF
causes run commands to last the duration of one keyframe, and
each lever arm transition to advance the run only one keyframe at
a time. The button is at high tally when the function is selected, at
low tally when enabled but not selected.
When HOLD INPUT is enabled (high tally), all crosspoints (video
and key) on all buses of the switcher are held. That is, the state of
the crosspoints do not change when an E-MEM recall is done. If
key memory is on at this time, the current keyer memory state is
also held. (See “Crosspoint Override” earlier in this section for
holding crosspoints on individual buses.)
Pressing the RUN button causes an effect to begin running from its
current position. The RUN button is also used to stop and resume
an effect during the run by acting as a run toggle button. The RUN
button lights during a run, then turns off when the run is
complete.

Master Effects Memory (E-MEM) Subpanel

The Run lever arm can be used to manually run an effect.
Moving the lever arm causes the current effect to run.
Normally, the position of the lever arm directly corresponds
to the relative percentage of run completion; however, if
the lever arm and the effect get out of sync (for example, the
lever arm is not at an endpoint when a register is recalled),
the remaining lever arm movement is scaled to the
remaining effect duration. (Forward direction is scaled to
the end of the effect; reverse direction is scaled to the start
of the effect.)
The Run lever arm may also be used for positioning the
Time Cursor in the Timeline menu when building an effect.
REV causes an effect to run backwards. The button may be pressed
REV

RE
WIND

before or during the effect run (on-the-fly). The button lights and
stays lit when pressed, then toggles off when pressed again.
REWIND positions the current effect at Time 0. If an effect is
already running when this button is pressed, the effect run stops
and the effect returns to Time 0. The REV button inverts the
REWIND function. In other words, it positions the effect at the last
keyframe of the effect. The REWIND button lights for one-half
second any time it is pressed.

NOTE: Refer to the Effects Editing section of the User Guide for
additional information on use of the Run controls.

2-89

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Positioner Subpanel
The Positioner joystick allows wipe patterns to be moved from
their current position to another position on the screen.
M/E 1
PRI

M/E 1
SEC

M/E 2
PRI

M/E 2
SEC

M/E 3
PRI

M/E 3
SEC

The delegation buttons located
below the joystick (see Figure 2-14)
enable control of the primary and
(optional) secondary wipe patterns
to be delegated to any or all M/Es.

If all of the delegation buttons are turned off, the joystick is
disabled.

NOTE: The position of a wipe pattern cannot be changed if both POS
NORM and POS AUTO are off for that wipe generator, even if the joystick
is delegated via its delegation button.

TP0702-16

POSITIONER

M/E 1
PRI

M/E 1
SEC

M/E 2
PRI

M/E 2
SEC

M/E 2
PRI

M/E 2
SEC

CTR

Figure 2-14. Positioner Subpanel (3000-3 shown)

2-90

Positioner Subpanel

Direction and speed of pattern movement are determined by the
direction and distance the joystick is moved. The farther it is
moved from the center position, the faster the pattern moves.
When released, the joystick returns to its center position, leaving
the pattern where it is currently positioned.

CTR

Pressing the CTR button causes the assigned patterns to
automatically center on the screen.

2-91

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Wipe Subpanel
The Wipe subpanel (Figure 2-15) is delegated to controlling any
one of the six available wipe pattern generators in the switcher.
Each M/E has a primary wipe generator and may have an
optional secondary wipe pattern generator. The secondary wipe
pattern generator option allows complete independence between
the primary and secondary wipes with no interaction between
them.
Even if the secondary wipe pattern generator option is not
installed, secondary wipes are available, but only the edge
attributes of the secondary wipe are independent. (Edge attributes
include preset size, softness, soft symmetry, border width, border
matte, border opacity and normal/reverse.) Pattern select,
rotation modes, positioner modes, and pattern modifiers are the
same values as those of the primary wipe generator on the same
M/E.

SOFT

SYMMETRY

USER
1

USER
2

USER
3

USER
4

USER
5

USER
6

USER
WIPE
UNDO

LEARN
USER
WIPE

SOFTNESS

BORD

OPACITY

WIDTH

ASPCT

RANDOM

TEXTURE

PRESET SIZE
ROTATION TYPE
ROT
POS

ROT
SPD

WIPE DIRECTION
ROT
MAG

NORM

REV

PATTERN MODIFIERS
FLIP
FLOP

SPLIT

H
MULTI

V
MULTI

ROTATE
DELEGATE
PATT
MIX

M/E 1
PRI

M/E 1
SEC

M/E 2
PRI

M/E 2
SEC

M/E 3
PRI

M/E 3
SEC

PATTERN MIX

Figure 2-15. Wipe Subpanel (3000-3 shown)

2-92

POSITIONER
POS
NORM

POS
AUTO

TP0702-17

WIPE

Wipe Subpanel

The transition WIPE button on the Transition subpanel always
uses the primary wipe generator. Preset wipes, masks, and matte
wash can also use the secondary wipe generator.

Wipe Delegation
DELEGATE
M/E 1
PRI

M/E 1
SEC

M/E 2
PRI

M/E 2
SEC

M/E 3
PRI

M/E 3
SEC

Pressing any one of the Wipe
delegation buttons at the
bottom of the Wipe subpanel
delegates the entire Wipe
subpanel to the named wipe
generator.

Pattern Select Buttons
MENU

RANDOM

TEXTURE

Pressing any of the Wipe pattern buttons (see Figure 2-15) selects
that wipe pattern and lights the button. These buttons are
mutually exclusive (including MENU); pressing one selects a
pattern and de-selects the previously active pattern. Pressing the
MENU pattern button selects a pattern that was previously chosen
in the pattern menu. Double-pressing the MENU button opens the
wipe pattern menu. Wipe patterns not available on the pattern
select panel may be selected through the Wipe menu, described in
the Menu section of this manual.
RANDOM selects one of the available random patterns.

TEXTURE selects a user-adjusted texture pattern, selected in the
Wipe Texture menu.

2-93

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

LEARN USER WIPE – The six USER... wipe buttons let you learn a
USER
1

USER
2

USER
3

USER
4

USER
5

USER
6

LEARN
USER
WIPE

wipe effect into memory and then recall it all at once. Everything
on the Wipe subpanel is learned except the delegate buttons.
Upon recall, the stored wipe parameters are transferred to the
delegated wipe generator. This shared system allows you to
transfer wipe effects from one wipe generator to another.
To store a wipe setup, press the LEARN USER WIPE button,
followed by any one of the six USER buttons. The current wipe
pattern selection and all modifiers will be memorized into the
USER register. To recall the wipe effect later, press that USER
button. After a USER button is pressed, either for a learn or recall
operation, the button remains lit as a reminder that it was the last
one used.
USER WIPE UNDO allows an accidental USER wipe recall or learn

USER
WIPE
UNDO

to be “un-done.” When undoing a recall, pressing this button
restores the panel to the state that existed before the last learn;
when undoing a learn, it restores the user register to its previous
state (the control panel is not affected).

Wipe Control
SOFT

SOFTNESS

2-94

Pressing the SOFT button toggles the wipe edge softness on and
off. When the button is illuminated, wipe edge softness can be
adjusted with the SOFTNESS knob.
The SOFTNESS knob controls the amount of wipe edge softness
when SOFT is on. A setting of full counter-clockwise rotation
causes zero softness, while full clockwise rotation causes
maximum softness.

Wipe Subpanel

SYMMETRY

BORD

WIDTH

OPACITY

Turning the SYMMETRY knob controls the relative softness
between the inside and outside wipe border edges, when the
SOFT and BORD buttons are turned on. The last value of
SYMMETRY is remembered when either BORD or SOFT is turned
off.
BORD toggles control of the wipe border on and off. When BORD
is on, the adjacent WIDTH and OPACITY knobs become active for

modifying the wipe border. The wipe border is functional on
transition and preset wipes only.
The WIDTH knob sets the width of the wipe border when BORD is
on. When BORD is turned off, the last value of WIDTH is
remembered and is recalled when BORD is turned on again.
The OPACITY knob controls the opacity or translucence of the
wipe border when BORD is on. The OPACITY value is remembered
when BORD is turned off.
PRESET SIZE adjusts the wipe pattern size for preset patterns used

PRESET SIZE

in non-transitional wipe patterns. It is also used to adjust the size
of masks that use the wipe generator.
The ASPCT button toggles control of the ASPECT knob (horizontal
to vertical ratio) of the wipe pattern on and off.

ASPECT

Turning the ASPECT knob clockwise from mid-position stretches
the horizontal axis of the wipe pattern. Similarly, turning the knob
counter-clockwise from mid-position stretches the vertical axis.
ASPECT

2-95

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Rotation Type
ROT
POS

ROT
SPD

ROT
MAG

The 3 rotation type buttons, ROT POS, ROT SPD, and
ROT MAG are mutually exclusive and toggle on and off.
Only one of these buttons can be on at a time.

ROTATE

ROT
POS

ROT POS (rotate position) allows rotation of the wipe pattern to a
fixed angle. With this mode on, turning the ROTATE knob from its

ROT
SPD

ROT SPD (rotate speed) allows constant rotation of the wipe
pattern at a rate adjusted by the ROTATE knob. Turning the knob

ROT
MAG

2-96

The ROTATE knob, located adjacent to the three rotation type
buttons, controls whichever mode is enabled. The knob setting for
each of the three rotation modes is remembered even when the
modes are de-selected.

mid-position rotates the entire wipe pattern up to four complete
rotations, either clockwise or counterclockwise.

clockwise or counterclockwise from mid-position causes the wipe
pattern to rotate up to a maximum of four rotations per second.
ROT MAG (rotate magnitude) causes the wipe pattern to rotate as

a function of the transition position (lever arm or auto transition).
The amount and direction of rotation is adjusted by the ROTATE
knob. Turning the knob clockwise or counterclockwise causes the
wipe pattern to rotate up to a maximum of four rotations during
the course of the wipe transition. The starting angle (or position)
of the pattern is determined by the ROT POS value.

Wipe Subpanel

Pattern Mix
PATT
MIX

PATTERN MIX

PATT MIX toggles the pattern mix mode on or off. When PTN MIX
SOURCE is set to NORMAL in the menu, the pattern mix mode

causes the delegated wipe generator to mix its pattern with the
other wipe generator pattern on a given M/E. (The “other wipe
generator” is the secondary generator if delegated to the primary,
or the primary generator if delegated to the secondary.) When PTN
MIX SOURCE is set to TEXTURE, the pattern mix mode causes the
delegated wipe generator to mix its pattern with the texture
pattern.
The adjacent PATTERN MIX knob controls the mix ratio between
the two pattern generators. If the PTN MIX TYPE is NAM+ or
NAM- (as selected in the Wipe Modifier menu), the pattern mix
knob controls the relative size of the two patterns. The knob value
(shared by mix and NAM modes) is remembered when the PATT
MIX button is turned off.

Wipe Direction
NORM and REV select the wipe direction (normal or reverse). One
NORM

REV

of these buttons is always on.
FLIP FLOP toggles flip-flop mode on and off. When flip-flop mode

FLIP
FLOP

is on, the wipe direction changes at the end of each wipe
transition. (The NORM and REV lights alternate on and off during
a wipe, every time the transition reaches the opposite limit.)

NOTE: The NORM, REV, and FLIP FLOP buttons on the Wipe subpanel
do not affect the primary preset pattern key. Instead, a menu selection
provides a choice of either NORM or REV.

2-97

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Pattern Modifiers
SPLIT

The SPLIT button toggles split mode on and off. When split mode
is on, the selected wipe pattern is split into two. Split operation is
affected by the SPLIT OFFSET button and knob in the Wipe
Modifier menu.
H MULTI and V MULTI allow multiple copies of the same wipe

H
MULTI

V
MULTI

pattern to appear.
Pressing H MULTI results in an additional copy of the wipe pattern
being arranged horizontally (in a row). One additional copy of the
pattern is supplied for each push of the button, up to a maximum
of eight rows. Similarly, V MULTI produces multiple patterns
arranged vertically in a column. Pressing both V MULTI and H
MULTI at the same time results in a grid alignment of multiple
patterns.
If either button is held down for 1/2 second, that aspect
(horizontal or vertical) returns to a single pattern.
Additional modifiers are available through submenus available
under the Wipe menu. These menus are described in the Menu
section of this manual.

Positioner Buttons
POS
NORM

POS
AUTO

The POS NORM and POS AUTO buttons are mutually exclusive;
only one can be on, although both can be off. If both are off,
delegating the joystick has no effect on the pattern.
Pressing POS NORM allows you to move the center of the wipe
solid with the delegated joystick on the Positioner subpanel.
When used for a wipe transition, the POS NORM button may cause
the wipe edge to pop if the pattern is too far off center when a
transition is performed.
POS AUTO offers the same ability as POS NORM, plus it scales the
size of the pattern according to the distance it is positioned offcenter. (This action eliminates any popping.) This feature does not
apply to matrix (non-solid) wipe patterns.

2-98

Masks Subpanel

Masks Subpanel
The Masks subpanel (Figure 2-16) services and controls all video
key masks in the switcher. A mask is a control signal used to
modify a key signal. Delegation of the subpanel allows it to
control any of the masks. Buttons and knobs are provided for
controlling mask position and aesthetic features.

TP0702-18

MASKS

TOP / GAIN

LEFT

RIGHT

BOTTOM / CLIP

MASK
INV

BOX

PRI
WIPE

SEC
WIPE

MASK
BUS

MASK
STORE

M/E1
KEY 1

M/E2
KEY 1

M/E3
KEY 1

DSK
1

INH
MASK

M/E1
KEY 2

M/E2
KEY 2

M/E3
KEY 3

DSK
2

FORCE
MASK

Figure 2-16. Masks Subpanel (3000-3 shown)

Mask Delegation
M/E1
KEY 1

M/E2
KEY 1

M/E3
KEY 1

DSK
1

M/E1
KEY 2

M/E2
KEY 2

M/E3
KEY 2

DSK
2

Pressing one of the M/E or DSK Mask Delegation
buttons selects the corresponding mask generator.
Only one button can be on (high tally) at a time;
pressing a button de-selects the previous button
(lamp turns off).

2-99

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

INH MASK delegates the Mask subpanel controls for adjusting the
INH
MASK

FORCE
MASK

inhibit mask. The actual selection of mask inhibit is performed on
the Keyer subpanel (see the MASK INH discussion under the Keyer
panel description).
FORCE MASK delegates the Mask subpanel controls for making

adjustments to a forced mask. The actual selection of force mask is
performed on the Keyer subpanel (see the FORCE MASK
discussion under the Keyer panel description. The DSK cannot
perform a forced mask.
Auto delegation of the Mask subpanel may occur when other
buttons on the control panel are pressed. (Refer to the Auto
Delegation discussion earlier in this section.)

Mask Source Selection
The top row of buttons select sources that determine the shape of
the mask. These buttons are mutually exclusive and one is always
active.
BOX uses a rectangular box generator for the mask. The box is
BOX

PRI
WIPE

SEC
WIPE

2-100

completely independent of the wipe systems. The four knobs at
the top of Masks subpanel determine the position of the four sides
of the box. The box mask has hard edges. Each keyer has its own
box, so it is possible to have up to six differently sized box masks
in use at a time. A box mask is the only type of mask available on
the DSKs.
PRI WIPE selects the primary (transition) wipe generator to

produce the mask. The primary wipe generator in the same M/E
provides the mask signal. Wipe subpanel controls select the
pattern, size, position and edge softness. This is not available on
the DSKs.
SEC WIPE selects the secondary (optional) wipe generator to

produce the mask. The secondary wipe generator in the same
M/E provides the mask signal. If the secondary wipe option is not
installed, the pattern shape and position are the same as the

Masks Subpanel

primary wipe generator. Pattern size and edge softness are still
independent of the primary wipe mask source. This is not
available on the DSKs.

MASK
BUS

MASK
STORE

MASK BUS selects a video source to generate the mask. The mask

bus is a dedicated video bus in the primary matrix accessed with
a bus delegate button in the Aux Bus area of the panel. The mask
bus permits any primary or re-entered input to be used as a mask
source. A clip and gain circuit in the mask generator processes the
selected video input for display in the mask. When MASK BUS is
selected, the TOP/GAIN knob becomes a gain control and the
BOTTOM/CLIP knob becomes a clip control. This is not available on
the DSKs.
MASK STORE selects the output of the mask store for use as a
mask. The Mask bus (after the clipper) is used as the input to the
Mask Store. This allows the clipped mask bus to be frozen and
used as a mask. If the Mask Store option is not installed, the MASK
STORE button does not light. This is not available on the DSKs.

Mask Controls
Several knobs and one button on the Masks subpanel control the
size and edge characteristics of the mask.
An edge of the mask cannot be moved past the edge of the raster
or past the opposite mask edge. On a box mask, as one edge is
adjusted to reach the opposite mask edge or the edge of the raster,
the control function stops and the knob beeps. Turning the knob
in the other direction then shows the mask edge.
The Mask TOP/GAIN and BOTTOM/CLIP knobs function as gain
and clip controls only when the mask source is delegated to the
Mask bus. The clip and gain-adjusted Mask bus can be frozen in
the mask frame store (or mask store).

2-101

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

TOP/GAIN

BOTTOM/CLIP

TOP/GAIN is a two-purpose knob whose operation is dependent
on whether the BOX button or the MASK BUS or MASK STORE
button is pressed. If BOX is active, the TOP/GAIN knob controls the
top side of the box-style mask (see BOX button description). If
MASK BUS or MASK STORE is active, the TOP/GAIN knob controls
the gain of the Mask bus clipper.
BOTTOM/CLIP is a two-purpose knob whose operation is
dependent on whether the BOX button or the MASK BUS or MASK
STORE button is pressed, just as with the TOP/GAIN knob. If BOX
is active, the BOTTOM knob controls the bottom of the box-style
mask (see BOX button description). If MASK BUS or MASK STORE

is active, this knob controls the Mask bus clipper.
The LEFT and RIGHT knobs control the left and right sides of the
box-style mask. They are inactive if BOX is not selected.
LEFT

RIGHT

MASK
INV

2-102

The MASK INV button inverts the polarity of the signal used to
create the mask. A mask that normally allows a key inside of a box
will allow a key outside the box when MASK INV is on. Mask
Invert functions with all mask sources.

Frame Stores Subpanel

Frame Stores Subpanel
The primary functions of the Frame Store option are storage of still
video and key images and creation of dropshadows behind keys.
Controls for manipulation of these functions are found on the
Frame Stores subpanel, shown in Figure 2-17, and in the Frame
Store menu, described in the Menu section of this manual.
The Frame Store option includes three hardware memory arrays:
video channel, key channel, and mask channel.

H
POSITION

V
POSITION

OPACITY

TP0702-20

FRAME STORES

DROP
SHDW

FRZE

VIDEO
STORE

GRAB

KEY
STORE

FIELD
1

FIELD
2

MASK
STORE

Figure 2-17. Frame Stores Subpanel (3000-3 shown)

Input Selection
Aux bus pair 4A/4B can be used to supply inputs to the frame
store video and key channels.
The clipped mask bus is the only input for the mask channel.

2-103

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Output Routing
Video and key outputs from the frame store are routed to the
switcher crosspoint matrix and may be used as primary switcher
inputs. The video and key outputs are also routed to an output
module for use by external devices.
The mask channel output may be used as a source for the mask
generators. It is also routed to the switcher crosspoint matrix for
use as a primary switcher input, and to an output module for use
by external devices.
If the frame store is not in Freeze mode, its output is delayed by 2
fields if 2-Field mode is selected in the Frame Store menu, or by 4
fields if 4-Field mode is selected. (Mask Store has no 4-Field
mode.)

Still Image Storage
Video and key can be frozen either separately or simultaneously
through the use of panel controls. In addition, the system has
read-before-write capability, so stills can be layered in a recursive
manner. The system accomplishes this by sending the output of
the frame store to the input of an M/E for combination with
another image. A composite is generated that can be fed back to
the input of the frame store and re-frozen.

VIDEO
STORE

2-104

KEY
STORE

MASK
STORE

The VIDEO STORE, KEY STORE, and MASK STORE buttons
select whether the Frame Stores subpanel is assigned to the
video channel, key channel, or mask channel. One of these
buttons is always lit, and VIDEO STORE and KEY STORE
may be selected simultaneously.

Frame Stores Subpanel

Operations that can be independently set for video, key and mask
channels are as follows:
■

Freeze

■

Grab

■

Field 1 and Field 2

When VIDEO STORE and KEY STORE are selected simultaneously,
the key channel settings are automatically aligned with the video
channel settings.

FRZE

GRAB

FIELD
1

FIELD
2

The FRZE button provides a freeze/unfreeze function that toggles
between states. Press once to freeze, press a second time to
unfreeze. When enabled, this button stops data from being written
to the frame store, resulting in a frozen image.
Pressing the GRAB button updates the frame store with new input
data and freezes the new data. If freeze is off (moving video is
coming out of the frame store), pressing GRAB turns on freeze.
Freeze can be turned off again by pressing the FRZE button. If
freeze is on and GRAB is pressed, the frame store is unfrozen for
two or four fields and then frozen again (2 fields if in 2-field mode,
or 4 fields if in 4-field mode). The FRZE button remains lit to
indicate that freeze is still on. Since the GRAB button initiates a
single one-time action, it lights only while the button is pressed
and for a short instant afterward.
FIELD 1 and FIELD 2 determine the field, or fields, that are read out

while the image is frozen. Either field may be selected, or both
may be selected at the same time. When unfrozen, the Field
buttons have no effect.
A full frame is always frozen, regardless of the state of these
buttons. This method of storage allows the operator to decide
between fields and frames after the image is frozen.

2-105

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

When an image is read from the frame store in field mode, the
“other” field is replicated from the selected field (indicated by the
illuminated FIELD button), if REPLICATE mode is selected in the
Video Store menu. If INTERPOLATE mode is selected in the menu,
the “other” field is interpolated from the selected field.
A two-field sequence is the normal default image frozen in the
frame store. However, the memory architecture also allows
storage of a complete four-field color frame. A FRAME TYPE
button located in the Frame Store menu allows you to switch
between two-field storage mode and four-field storage mode. At
the present time, either mode allows storage of only one image.
When in four-field mode, not all of the Frame Store functions are
available, but this mode produces the highest quality video, since
there is no decode/encode processing.

2-106

Frame Stores Subpanel

Dropshadows
DROP
SHDW

H
POSITION

V
POSITION

The DROP SHDW button turns shadow mode on and off.

OPACITY

When shadow mode is on, the H POSITION and V
POSITION knobs adjust the horizontal and vertical offset
of the shadow from the main key signal. A third knob,
OPACITY, adjusts the opacity of the shadow.

DROP SHDW mode is functional only with primary video inputs
that have an associated linear key signal. No clip and gain
adjustments are available to the user. Dropshadow mode does not
reduce the bandwidth of the key channel.

2-107

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

External Interface Subpanel

EXTERNAL INTERFACE
EDIT

GPI

PERPH

TP0348-2

The External Interface subpanel (Figure 2-18), located at the left
end of the upper control panel, provides selection of the type of
interface to be used to communicate with external devices.

DPM

Figure 2-18. External Interface Subpanel

The buttons on the subpanel perform the following functions:
EDIT

The EDIT button enables or disables editor access to the switcher.
Initially pressing the button illuminates it and allows external
control of the switcher through the Editor port. Pressing the
button a second time turns off the button lamp and disables editor
control of the switcher. With EDIT off, editor protocol messages
that affect the switcher are still acknowledged by the switcher,
although it does not act under Editor control. For example, the
switcher will still send status information to the editor.

NOTE: An editor cannot control the EDIT button via software protocol.
In addition, the EDIT button does not affect communication through the
other serial ports.

2-108

External Interface Subpanel

GPI

PERPH

DPM

The GPI button enables and disables GPI outputs and control of
the switcher from GPI inputs. When GPI is on, control inputs from
GPI relay contacts are read by the switcher, and GPI outputs from
the switcher are also active for external use. When the button is
off, all GPI inputs and outputs are disabled.
The PERPH button functions in a manner similar to that of the
EDIT button, except that it controls peripheral access to the
switcher via any peripheral-configured serial port and it does not
acknowledge protocol messages while it is turned off.
The DPM (Digital Picture Manipulator) button turns
communication with a digital effects device on or off. The device
being controlled is defined through the Configuration menu. The
default state (as in when the switcher is reset) is DPM Enable (ON).
Set the DPM to OFF when doing live broadcast, and you don’t
want the switcher responding to DPM commands. The DPM
button on the External Interface Subpanel may be used to
enable/disable communications to and from DPMs such as the
Grass Valley Krystal or Kaleidoscope machines.

2-109

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Floppy Disk Drive

TP0348-22

The floppy disk drive (Figure 2-19) is located in the left end of the
Upper Control Panel.

Figure 2-19. Floppy Drive

Operations available by way of the disk drive are
■

Formatting disks

■

Saving and loading system configurations

■

Saving and loading E-MEM register data

Refer to the Disk Menu description in the Menu section of this
manual for disk operating information.

2-110

Crosspoint Name Displays (3000-3 only)

Crosspoint Name Displays (3000-3 only)
The ability of the Model 3000-3 to display crosspoint names on the
Control Panel are activated in this release. The displayed
crosspoint names are defined using the Configuration/Inputs/
Map Inputs/Name Crosspoint Button Menu. While you may
define up to nine characters for a button name, the Control Panel
display only allows up to four characters; the first four characters
as defined in the Name Crosspoint Button Menu. (Refer to your
Operator’s Guide for descriptions of this menu.)

NOTE: This function requires the Input Readout Display Option (Part
No. 088919-00).
The Upper Control Panel LEDs normally display the names of
unshifted crosspoints.

2-111

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Preview/Mask/Aux Bus

PVW AUX

BLACK

M/E 1
B

M/E 1
A

M/E 1
KEY 1

M/E 1
KEY 2

COLOR
BKGD

AUX 1-4 EFFECTS SEND ONLY
M/E 1
PGM

M/E 2
PGM

M/E 3
PGM

PGM

M/E 2
B

M/E 2
A

M/E 2
KEY 1

M/E 2
KEY 2

M/E 3
B

0702-23

The row of buttons labeled PVW AUX (Figure 2-20) that runs
along the bottom of the upper panel is used to select sources for
the preview, mask, and aux bus facilities.

SHIFT

BUS DELEGATE
M/E 3
A

M/E 3
KEY 1

M/E 3
KEY 2

PVW

MASK

AUX
1

AUX
2

AUX
3

AUX
4

AUX
5

Figure 2-20. PVW AUX Source Select and Delegate Buttons (3000-3 shown)
The PVW AUX crosspoints consist of four groups of buttons, as
follows:
■

Primary Source Select (BLACK ... SHIFT)

■

Secondary (Re-entry) Source Select (M/E 1 PGM ... PGM)

■

Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only Select (M/E 1B ...
M/E 3 KEY 2)

■

Preview Only Select (M/E 1 PVW, M/E 2 PVW, DSK PVW)
(3000-3 only)

■

Bus Delegate Select (PVW ... AUX 6)

Source Selection

BLACK

2-112

...

PGM

The first two groups of buttons select primary and
secondary (re-entry) video/key sources for the
PVW, MASK, and AUX 1-6 output buses.

AUX
6

Preview/Mask/Aux Bus

The re-entry sources are as follows:
■

M/E 1, M/E 2, and M/E 3 program outputs

■

Switcher program (PGM) output

The selected source button is either bright or dim, depending
upon its on-air status. All other buttons in the row are unlit.

Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only Buttons
AUX 1-4 EFF ...

...

M/E 1
B

M/E 3
KEY 2

The Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only buttons select both
video and key outputs. Key outputs must be
associated with selected video sources.

NOTE: The AUX 1-4 EFFECTS SEND ONLY buttons are functional
only when the Effects Send option is installed. (For Effects Send
operation, the system automatically configures the aux bus pair (A/B) as
a video/key pair. It is not necessary to do this in the Aux Bus Format
menu.)

Preview Only Select Buttons (3000-2 only)
PREVIEW ONLY
M/E 1
PVW

M/E 2
PVW

DSK
PVW

The Preview Only buttons select the desired
preview output to be viewed on the switched
preview monitor. When one of the Preview Only
buttons is pressed, the PVW bus delegate button is
automatically selected if it isn’t already on.

Choices available on the switched preview output are M/E 1
Preview output, M/E 2 Preview output, and DSK (switcher)
Preview output.

2-113

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Bus Delegate Buttons
BUS DEL ...
PVW

...

AUX
6

PVW AUX selector buttons can be delegated eight
ways using the Bus Delegate buttons. The following
delegation choices are available (one Bus Delegate
button is always lit):

■

The preview bus (press PVW)

■

The mask bus (press MASK)

■

Any of the panel-selectable aux buses (press one of the AUX 1
... AUX 6 buttons)

Preview Bus Selection

PVW

The PVW button enables the selection of the source to be viewed
on the switched preview monitor. The selection can be any
primary or secondary input, or any of the PVW ONLY crosspoint
sources (M/E 1 PVW, M/E 2 PVW, or DSK PVW) on the 3000-2 or any
of the crosspoint sources selected on the Preview subpanel (PVW
PRI, M/E 1, M/E 2, M/E 3, or DSK) on the 3000-3.

Mask Bus Selection

MASK

Pressing the MASK button in the Bus Delegate group delegates the
source select buttons to select a source for the mask generators.
The MASK button high tallies when the mask bus is contributing
to the switcher Program output.

Aux Bus Selection

AUX
1

2-114

...

AUX
6

Aux buses 1 through 6 can be used as simple video
routing aux buses. In addition, aux buses 1 through 4
can be used for sending video and key to an external
digital device (DPM) or to the internal frame store
(Aux Bus 4 only).

Preview/Mask/Aux Bus

Each bus consists of an “A” bus and a “B” bus and is under
E-MEM control. The “A” buses are for video only; the “B” buses
may be configured for either video or key.
Output of Aux Bus 4 to the internal frame store option is available
even if the Aux Bus Output option is not installed.
To use an aux bus as a simple routing bus: for an “A” bus, press
the appropriate Bus Delegate button to select the desired aux bus,
then select any primary or re-entry source on the PVW AUX row.
To select a “B” bus, hold down the Bus Delegate button while
selecting the primary or re-entry source.
To use an aux bus for “effects looping” operation, select the layer
of the desired M/E on the Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only group of
buttons. This causes the selected M/E output to be sent out the
aux bus output. Concurrently, a primary switcher input (that has
previously been chosen to receive the return video from the DPM
or other external device) is automatically routed to the chosen
mixer layer for insertion of the processed video. The primary
input to be used for the return path is set up in the Configuration
menu.
Aux buses 5A through 7B cannot use the effects send function.
Buses 5A through 6B are accessible from the control panel; buses
7A and 7B are available only through the use of an external control
panel.

Effects Send Operation
The Effects Send feature sends the video and key outputs of an
M/E Keyer via aux buses to an external Digital Picture
Manipulator (DPM). The return video/keys are connected to any
of the external primary video/key inputs and may be mapped
either to effects loop crosspoints or to primary crosspoints on the
control panel, or to both.
Before the Effects Send feature can be used, the appropriate
physical cable connections must be made between the Model 3000

2-115

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

and the DPM, as described in the “Cable Connections” portion of
the Installation and Service manual.

NOTE: The Effects Send feature requires that the Effects Send
Crosspoint module be installed in Cell 11 of Bay B in the switcher frame,
and that Aux Output modules be installed in the appropriate output cells
on the back of the switcher frame.
In addition, the following functions must be assigned, as
described in the “Startup Section” portion of the User Guide:
■

The DPM type, aux bus control, port assignment, and channel
routing must be set up in the DPM Setup menu
(config/extern_if/dpm_if_setup).

■

The appropriate aux buses must be assigned to the DPM in
the DPM Map Aux Buses menu
(config/extern_if/dpm_setup/dpm_map_aux_buses).

■

For effects looping, the aux bus return path must be mapped
in the DPM Map Inputs menu
(config/extern_if/dpm_if_setup/dpm_map_inputs).

■

If the output of the DPM is to be used as an input to the
switcher in non-looping mode, that input must be mapped as
for other primary inputs in the Map Inputs menu
(config/inputs/map_inputs).

The Effects Send feature may be used either in Loop Mode or in
No Loop Mode, as described below. This selection is made in the
Aux Menu.

2-116

Preview/Mask/Aux Bus

Effects Send – Looping Mode
Looping mode takes the output of an M/E Keyer, sends it to an
external DPM, then returns the output of the DPM to the
Mix/Wipe circuit of the same M/E in the switcher. This provides
the effect of inserting a DPM right into the M/E, between the
Keyer and the Mix/Wipe system. To select Effects Send looping
mode, first press the AUX BUS button on the main menu panel,
then press the LOG AUX SELECT soft button to select the Aux Bus
to be looped. With the EFF LOOP MODE button, select EXT LOOP.
DPM

SWITCHER
Aux Bus

Aux Bus 1-4
Key
1

Key 1
Key 2

M/E
KEYER

A Bkgd

Key 2
A Bkgd

M/E
MIXER

M/E Out

B Bkgd

Figure 2-21. Effects Send Looping Mode
5.

With one of the BUS DELEGATE buttons, select the (physical)
AUX BUS (1-4) that you want to use. With the switcher set up
as described previously for looping, the DPM output will
automatically be routed to the Mix/Wipe system of the M/E
whose Keyer output you sent to the DPM.

Select the Keyer output to be sent to the DPM by pressing one
of the AUX 1-4 EFFECTS SEND ONLY buttons on the
PVW/AUX row of buttons (M/E 1B through M/E 3 KEY 2).

NOTE: The B and A bus selections apply only when in layered mode.
2-117

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

Effects Send – Frame Store Looping Mode
NOTE: The Frame Store option must be installed in order for the
following to apply.
The Frame Store option may be used as the device that
manipulates the Keyer output. In the Aux Menu, when AUX 4 is
selected with the LOG AUX SELECT button, a third choice, FRAME
STORE, is added to the EFF LOOP MODE selections. Selecting
FRAME STORE will send the output of the selected Keyer to the
Frame Store option module and will connect the output of the
Frame Store to the Mix/Wipe system of the same M/E.

DPM

SWITCHER
Aux Bus
Key
1

Key 1
Key 2
A Bkgd
B Bkgd

Aux Bus 1-4

M/E
KEYER

Key 2
A Bkgd

M/E
MIXER

M/E Out

B Bkgd

Figure 2-22. Effects Send Frame Store Looping Mode
In Frame Store loop mode, operation of the Effects Send loop is the
same as described above, except that manipulation of the Keyer
output is done on the Frame Store panel, rather than by the DPM.

2-118

Preview/Mask/Aux Bus

Effects Send – Non-Looping Mode
Non-Looping mode takes the output of an M/E Keyer, sends it to
an external DPM. The output of the DPM may then be used as an
input to the switcher which may be selected on any bus on the
control panel. This allows the output of one Keyer to be
manipulated by the DPM, then used as a video or key input by the
other M/E or the Program/Preset system.
To
Crosspoints
via Primary
Inputs

DPM

SWITCHER
Aux Bus 1-4

Key 1

Key 2

M/E
KEYER

A Bkgd

Key 2
A Bkgd

M/E
MIXER

M/E Out

B Bkgd

Figure 2-23. Effects Send Non-Looping Mode

To select Effects Send non-looping mode, first press the AUX
BUS button on the main menu panel, then press the LOG AUX
SELECT soft button to select the Aux Bus to be looped. With
the EFF LOOP MODE button select NO LOOP.

2-119

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

With one of the BUS DELEGATE buttons, select the (physical)
AUX BUS (1-4) that you want to use. With the switcher set up
as described previously for non-looping, the DPM output will
be routed to the previously-mapped crosspoint column on the
Source Select panel.

Select the Keyer output to be sent to the DPM by pressing one
of the AUX 1-4 EFFECTS SEND ONLY buttons on the
PVW/AUX row of buttons (M/E 1B through M/E 3 KEY 2).

NOTE: The B and A bus selections apply only when in layered mode.
4.

2-120

On the Source Select panel, select the DPM output on the aux
return that has been mapped to one of the crosspoints, as
described earlier. This may then be selected as a source on any
output bus on the Source Select panel.

Remote Aux Bus Panels

Remote Aux Bus Panels
The Remote Aux Control Panels allow you to control the switcher
aux buses from a remote location. There are three models of the
Remote Aux Panels, each identified by the number of rack units
(RUs) it occupies in the equipment rack.
■

One RU panel (Option Part Number 088901-00)

■

Two RU panel (Option Part Number 088902-00)

■

Three RU panel (Option Part Number 088903-00)

The one RU and two RU panels (Figure 2-24) are functionally
identical. The one RU panel is designed for areas with very
restricted space, and has small crosspoint buttons containing LED
tally lamps. The two RU panel has large crosspoint buttons with
internal tally lamps. Each of these panels must be set up to control
a specific aux bus and must have the setup changed to control
another bus.

24 SHIFT

M/E M/E M/E
1
2
3 PGM

ON
AIR

Grass Valley Group

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SHIFT

M/E
1

M/E
2

M/E
3

PGM

Grass Valley Group

Figure 2-24. One RU and Two RU Remote Aux Control Panels

2-121

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

The three RU panel (Figure 2-25) has large buttons and is designed
for locations where it is desirable to operate more than one bus.
This panel will normally control all aux buses but can be set up to
lock out specific buses.

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SHIFT

M/E
1

SOURCE

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
AUX
1A

AUX
2A

AUX
3A

AUX
4A

AUX
5A

AUX
6A

AUX
7A

AUX
8A

AUX
9A

AUX
1B

AUX
2B

AUX
3B

AUX
4B

AUX
5B

AUX
6B

AUX
7B

AUX
8B

AUX
9B

M/E
2

M/E
3

PGM

DELEGATE

Grass Valley Group

Figure 2-25. Three RU Remote Aux Control Panel

As many as 32 Remote Aux Panels can be attached to one switcher.

Source Selection

...

PGM

The Remote Aux Panels are designed to control 48
primary inputs (24 unshifted and 24 shifted) and four
re-entry inputs.

Each crosspoint lamp on the two or three RU panel will high tally
when that input is on air. There is an ON AIR lamp on the one RU
panel which will illuminate to indicate that the selected input is on
air. The on-air tally can be permanently enabled on all panels.

2-122

Remote Aux Bus Panels

Rear Panel Switches
The rear panel includes a number of switches that control
operating modes, such as address, bus enable, delegate enable,
and test mode. These switches are set up during installation, as
described in the Installation section of the Installation & Service
manual.

Remote Aux Operation
Operation of the Remote Aux Panel is identical to operation of the
local aux panel installed in the switcher control panel.
If the switcher setup identifies a bus pair (e.g. 2A and 2B) as video
and key, selecting a source on bus 2A will also change 2B. To split
the key selection will require use of the three RU panel or two of
the one or two RU panels (one set up for each bus).
More than one Remote Aux Control Panel can attempt to control
a single aux bus. When two or more panels controlling the same
bus have source buttons pressed, the panel with the highest
address will control the source.

Joystick Override
Each panel has inputs for up to 8 external user-supplied switch
closures to enable the override. The aux bus switches to a userdefined crosspoint selection when the switch is closed. When the
switch is released, the aux bus returns to its previous selection.

Chop
Chop mode provides continuous automatic switching between
two sources at frame rate. This function allows you to compare
two signals for system calibration.

2-123

Section 2 — Control Panel Descriptions

2-124

Menu Descriptions

Introduction
Many Model 3000 features are accessed via the Menu Display on
the upper control panel. This section illustrates the top-level
menus and their submenus, and describes the functions of the
“soft buttons” and “soft knobs” accessed by each. The top-level
menus are presented in the order that the top menu buttons occur
on the panel, from upper left to lower right.

TP0702-19

NOTE: The menus shown in this section are for the 3000-3. Menus for
the 3000-2 are the same except that the M/E 3 selections are not present.

CONFG

M/E
MODE

STAT

KEYER MENU

CORING
= 5.0 IRE

/keyer

KEYER

CHR
KEY

WIPE

E-MEM

KEY
FRAME

AUX
BUS

OPACITY
= 100%

HORIZONTAL
KEY POSITION
= 2.5 clocks

M/E 1
MASK

LAST
MENU

MATTE

MISC

FRAME
STORE

DISK

M/E 2

SHAPED

M/E 3

UNSHAPED

DSK

KEY 1

OFF

CONFIG

M/E
SELECT

KEYER
SELECT

CHROMA
TRAP

CORING

SUPER
BLACK

SHAPING

SUPERBLACK INPUT LEVEL
= 7.5 IRE
KEY 1
NAM >

VIDEO
PROCESS >

EXIT

Figure 3-1. Top-Level Menu Buttons and Menu Display

3-1

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Menu Structure
The top-level menus may be displayed by pressing the buttons at
the left of the Menu Display. Submenus are then brought up by
pressing the soft buttons at the bottom of the display. Each menu
function that will call up a submenu is indicated by a “>” symbol
at the end of the function name in the display.
The menus presented here are arranged in hierarchical order; that
is, after each top-level menu, the submenus under that menu are
described before going on to the next top-level menu. (All menus
and submenus are listed in the “local” Table of Contents at the
beginning of this section.) The hierarchical menu structures may
also be seen in the Menu Trees section of this manual.

Menu Delegation
Some menus or submenus may be brought up by automatic menu
delegation which is activated by double-pressing certain buttons on
the control panel. (The second press must occur within a
predetermined amount of time.) Table 3-1 lists the buttons that
support this function.

3-2

Menu Delegation

Table 3-1. Menu Delegation
Subpanel

Button Double-Pressed

Delegated Menu

Transition

BKGD B

M/E Mode menu

Keyer (M/E)

KEY 1 and KEY 2

Keyer menu

Keyer (M/E)
(Layered Mode)

BKGD B, BKGD A,
KEY 1, and KEY 2

Keyer menu

Keyer (M/E)

PRI PST PTTN or SEC
PST PTTN

Wipe Modifier menu

CHR KEY

Chroma Key menu

Downstream Keyer

DSK 1 and DSK 2

Keyer menu

Chroma Keyer

M/E 1 KEY 1 through
M/E 2 KEY 2 on 3000-2

Chroma Key menu

Comments

Used to set PST PTN
DIRECTION

or through M/E 3 KEY
2 on 3000-3
DSK Matte

USER DEF WASH

Matte menu

Wipe

Wipe Pattern MENU

Wipe Pattern menu

M/E 1 PRI through
M/E 2 SEC on 3000-2
or through M/E 3 SEC
on 3000-3

Wipe Modifier menu

Wipe Pattern

Wipe Texture menu

Used to set USER
DEF WASH ANGLE

TEXTURE

3-3

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Configuration Menu
The Configuration Menu is used for system setup. Functions are
covered in detail in the Startup section of User Guide.

CONFIGURATION MENU
config

USER
PREFS >

SYSTEM
PARAMS >

INPUTS >

OUTPUTS >

EXTERN
I/F >

AUX BUS
FORMAT >

Each of the soft buttons defined in the Configuration Menu brings
up a submenu, as follows:
USER PREFS> — Displays the User Preferences submenu. From
time to time you may wish to change some of the parameters in
this submenu, such as keyer preferences and preview preferences.
SYSTEM PARAMS> — Displays the System Parameters submenu.
INPUTS> — Displays the Inputs submenu. Assignment (mapping)

of the input sources to the crosspoint buttons on the Source Select
panel is done through this submenu.
OUTPUTS> — Displays the Outputs submenu.
EXTERN I/F> — Displays the External Interfaces submenu.
AUX BUS FORMAT> — Displays the Aux Bus Format submenu.

3-4

Configuration Menu

User Preferences Menu
The User Preferences Menu gives you control over some of the
user interface functions of the system.

USER PREFS MENU
config / user prefs

LATCH
NORMAL

SHIFT
MODE

KEYER
PREFS >

PREVIEW
PREFS >

BEEPER
PREFS >

DEFINE
DEFAULTS >

The User Preferences Menu selections are as follows:
SHIFT MODE — Sets crosspoint Shift button to Normal or Latch
mode. Normal requires holding down Shift each time you select a
shifted crosspoint. Latch mode locks Shift on after first use.
KEYER PREFS> — Displays the Keyer Preferences Menu.
PREVIEW PREFS> — Displays the Preview Prefs Menu.
BEEPER PREFS — Displays the Beeper Prefs Menu.
DEFINE DEFAULTS> — Displays the Define Defaults Menu, which

allows you to change the default values used when the switcher is
turned on.
E-MEM PREFS — Displays the E-MEM Prefs Menu.

3-5

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Ke y e r P r e fe r e n c e s Me n u
The Keyer Preferences Menu allows you to select keyer operating
modes.

KEYER PREFS MENU
config / user prefs / keyer prefs

OFF

DSK
DROP

KEY
MEMORY

CLEAR
KEY MEM >

The Keyer Preferences Menu selections are the following:
DSK DROP — Enables/disables DSK drop mode.
KEY MEMORY — Enables/disables key memory mode, which
remembers settings of the keyer analog controls from the last use.
CLEAR KEY MEM> — Displays the Clear Key Memory Menu,

which allows you to clear the key memory settings for various
areas of the switcher.

3-6

Configuration Menu

Clear Key Memory Menu
The Clear Key Memory Menu allows you to clear key memory
settings for selected areas of the switcher.

CLEAR KEY MEMORY MENU
config / user prefs / keyer prefs / clear key mem

CURRENT
XPT
7
Press a button below to clear key memory for –
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
DSK
AUX
MASK

A
B
KEY 1
KEY 2

SECTION
SELECT

BUS
SELECT

CLEAR XPT: the current xpt on the selected bus
CLEAR BUS: all xpts on the selected bus
CLEAR SECTION: all xpts on all buses in the selected section
CLEAR SWITCHER: all xpts in the switcher

CLEAR
XPT

CLEAR
BUS

CLEAR
SECTION

CLEAR
SWITCHER

The Clear Key Memory Menu selections are as follows:
SECTION SELECT and BUS SELECT — Select the area of the
switcher whose key memory you wish to clear.

After selecting the section and bus, press the specific
crosspoint desired on the selected bus. (The number of that
crosspoint will appear in the CURRENT XPT box in the menu.)
When DSK is the section selection, bus selections are KEY 1
and KEY 2. When AUX is selected, bus choices are 1 through 7.
And when MASK is selected, the BUS SELECT and CLEAR
SECTION choices disappear.
CLEAR XPT, CLEAR BUS, CLEAR SECTION, and CLEAR SWITCHER
— Perform the Clear operation for the selected memory area.

3-7

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

P r e v i e w P r e fe r e n c e s Me n u
The Preview Preferences Menu allows you to set the preview
options for selected switcher subsystems. Your choice of Preview
Modes depends on how many monitors you have per M/E and
how you wish to use them.

PREVIEW PREFS MENU

PUSH TO PREVIEW TIMEOUT
= 3 secs

config / user prefs / preview prefs

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PGM PST

PGM
ALL KEYERS
OFF
LOOKAHEAD
PGM
OFF
PGM
OFF

AUTO

ALL KEYERS

LOOKAHEAD DELEG KEYER
M/E 2
PVW
SELECT

PGM

OFF

DIM
PVW

PUSH TO
PVW

The Preview Preferences Menu selections are as follows:
PVW SELECT — Selects the switcher subsystem whose preview

options you wish to set.

NOTE: The optional M/E Preview mezzanine board must be installed
in each M/E in order to select AUTO and LOOKAHEAD Preview Modes.
These selections are not displayed in the menu if the board is not
installed.
PVW MODE — Selects the preview mode desired for the selected
switcher subsystem:

3-8

Configuration Menu

AUTO — Causes the video to alternate between the M/E PGM
and PVW (next transition) outputs on a single M/E monitor
as the M/E output changes from on-air to not on-air.
LOOKAHEAD — Causes the next transition of the selected
M/E (what is going on-air next) to be displayed on the M/E
monitor.
PGM — Causes the PGM output of the M/E or the PGM PST
to be displayed on the Preview monitor.
KEY PVW (displayed only if PGM PST is selected) — Causes

the DSK 1 and DSK 2 keys to be displayed over the PGM PST
transition on the Preview Monitor.
DIM PVW — Turns the dim preview function on or off.
ALL KEYERS — Causes the preview of all keyers using a mask

in that M/E or DSK to dim.
DELEG KEYER — Causes only the preview of the currently

delegated keyer using a mask in that M/E or DSK to dim.
OFF — Turns off the preview dim function so that the preview
never dims in the selected M/E or DSK regardless of masking.
PUSH TO PVW — Enables/disables the push-to-preview mode for
the entire switcher. When ON, the push-to-preview feature allows

you to make key setting changes on the selected keyer without
affecting the Program output of the M/E.
To display the M/E look-ahead preview, the key delegate
button (for example KEY 1 or KEY 2 on the Keyer panel) must
be held down for 1/2 second or more.
PUSH TO PREVIEW TIMEOUT — Sets how long the preview
will remain on after the key delegate button has been released
and the clip and gain controls are not being operated.

3-9

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Be e p e r P r e fs Me n u
The Beeper Preferences Menu allows you to customize beeper
alerts.

BEEPER PREFS MENU
config / user prefs / beeper prefs

OFF

BEEPER
ON/OFF

WARNING

END OF
KNOB

KNOB
CENTER

INACTIVE
KNOB

The Beeper Prefs Menu selections are as follows:
BEEPER ON/OFF —Enables or disables the beeper alert system.
WARNING—Use to enable or disable beeper warnings. (For
example: On the Keyer Copy Menu, if you try to copy M/E 1 Key
1 to M/E 1 Key 1 (copy a key onto itself) you will get a beep with
Beeper Prefs selection: WARNING ON.)
END OF KNOB —Enable or disable the beeper alert that sounds

when the knob is turned to either end of its’ range.
KNOB CENTER —Enable or disable the beeper alert that sounds
when the knob is turned to the center of its’ range.
INACTIVE KNOB —Enable or disable the beeper alert for knobs

“turned off” during the current switcher state.

3-10

Configuration Menu

De fi n e De fa u l ts Me n u
The Define Defaults Menu allows you to change the default values
that are stored in memory and used when the switcher is turned
on.

DEFINE DEFAULTS MENU
config / user prefs / define defaults

Set Default State to Current Switcher State. All M/Es will use

M/E 1 settings.

Set Default State to GVG Factory Default.

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
M/E
SELECT

GVG
DEFAULT

SET
DEFAULT

The Define Defaults Menu selections are as follows:
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/E whose settings are to be used

during power-up. (Only one set of values is stored for the M/Es,
therefore both M/Es use the same values at boot-up.) The
switcher panel (including the selected M/E) is used to set up the
switcher default values.
SET DEFAULT — Enters the new default values.
GVG DEFAULT — Restores the factory-set default values to the

switcher.

3-11

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

E -ME M P r e fe r e n c e s Me n u (3 0 0 0 -3 o n l y )
The E-MEM Preferences Menu allows you to set up preferences
for E-MEM effects editing functions and Master E-MEM.

E-MEM USER PREFS MENU
config / user prefs / E-MEM prefs

ENABLE
DISABLE

RUN
LEVER

KEYFRAME
EDITING

<>
<>

300 STYLE
NORMAL

MASTER
E-MEM

The E-MEM User Preferences Menu selections are as follows:
RUN LEVER — Enables or disables running of keyframe effects
using the Run Control lever arm.
KEYFRAME EDITING — Enables or disables editing of keyframe

effects.
MASTER E-MEM — Enables normal Master E-MEM operation or

300-style E-MEM operation.

3-12

Configuration Menu

No r m a l Mo d e
In Normal mode on a 2 M/E Switcher, when you do a Learn or
Recall, individual M/Es are simply levels in the Master E-MEM
register.
In Normal mode on a 3 M/E Switcher, when you do a Learn or
Recall, the Master E-MEM forces all individual enabled M/Es to
align with the same register that the Master E-MEM is pointing to
and causes the individual M/Es to learn the current Switcher
setup into those aligned registers.

L e a r n A Re g i s te r
We will look at how the Learn operation works with Auto Run,
Auto Recall, and Effects Dissolve in the Normal mode.

Au to Re c a l l
■

Auto Recall ON — Switcher learns the current Switcher
enables into the Master E-MEM register

■

Auto Recall OFF — Switcher does not learn Switcher enables
into the Master E-MEM register

Au to Ru n
■

■

Auto Run ON — Operation does two things:
•

Enables the Auto Run function

•

Turns on Independent Timeline runs

Auto Run OFF — Operation does two things:
•

Disables the Auto Run function

•

Turns on Master Timeline runs

3-13

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

NOTE: In a later Switcher software release, Independent and Master
Timeline runs will be controlled by a menu selection.

E ffe c ts Di s s o l v e
■

Effects Dissolve ON — Switcher learns that Effects Dissolve is
on into the Master E-MEM register

■

Effects Dissolve OFF — Dissolve is not learned into Master
E-MEM register

Re c a l l A Re g i s te r
We will look at how the Recall operation works with Auto Run,
Auto Recall, and Effects Dissolve in the Normal mode.
Auto Recall
■

Auto Recall ON — Switcher recalls learned enables before
recalling the effect

■

Auto Recall OFF — Switcher does not recall the learned
enables. The Switcher recalls only what is currently enabled
on the Control Panel
Auto Run

■

Auto Run ON — After the effect is recalled it runs (if the effect
has multiple keyframes stored)

■

Auto Run OFF — After the effect is recalled it waits at the first
keyframe
Effects Dissolve

3-14

■

Effects Dissolve ON (or ON when Learned) — Switcher
applies a dissolve from the Switcher’s current state (or
register) to the register being recalled

■

Effects Dissolve OFF (and OFF when Learned) — Switcher
does nothing

Configuration Menu

3 0 0 S ty l e Mo d e (3 -M/ E S w i tc h e r s O n l y )
In 300 Style mode, when you do a Learn or Recall, the Master
E-MEM allows individual M/Es to “skew registers” (that is,
allows M/Es to point to different registers) than the Master EMEM is pointing and allows the Master E-MEM to learn the
individual M/E’s skewed register numbers. This operation does
not change the content of those skewed M/E registers, because the
operation does not write the current M/E settings into those
registers. You must independently learn the M/E settings into the
individual M/E E-MEMs.
Registers that are Learned using the Model 300 Style mode have
an “M” in the Master E-MEM display as a mode identifier.
The Learn and Recall operation, described in the previous Normal
mode text, is identical in the 300 Style mode. Therefore, that text is
not repeated here.

O p e r a ti o n a l De fa u l ts i n E i th e r Mo d e
■

If Auto Run is ON when the register is Recalled, the keyframe
effect runs.

■

If Auto Run is OFF when the register is Recalled, the keyframe
effect does not run when Recalled.

■

If Auto Recall is ON when the register is Learned and ON
when the register is Recalled, the Switcher enables are learned
with the effect and re-established before the effect is recalled.

■

If Auto Recall is ON when the register is Learned and OFF
when the register is Recalled, the Switcher enables do not
change from the current settings.

■

If Auto Recall is OFF when the register is Learned and ON
when the register is Recalled, all Switcher enables go off.

■

If Effects Dissolve is ON when the register is Learned, the
Switcher runs the dissolve when the register is recalled
whether the Effects Dissolve button is currently ON or OFF.

3-15

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

System Parameters Menu
The System Parameters Menu allows you to set the video
standard (internal black level), to select the matte generator
chroma limiting algorithm, and to set the system clock.

SYSTEM PARAMETERS MENU

START HORIZONTAL BLANKING
= 0.0 clocks

config / system params

END HORIZONTAL BLANKING
= 0.0 clocks

SUPERBLACK OUTPUT
= -10.0 IRE
XMITABLE
FIELD 1

VALID RGB

7.5 IRE

FIELD 2

BOTH

4X3

0 IRE

NONE

16 X 9

INTERNAL
BLACK LVL

FIELD
DOM

MATTE
GEN LIM

H-BLANKING
DEFAULT

ASPECT
RATIO

SET
CLOCK >

The System Parameters Menu selections are as follows:
INTERNAL BLACK LVL — Selects either 7.5 IRE or 0 IRE, which sets
the video standard (internal black level) for operation on the
NTSC standard used in the U.S.A. (Black = 7.5 IRE) or the NTSC
standard used in Japan (Black = 0 IRE).
FIELD DOM — Allows you to specify on which field “set” changes
made during the vertical interval will take effect.
NONE — Selection changes become effective at the beginning

of the next field, immediately after the functions have been
changed).

3-16

Configuration Menu

FIELD 1 or FIELD 2 — Changes become effective at the

beginning of the selected field. If a change takes place prior to
the other field, it will be delayed by one field so that it also
becomes effective at the beginning of the selected field. This
way, all changes are synchronized to take place at the
beginning of the same field.
MATTE GEN LIM — Selects the desired matte generator
chroma limiting algorithm. The selections are as follows:
XMITABL — Prevents the total signal (luminance and

chrominance) from exceeding the NTSC transmission
standard.
VALID RGB — Limits colors to those which generate red,
green, and blue values within the 0 to 100% range.
BOTH — Selects a valid RGB color limiter that also prevents
the encoded signal envelope from exceeding NTSC
transmission level. (This is the system default mode.)
NONE — Turns off all algorithm methods for matte generator
limiting.
START HORIZONTAL BLANKING — Adjusts the start of H blanking
over a range of -16.0 clocks to +16.0 clocks. Default is 0.0 clocks.
END HORIZONTAL BLANKING — Adjusts the end of H blanking

over a range of -16.0 clocks to +16.0 clocks. Default value is 0.0
clocks.
SUPERBLACK OUTPUT — Adjusts the superblack output level

over a range of -20.0 IRE to +7.5 IRE for U.S.A. NTSC, or -20.0 IRE
to 0.0 IRE for the Japanese NTSC.
H-BLANKING DEFAULT — Resets the horizontal blanking start and

end values to GVG default settings (0.0 clocks).
ASPECT RATIO — Selects either 4x3 or 16x9 Aspect ratio for those
installations equiped for this format.
SET CLOCK> — Displays the Set Clock Menu, which allows you to

set the date and time for the system.

3-17

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

S e t Cl o c k Me n u
The Set Clock Menu allows you to set the date and time for the
system. This is used for dating files copied to disk.

SET CLOCK MENU

YEAR
= 1994

config / system param / set clock

CLOCK

MONTH
= July

July 4 1994
5:07:00 PM
Press "CONFIRM" button
to update the clock
setting

DAY
=4

DATE
TIME
SELECT

CONFIRM

The Set Clock Menu selections are as follows:
SELECT — Enables the DATE or TIME functions for setting the

system clock.
DATE — Enables the YEAR, MONTH, and DAY soft knobs for
setting the date.
TIME — Enables the HOUR, MINUTE, and SECOND soft knobs
for setting the time.
CONFIRM — Enters the new date or time.

3-18

Configuration Menu

Inputs Menu
The Inputs Menu allows mapping of signals to crosspoint inputs
and also provides selection of input signal processing and format
parameters.

100% COLOR BARS
75% COLOR BARS
MULTIBURST
MULTIPULSE
PULSE & BAR
CHR KEY TEST
H RAMP
H RAMP-LSB

INPUTS MENU
config / inputs

100% COLOR BARS
75% COLOR BARS
MULTIBURST
MULTIPULSE
PULSE & BAR
CHR KEY TEST
H RAMP
H RAMP-LSB

DIGITAL
RES >

EXT KEY
SYNC >

SETUP
ON KEY >

MAP
INPUTS >

CHR KEY
INPUTS >

TOP
TEST SIGNAL

BOTTOM
TEST SIGNAL

GPI
INPUTS >

Inputs Menu selections are the following:
DIGITAL RES> — Displays the Input Digital Resolution Menu,

which allows setting the system for 8- or 10-bit inputs.
EXT KEY SYNC> — Displays the External Key Sync Menu, which

allows designating analog key inputs as having sync or no sync.
SETUP ON KEY> — Displays the Setup on Key Menu, which

allows designating analog key inputs as having setup or no setup.
MAP INPUTS> — Displays the Map Inputs Menu, which allows

assignment of video and key inputs and chroma key type to
crosspoints. Includes shaped/unshaped selection for video and
key inputs.

3-19

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

CHR KEY INPUTS> — Displays the Chroma Key Inputs Menu,

which allows format selection and timing adjustments to chroma
key inputs.
GPI INPUTS> — Displays the GPI Inputs Menu, which allows you

to define the functions to be initiated via the eight GPI inputs.

I n p u t Di g i ta l Re s o l u ti o n Me n u
The Input Digital Resolution Menu allows you to set each digital
input for 8- or 10-bit resolution sources.

INPUT DIGITAL RESOLUTION MENU
config / inputs / digital res
C9 33-36
C10 37-40
C11 41-44
C12 45-48
C13 49-52
C14 53-56
C15 57-60
C16 61-64

SERIAL
ANALOG
ANALOG
SERIAL
PARALLEL
SERIAL
NO BOARD
SERIAL

10 BITS
10 BITS
8 BITS
10 BITS
10 BITS

8 BITS
8 BITS
10 BITS
8 BITS
10 BITS

10 BITS
10 BITS
10 BITS
8 BITS
10 BITS

10 BITS
8 BITS
8 BITS
10 BITS
8 BITS

8 BITS

9 TO 16

C 14

10 BITS

GROUP
SELECT

CARD
SELECT

INPUT
53

INPUT
54

INPUT
55

INPUT
56

1 TO 8

Input Digital Resolution Menu selections are as follows:
GROUP SELECT — Selects which group of cards to display; the

first eight input cards or the last eight.
CARD SELECT — Selects one of the digital input cards (4 inputs

each).
INPUT ... buttons — Set inputs for 8- or 10-bit sources.

3-20

Configuration Menu

E x te r n a l Ke y S y n c Me n u
The External Key Sync Menu allows you to designate each
external analog key input as having sync or no sync.

EXT KEY SYNC MENU

MANUAL TIME
FOR INPUT 53
= 0 clocks

config / inputs / ext key sync

MANUAL TIME
FOR INPUT 54
= 0 clocks

MANUAL TIME
FOR INPUT 55
= 0 clocks

1 TO 8

AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC

9 TO 16

Card 14

MANUAL

GROUP
SELECT

CARD
SELECT

INPUT
53

INPUT
54

INPUT
55

INPUT
56

MANUAL TIME
FOR INPUT 56
= 0 clocks

The External Key Sync Menu selections are the following:
GROUP SELECT — Selects which group of cards to display; the

first eight input cards or the last eight.
CARD SELECT — Selects one of the analog input cards.
INPUT ... buttons — Set inputs to either AUTOMATIC or MANUAL,

depending on whether sync is present on the input.
MANUAL TIME FOR INPUT ... knobs — May be used to adjust the

timing of the selected input if the input module fails to detect
sync.

3-21

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

S e tu p o n Ke y Me n u
The Setup on Key Menu allows you to designate each external
analog key input as having setup or no setup.

SETUP ON KEY MENU
config / inputs / setup on key

NO SETUP

9 TO 16

Card 14

KEY SETUP

GROUP
SELECT

CARD
SELECT

INPUT
53

INPUT
54

INPUT
55

INPUT
56

1 TO 8

The Setup on Key Menu selections are the following:
GROUP SELECT — Selects which group of cards to display; the

first eight input cards or the last eight.
CARD SELECT — Selects one of the analog input cards.
INPUT ... buttons — Set inputs to either KEY SETUP or NO SETUP,
depending on whether setup is desired on the input key.

3-22

Configuration Menu

Ma p I n p u ts Me n u
The Map Inputs Menu allows assignment of video, key, and
chroma key inputs to crosspoints. Includes shaped/unshaped
selection for video and key inputs.

MAP INPUTS MENU

VIDEO INPUT
= DPM 1 LOG CHAN 1
(KSCOPE)

config / inputs / map inputs

KEY INPUT
= DPM 1 LOG CHAN 1
(KSCOPE)
XPT BUTTON
NUMBER

XPT BUTTON
NAME

UNSHAPED
VIDEO
SHAPED
VIDEO
VIDEO/
KEY FMT

CHROMA KEY INPUT
= NONE
(ENCODED)

Use the Preset Bus to select button number.
LOG CHANNEL
PHYS INPUTS
LOG/PHYS
ASSIGNMENT

NAME XPT
BUTTON >

Select the crosspoint button column to be assigned by pressing the
PST button in that column.
The Map Inputs Menu selections are as follows:
VIDEO/KEY FMT — Selects Shaped or Unshaped format for the
selected video or key signal.
LOG/PHYS ASSIGNMENT — Allows a poolable DPM (such as

Kaleidoscope) to control its logical channels (video and key)
connected to the Model 3000.
LOG CHANNEL — Selects the mode used to assign logical
channels from a poolable DPM to crosspoints.
PHYS INPUTS — Selects the mode used when assigning any

inputs that are not controlled by a poolable DPM.

3-23

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

NOTE: Refer to “Configuring a DPM” in the Startup section of the
User Guide for more information on the Log/Phys Assignment.
VIDEO INPUT — Selects a video signal for assignment to the

currently selected crosspoint button.
KEY INPUT — Selects a key signal for assignment to the currently

selected crosspoint button.
CHROMA KEY INPUT — Selects a chroma key input for assignment
to the currently selected crosspoint button.
NAME XPT BUTTON> — Displays the Name Crosspoint Button

Menu.

3-24

Configuration Menu

Na m e Cr o s s p o i n t Bu tto n Me n u
The Name Xpt Button Menu allows you to assign a name to each
of the input sources.

NAME XPT BUTTON MENU
sp

config / inputs / map inputs / name xpt button

(

)

String Register:
Cam
a

Save
String

d e

m n

o p

w x

Get
String
A B C D E F G
G H I

Button Name:

K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

XPT BUTTON NUMBER

Cam 2 _

30
(SHIFT-14)

Character = G
CURSOR
BACK

ACCEPT
CHAR

Use the Preset Bus to select button number.
CURSOR
FORWARD

DELETE
CHAR

SAVE
STRING

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

GET
STRING

ACCEPT
NAME

Name Xpt Button Menu selections are as follows:
The soft knobs located to the right of the Menu Display select the
characters of the source name.
The soft buttons provide cursor and editing control.
ACCEPT CHAR — Enters each selected character. The new
character will be displayed in the Map Inputs Menu.
ACCEPT NAME — Stores the source name.

3-25

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Ch r o m a Ke y I n p u ts Me n u
The Chroma Key Inputs Menu allows you to select the input
format and adjust the timing of each chroma key input.

CHROMA KEY INPUTS MENU
COARSE

config / inputs / chr key inputs

TIMING = 0.000 clocks

FINE

RGB
BETA
YUV
INPUT
1

INPUT
2

INPUT
3

INPUT
4

INPUT
5

INPUT
6

INPUT
FORMAT

The Chroma Key Inputs Menu selections are as follows:
INPUT ... buttons — Select the chroma keyer to be affected by the

format and timing selections described below.
INPUT FORMAT — Sets the currently selected chroma keyer to

RGB, YUV, or Beta input format.
COARSE — Adjusts coarse timing for the currently selected
chroma keyer.
FINE — Adjusts fine timing for the currently selected chroma

keyer.

3-26

Configuration Menu

G P I I n p u ts Me n u
The GPI Inputs Menu allows you to assign specific functions to
trigger the GPIs. Eight GPI inputs are provided. All of these accept
pulse-type inputs except Aux Tally Back, which is level-sensitive.

GPI INPUTS MENU

FUNCTION SELECT
(MISC)

config / inputs / gpi inputs
AUX
TALLY

GPI 1
GPI 2
GPI 3
GPI 4
GPI 5
GPI 6
GPI 7
GPI 8

AUX TALLY - BUS 1
M/E 1 AUTO TRAN
M/E 1 CUT
RUN EFFECT
MASTER RECALL EFF - 26
GPI DISABLED
FRAME STORE VIDEO GRAB
SEQUENCE MODE

When the desired function is selected,
press PROGRAM GPI button to set the
selected GPI input to the
selected function

Choose from these 6 buttons to select various
categories of GPI functions. Then use the
FUNCTION SELECT knob to select a function

GPI 1
GPI
SELECT

LOG CHAN
TALLY

KF
EFFECT

MISC

AUTO
TRANS

CUT

E-MEM

DISABLE
GPI
AUX BUS
=1

AUX TALLY
BUS 1?
FRAME
STORE

PROGRAM
GPI

Functions available for assignment to the GPIs are
■
■
■
■
■
■

Miscellaneous (Aux Tally)
Keyframe Effects
Auto Transitions
Cuts
E-MEM registers
Frame Stores

The FUNCTION SELECT knob is always delegated to one of these
functions, as indicated in parentheses in the FUNCTION SELECT
knob label.
GPI SELECT — Selects the GPI input whose function is to be

assigned.
FUNCTION SELECT soft knob — Selects the appropriate function
based on what GPI assignment is chosen.

3-27

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

MISC — Enables selection of the Aux Tally Back function, or allows
the selected GPI input to be disabled.
AUX TALLY — Allows an external device to control the aux
bus tally level (high or low). The AUX BUS soft knob selects
the appropriate aux bus.
LOG CHANNEL TALLY — Allows the Tally to track the DPM’s

logical channel .
DISABLE GPI — Causes any signal applied to the selected GPI

input to be ignored.
KF EFFECT — Enables selection of the Keyframe GPI function.
The following functions may be triggered with GPI pulses:
RUN, REWIND, AUTO RUN, and REVERSE
AUTO TRANS — Enables selection of the Auto Transition GPI

function. The following transitions may be triggered with GPI
pulses:
M/E 1, M/E 2, M/E 3 (3000-3), PGM PST, DSK 1 and DSK 2 TITLE
MIX, and PGM PST PST BLK
CUT — Enables selection of the Cut GPI function. The following

cuts may be triggered by the GPI:
M/E 1, M/E 2, M/E 3 (3000-3), DSK 1, DSK 2, and PGM PST
E-MEM — Enables selection of the E-MEM GPI function. The
following E-MEM functions may be triggered by the GPI:
RECALL ME 1, RECALL ME 2, RECALL ME 3 (3000-3), RECALL
MSTR, AUTO RECALL, EFF DISSOLV, and SEQUENCE. The
REGISTER soft knob selects the register for E-MEM recalls.
FRAME STORE — Enables selection of the Frame Store GPI
function. Triggerable functions are as follows:
VIDEO GRAB, KEY GRAB, and MASK GRAB
PROGRAM GPI — For each GPI, after the desired function has been
selected, pressing PROGRAM GPI enters the selection, which is
then indicated in the table in the menu display.

3-28

Configuration Menu

Outputs Menu
The Outputs Menu allows you to set certain parameters on the
output signals.

OUTPUTS MENU

LUM CLIP
= 105 IRE

config / outputs
PGM
M/E 1 PGM
M/E 2 PGM
M/E 3 PGM
AUX BUS 1
AUX BUS 2
AUX BUS 3
AUX BUS 4
AUX BUS 5
AUX BUS 6
AUX BUS 7
FRAMESTORE

OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

SHAPED
SHAPED
SHAPED
SHAPED
UNSHAPED
-

ON
-

SHAPED

PGM

OFF

UNSHAPED

OFF

OUTPUT
SELECT

SUPER
BLACK

SETUP
ON KEY

VIDEO/KEY
FMT

LIMITER

CHROMA CLIP
= 105 %

COMPOSITE CLIP
= 138 IRE

BLACK CLIP
= -20 IRE
OUTPUT
TIMING >

DIGITAL
RES >

Outputs Menu selections are as follows:
OUTPUT SELECT — Selects the output whose parameters are to be

changed.
SUPERBLACK — Turns the output superblack level ON or OFF.
The superblack level is set in the System Parameters Menu.
SETUP ON KEY — Selects or deselects setup on the key output.

3-29

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

VIDEO/KEY FMT — Sets the output processing to provide the type

of signal desired as an input to the external device that is to use the
signal: UNSHAPED if the video is already shaped but the device
needs a full screen-sized picture, or SHAPED if the device can
accept video that has already been processed by a key signal. Note
that this selection applies only to the Program output and Aux 1-4
signals, and it applies to Aux 1-4 only if the Effects Send option is
present. Without the Effects Send option, the Aux 1-4 outputs pass
whatever signal is present, either shaped or unshaped.
When the Effects Send option is not present, the
SHAPED/UNSHAPED selections for the Aux Buses are not in the
menu.
LIMITER — Turns the limiter on or off. The ON position allows
adjustment of the Program Output characteristics, as follows.
Note that this selection applies only to the Program output signal.
LUM CLIP — Adjusts the luminance clipping level of the
output signal. This clips out luminance levels above the
selected threshold. The range of the soft knob is from 75 IRE
to 138 IRE. The default setting is 105 IRE.
CHROMA CLIP — Adjusts the chrominance clipping level of

the output signal. This clips out chrominance levels above the
selected threshold. The range of the soft knob is from 80% to
120%. The default setting is 105%.
COMPOSITE CLIP — Adjusts the composite clipping level of

the output signal. This clips out chrominance and luminance
levels above the selected threshold. The range of the soft knob
is from 75 IRE to 138 IRE. The default setting is 138 IRE.
BLACK CLIP — Adjusts the black clipping level of the output

signal. This clips out luminance levels below the selected
threshold. The range of the soft knob is from -20 IRE to 10 IRE.
The default setting is -20 IRE.
OUTPUT TIMING — Allows adjustment of reference timing and

electrical path length of the switcher, thereby affecting output
signal timing.
DIGITAL RES> — Displays the Output Digital Resolution Menu.

3-30

Configuration Menu

O u tp u t Di g i ta l Re s o l u ti o n Me n u
The Output Digital Resolution Menu allows you to set each digital
output to 8- or 10-bit resolution.

OUTPUT DIGITAL RESOLUTION MENU
config / outputs / digital res

A 11
A 12
A 13
A 14
A 15
A 16
A 17

SERIAL
ANALOG
PARALLEL
SERIAL
NO BOARD
PARALLEL
ANALOG

10 BITS
8 BITS
10 BITS
10 BITS
-

8 BITS
8 BITS
10 BITS
8 BITS
-

10 BITS
8 BITS
8 BITS
8 BITS
-

8 BITS

A 16

8 BITS
10 BITS

8 BITS

11 TO 17

10 BITS

GROUP
SELECT

CARD
SELECT

MASK

SWITCHED
PVW

DSK PGM
VIDEO

DSK PGM
KEY

4 TO 10

Outputs Digital Resolution Menu selections are as follows:
GROUP SELECT and CARD SELECT — Select the output whose

resolution is to be changed.
Note that as the output boards are selected with the CARD
SELECT button, the names of the outputs change above the
soft buttons.
Output buttons — Set the resolution to either 8-BIT or 10-BIT for

each selected digital output.

NOTE: Dithering of the 8-bit outputs is selectable in the Misc/Signal
Process Menu.

3-31

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

External Interface Menu
Parameters for external interfaces, such as an editor or a DPM
(Digital Picture Manipulator), may be set up through the External
Interface Menu.

EXTERNAL INTERFACE MENU
config / extern if

EDITOR
I/F >

DPM
I/F >

PERIPHERAL
I/F >

GPI
I/F >

EDITOR I/F> — Displays the Editor Interface Menu.
DPM I/F> — Displays the DPM Interface Menu.
PERIPHERAL I/F> — Displays the Peripheral Interface Menu.
GPI I/F> — Displays the GPI Outputs Menu.

3-32

Configuration Menu

E d i to r I n te r fa c e Me n u
The Editor Interface Menu allows you to set the baud rate and
parity for communication with an editor.

EDITOR INTERFACE MENU
config / extern if / editor if

2400
4800
9600
19200
38400

ODD
EVEN
NONE

BAUD

PARITY

BAUD — Selects baud rates from 2400 to 38,400 for the Editor port.
PARITY — Selects ODD, EVEN, or no specified parity (NONE).

3-33

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

DP M S e tu p Me n u
The DPM Setup Menu and submenus allow you to define device
types, assign ports, etc., for Digital Picture Manipulators used
with the Model 3000 Switcher.

DPM SETUP MENU

EFF SEND DELAY
= 5 fields

config / extern if / dpm setup
EFF SEND
DELAY
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4

KRYSTAL
OTHER FIXED
NONE
NONE

BOTH
-

5
0
0
0

CONTROL
DELAY
6
0
0
0
CONTROL DELAY
= 06 fields

DPM 1

KSCOPE
KRYSTAL
OTHER
NONE

SWR IN
SWR OUT
BOTH
OFF

DEVICE
SELECT

DPM
TYPE

CHANNEL
ROUTING

K'SCOPE
SOURCES

DPM MAP
DPM MAP
AUX BUSES > INPUTS >

DEVICE SELECT — Selects the DPM Device whose characteristics

are to be assigned.
DPM TYPE — Defines the DPM type for each device when Krystal

or K’scope is selected.

3-34

Configuration Menu

NOTE: A delay has been introduced when changing DPM TYPE. This
delay allows a new DPM TYPE to be chosen without cycling through
intermediate DPM Types. Once the desired selection has been made, the
new DPM TYPE will be set 2 seconds later.
CHANNEL ROUTING — Enables input routing, output routing, or

both, or disables routing.
VIDEO DELAY — Defines the number of fields of delay in the video

path of the DPM.
CONTROL DELAY — Defines the number of fields of delay in the
CPL (Control-Point Language) processing of the DPM.
K’SCOPE SOURCES> — Displays the DPM KScope Sources Menu.
DPM MAP AUX BUSES> — Displays the DPM Map Aux Buses

Menu.
DPM MAP INPUTS> — Displays the DPM Map Inputs Menu.

NOTE: For information regarding DPM assignments available under
this menu, refer to the DPM Setup description in the Startup section of
the Model 3000 User Guide.

3-35

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

DPM KScope Sources Menu. This menu allows you to map
Kaleidoscope video source crosspoints to your switcher video
source crosspoints. You may set this map to a GVG default
depending on your Control Panel type. Or you may map each
Kaleidoscope source button individually to the switcher
crosspoint button of your choice.

DPM KSCOPE SOURCES MENU
config / extern if / dpm setup / dpm k'scope sources
K'SCOPE BTN

SWR BTN

K'SCOPE BTN

SWR BTN

K'SCOPE BTN

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

12
13
14
15
16
S/1
S/2
S/3
S/4
S/5
S/6

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

SWR BTN

Dial in switcher
xpt button for K'scope
source button

S/7
S/8
S/9
S/10
S/11
S/12
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PGM

K'SCOPE BUTTON
=0

SWITCHER BUTTON
=1
SET
DEFAULTS

DPM Map Aux Buses Menu. This menu allows you to assign aux
buses for use with DPM devices.
DEVICE SELECT — Selects the Device to which aux buses are to be

assigned.
NUMBER OF CHANNELS — Sets the number of DPM channels to
be assigned to the selected Device.
FIRST CHANNEL — Sets the channel of the first aux bus (in a

consecutive sequence) for the selected Device.

3-36

Configuration Menu

DPM MAP AUX BUSES MENU

NUMBER OF CHANNELS
=4

config / extern if / dpm setup / dpm map aux buses

Connection of physical AUX buses
to physical channels
MISC
PHYS CHAN
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4

AUX 5
CHAN A
-

AUX 6
CHAN B
-

AUX 7
CHAN C
-

CHAN D
-

FIRST CHANNEL
= CHAN E
CHAN E
AUX 1
-

CHAN F
AUX 2
-

CHAN G
AUX3
-

CHAN H
AUX 4
-

DPM 1
DEVICE
SELECT

NOTE: If a Kaleidoscope or other poolable DPM is used, its CHANNEL
1 must be AUX 1. Only one poolable DPM may be used at one time. Any
aux buses not assigned to a poolable DPM may be assigned to an OTHER
FIXED DPM. Refer to the DPM Setup description in the Startup section
of the User Guide for further information.

3-37

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

DPM Map Inputs Menu. This menu allows you to set up the DPM
video and key return input numbers.

DPM MAP INPUTS MENU
config / extern if / dpm setup / dpm map inputs

DEVICE 2

PHYSICAL
CHAN 1-PRI
CHAN 2
CHAN 3
CHAN 4
CHAN 5
CHAN 6
CHAN 7
CHAN 8
SECONDARY

DEVICE 1
DEVICE 2
DEVICE 3
DEVICE 4

CHAN 2

DPM
SELECT

CHANNEL
SELECT

LOGICAL
CHAN 1
CHAN 2
CHAN 3
CHAN 4
CHAN 5
CHAN 6
CHAN 7
CHAN 8
–

VIDEO INPUT KEY INPUT
–
–
19
42
29
63
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

VIDEO INPUT
= 19

KEY INPUT
= 42

DPM SELECT — Selects the DPM device to which the DPM video

and key inputs are to be assigned.
CHANNEL SELECT — Selects the DPM channel to which video and

key input numbers are to be assigned for the selected Device.
VIDEO INPUT — Selects the DPM physical input number to

correspond with the physical video channel that was connected to
that input during installation.
KEY INPUT — Selects the DPM physical input number to

correspond with the physical key channel that was connected to
that input during installation.

3-38

Configuration Menu

P e r i p h e r a l I n te r fa c e Me n u
The Peripheral Interface Menu allows you to set up the
parameters for the Peripheral Bus II port (A3).

PERIPHERAL INTERFACE MENU
config / extern if / peripheral if

NOTE:
The Peripheral Bus port is labelled
"Port A3" on the rear of the frame
electronics.

2400
4800
9600
19200
38400

ODD
EVEN
NONE

BAUD

PARITY

PERIPHERAL
TRIGGERS >

BAUD and PARITY — Select the baud rate and parity parameters

for the Peripheral Bus II port interface. These should be set to be
the same for the Model 3000 and the peripheral device.
PERIPHERAL TRIGGERS> — Displays the Peripheral Triggers

Menu, which allows you to define the triggers to be sent to devices
on the peripheral bus.

3-39

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Peripheral Triggers Menu
This menu allows you to configure peripheral triggers that the
switcher may use to trigger the designated device/function.
These triggers can then be learned into E-MEM effects (on the
MISC or DPM 1–DPM 4 level). Refer to the Keyframe/Attach
Peripheral Trigger Menu description for attaching peripheral
triggers to E-MEM registers.

PERIPHERAL TRIGGERS MENU
config / extern if / peripheral if / peripheral triggers

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

DEVICE NO. FUNCTN NO.
1
-

4
-

LEVEL
-

DEVICE NUMBER
=1

FUNCTION NUMBER
=4

DPM 1
-

LEVEL
= DPM 1

B
TRIGGER
SELECT

FIRE
B

TRIGGER SELECT — Selects the trigger to be assigned (A - H).
DEVICE NUMBER — Selects the peripheral device to which a
trigger will be sent.
FUNCTION NUMBER — Sets the function of the selected device

that will be triggered by a trigger message on the Peripheral II
bus.
LEVEL — Sets the E-MEM level where the trigger will be

learned.
FIRE ... — Manually fires the trigger, for testing purposes.

3-40

Configuration Menu

G P I O u tp u ts Me n u
The GPI Outputs Menu allows you to select a GPI for triggering
by the PGM Cut button, set E-MEM levels for each assigned GPI,
and to set the duration of the GPI trigger.

GPI OUTPUTS MENU

LENGTH
= 1 field

config / external if / gpi outputs

OFF
GPI 1
GPI 2
GPI 3
GPI 4
GPI 5
GPI 6
GPI 7
GPI 8
PGM CUT
TRIGGER

LEVEL

LENGTH

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

MISC
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4

SELECT
GPI

E-MEM
LEVEL

The following selections are available in the GPI Outputs Menu:
PGM CUT TRIGGER — Assigns one of eight GPI outputs to trigger
whenever the PGM bus Cut button is pressed.
SELECT GPI — Selects a GPI trigger for assignment to an E-MEM

level.
E-MEM LEVEL — Assigns the selected GPI trigger to an E-MEM

level.
LENGTH — Sets the duration of the GPI trigger in fields.

3-41

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Aux Bus Format Menu
This menu is used to set up the format for each of the 7 aux buses.
Each bus consists of an “A” bus and a “B” bus. The “A” buses are
for video only. The “B” buses may be either video or key.

AUX BUS FORMAT MENU
config / aux bus format

VIDEO

KEY

AUX
BUS 1B

AUX
BUS 2B

AUX
BUS 3B

AUX
BUS 4B

AUX
BUS 5B

AUX
BUS 6B

AUX
BUS 7B

VIDEO

AUX BUS 1B through AUX BUS 7B — Selects either VIDEO or KEY
for each “B” aux bus.

Make sure that any aux buses assigned to Kaleidoscope are
configured for KEY operation of their “B” aux buses.

NOTE: Shaping of the outputs for Aux Buses 1-4 may be done in the
Config/Outputs Menu.

3-42

M/E Mode Menu

M/E Mode Menu
The M/E Mode Menu allows selection of Standard or Layered
mode, and turns Full Additive Mix mode on or off on an M/E-byM/E basis.

M/E MODE MENU

KEY 1 OPACITY
= 100.00%

me mode

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3

STANDARD
LAYERED
STANDARD

KEY 2 OPACITY
= 100.00%

OFF
ON
OFF

KEY A OPACITY
= 100.00%

M/E 1
M/E 2

LAYERED

M/E 3

STANDARD

OFF

M/E
SELECT

M/E
MODE

FULL
ADD MIX

KEY B OPACITY
= 100.00%
M/E
COPY >

The following menu selections are accessible through the M/E
Mode Menu:
M/E SELECT — Selects the Mix/Effects system to which

subsequent menu selections apply.
M/E MODE — Sets the selected Mix/Effects to either Layered mode

or Standard mode. In Layered mode, the A and B buses function
as keyers rather than background buses. In Standard mode, the A
and B buses function as background buses.
FULL ADD MIX — Enables or disables the FAM mode when in

Layered mode. When FAM is on, the opacity of each layer is
adjustable with a soft knob.
M/E COPY> — Displays the M/E Copy Menu.

3-43

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

M/E Copy Menu
The M/E Copy Menu allows you to copy or swap all M/E settings
between M/Es.

M/E COPY MENU
me mode / me copy
COPY

M/E 1

M/E 2

SWAP

M/E 1

WITH

M/E 2

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3

M/E 1

FROM
M/E

TO
M/E

M/E 2
M/E 3
DO M/E
SWAP

DO M/E
COPY

The M/E Copy Menu selections are:
FROM M/E — Selects the M/E system to copy or swap from.
TO M/E — Selects the M/E system to copy or swap to.
DO M/E SWAP — Initiates the M/E swap currently selected.
DO M/E COPY — Initiates the M/E copy currently selected.

NOTE: An UNDO function appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting
the menu in order for it to take effect.

3-44

Status Menu

Status Menu
The Status Menu gives information about the state of the switcher
software and hardware.

STATUS MENU
status

SYSTEM
LOG >

INSTALL
INFO >

DIAGS >

The Status Menu selections are as follows:
SYSTEM LOG> — Displays the System Log Menu which shows

any current switcher error messages.
INSTALL INFO> — Displays the first Installation Info Status Menu,
which displays the version of the software installed and provides
information about the circuit boards installed in the processor
frame.
DIAGS> — Displays the Diagnostics Menu.

3-45

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

System Log Menu
The System Log Menu displays switcher error-condition
messages and other information, such as each system reset. These
are useful to GVG Customer Service for troubleshooting
purposes. Messages are routinely generated and do not
necessarily indicate a problem with the switcher.

SYSTEM LOG MENU
..... MESSAGE LOG CLEARED BY USER AT 15:24 ON JAN 5, 1995

SCROLL

PAGE
UP

PAGE
DOWN

FIRST
PAGE

LAST
PAGE

LAST
RESET

CLEAR
LOG

The System Log Menu selections are:
PAGE UP/DOWN, FIRST/LAST PAGE, SCROLL — Scroll the Error
Log pages to view the log messages. PAGE UP takes you to the
previous page, PAGE DOWN to the following page, FIRST PAGE to
the first page of the log, and LAST PAGE to the last page. The
SCROLL knob allows scrolling up or down one line at a time.
CLEAR LOG — Erases all displayed error messages.
LAST RESET — Brings the first message after the last system

power up or reset to the top of the display.

3-46

Status Menu

Installation Information Menus
The three pages of the Installation Info Menu, available under the
Status Menu, provide information about the presence, version,
and types of boards that are installed.

INSTALLATION INFO MENU
MODEL 3000-3 SOFTWARE VERSION: 5.0

status / install info
SLOT
1
2
3
4
5
-

BOARD
M1 CK
DECODER
M2 CK
DECODER
M3 CK
DECODER
M1 KEYER
K1 BDL
K2 BDL
M2 KEYER
K1 BDL
K2 BDL

MAIN
BOARDS

VERSION
068907-01A
068943-228
068907-01A
068943-228
068907-01A
068943-228
068904-01D
068915-00A
068915-00A
068904-01D
068915-00A
068915-00A

UPPER
BOARDS

SLOT
BOARD
6
M3 KEYER
K1 BDL
K2 BDL
7
SYNC
SAFE TITLE
8
XPT HI
9
XPT LO
10 FRAME STORE
DECODER
11
EFX SEND
12
M3 MIX/WIPE
PVW DIM

VERSION
068904-01D
068915-00A
068915-00A
068901-00K
068917-00B
068900-00A
068900-00A
068911-00D

SLOT
13
14
15
16
17

BOARD
M2 MIX/WIPE
PVW DIM
M1 MIX/WIPE
PVW DIM
SEC WIPE
PGM/PST/DSK
K1 BDL
K2 BDL
CTRL PROC

VERSION
068903-08I
068942-00A
068903-08I
068942-00A
068912-00C
068905-00F
068915-00A
068915-00A

068903-08I
068942-00A

LOWER
BOARDS

The MAIN BOARDS selection shows the functions of all the slots in
the center card cage (Bay B). Each slot that has a module installed
indicates the presence of the module by listing its
assembly/version number. Entries that have a “-” in the left
column are mezzanine boards that might be installed on the
modules listed immediately above them in the table.
Note that the version of the installed software is displayed in the
upper right-hand corner of the display.

3-47

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

INSTALLATION INFO MENU
MODEL 3000-3 SOFTWARE VERSION: 5.0

status / install info
SLOT
BOARD
1
RGB CK IN
2
RGB CK IN
3
RGB CK IN
4
DIG OUT-SER
5
6
7
8
9
ANLG OUT
10
11
12
DIG OUT-PAR

MAIN
BOARDS

VERSION
068922-00C
068922-00C
068922-00C
068931-00F

SLOT
BOARD
13
14
15
16 DIG OUT-PAR
17
ANLG OUT

VERSION

068930-00C
068929-00F

068929-00F

068930-00C

UPPER
BOARDS

LOWER
BOARDS

The UPPER BOARDS selection shows what slots in the upper card
cage (Bay A) have modules installed, and the format and
assembly/version number for each installed module.

3-48

Status Menu

INSTALLATION INFO MENU
MODEL 3000-3 SOFTWARE VERSION: 5.0

status / install info
SLOT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

BOARD
DIG IN-PAR
DIG IN-PAR

VERSION
068923-00B
068923-00B

DIG IN-SER

068924-00C

MAIN
BOARDS

UPPER
BOARDS

SLOT
BOARD
13
14 ANLG IN-AUTO
15 ANLG IN-AUTO
16 ANLG IN-AUTO
17

VERSION
068921-00G
068921-00G
068921-00G

LOWER
BOARDS

The LOWER BOARDS selection shows what slots in the lower card
cage (Bay C) have modules installed, and the format and
assembly/version number for each installed module.

3-49

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Diagnostics Menu
The Diagnostics Menu allows access to the Blanking Menu.

DIAGNOSTICS MENU
status / diags

BLANKING >

BLANKING> — Displays the Blanking Menu.

3-50

Status Menu

Bl a n k i n g Me n u
The Blanking Menu allows you to turn off the internal blanking
processor on the Mask, Switched Preview, DSK Program Video,
and DSK Program Key outputs.

BLANKING MENU
status / diags / blanking

CHOP
ON
OFF
BLANKING
PROCESSOR

The BLANKING PROCESSOR selections are as follows:
ON — Normal operating mode of the Model 3000. The
switcher inserts sync and blanking on the output signal.
OFF — Turns off the internal blanking processor and passes
through the blanking and sync present on the source signal.
CHOP — Chops between blanking from the internal blanking
processor and blanking on the source signal to allow external
SC/H phase adjustment of the input source.

NOTE: When you exit from this menu, the function defaults to ON.

3-51

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Keyer Menu
The Keyer Menu provides key parameter adjustments not
available on the control panel and shows the status of these
parameters on each key bus of the selected M/E or DSK. (Only
Key 1 and Key 2 are shown when in Standard mode.)

KEYER MENU

OPACITY
= 100.00%

keyer

M/E 1

KEY 1

OFF

KEY 2

AUTO

KEY A

AUTO

KEY B

AUTO

HORIZ KEY POSITION
= 0.00 clocks

M/E 1
M/E 2

M/E 3

OFF

DSK

KEY 1

AUTO

M/E
SELECT

KEYER
SELECT

SHAPING

CHROMA
TRAP >

KEYER
COPY >

CALIBRATE

VIDEO
PROCESS >

KEY 1
NAM >

The following selections are accessible through the Keyer Menu:
M/E SELECT — Selects the effects system to which subsequent

menu selections apply.
KEYER SELECT — Selects the keyer to which the subsequent
menu selections apply.
SHAPING — Forces shaped (ON) or unshaped (OFF) video for the

selected key bus, regardless of the current Configuration Menu
setting, or allows the current Configuration setting to apply
(AUTO).
CHROMA TRAP> — Displays the Keyer Chroma Trap Menu.

3-52

Keyer Menu

KEYER COPY> — Displays the Keyer Copy Menu which allows

copying keyer parameters from one keyer to another.
CALIBRATE — For the delegated crosspoint bus, resets all
functions that turn on the Source Select UNCAL lamp to their
default values (includes CORING and OPACITY).
VIDEO PROCESS> — Displays the Video Process Menu, which
allows adjustment of the luminance gain, chroma gain, and DC
offset for the individual key bus selected.
KEY 1 NAM> — Displays the Key 1 NAM Menu, which allows non-

additive mixing (NAMing) of Key 2 into Key 1 on an
M/E-by-M/E basis.
OPACITY — Adjusts the opacity of the selected key. This function

is available even when doing a full-additive mix.
HORIZ KEY POSITION — Adjusts the horizontal position of the

selected key. This function is not available when DSK is selected.

3-53

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Chroma Trap Menu
The keyer Chroma Trap Menu allows you to turn on a chroma trap
for selected keyers and to select the filtering mode.

CHROMA TRAP MENU
keyer / chroma trap

KEY 1
KEY 2
KEY A
KEY B

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

BS-HARD
BS-HARD
BS-HARD
BS-HARD

LP-HARD

DSK

KEY 1

ON
OFF
AUTO

BS-HARD

M/E
SELECT

KEYER
SELECT

CHROMA
TRAP

FILTER
TYPE

M/E 2

M/E 1

LP-SOFT

M/E 2
M/E 3

BS-SOFT

M/E SELECT and KEYER SELECT — Selects the effects system and

keyer to which subsequent menu selections apply.
CHROMA TRAP — Enables or disables the chroma trap for the
selected keyer. The filtering removes unwanted chroma from
video used for keying.

If you have a 068904-01 Keyer module four levels of chroma
filtering are available, as follows:
BS - HARD, BS - SOFT, LP - HARD, and LP - SOFT.
(BS = Band Stop; LP = Low Pass.)
BS - HARD is the default selection and is for keys that have
high frequency content. The other selections provide varying
degrees of softening of the key, and can reduce ringing on
hard key edges.

If you have a 068904-00 Keyer module, one level of chroma
filtering is provided, and the CHROMA TRAP choices are ON and
OFF.

3-54

Keyer Menu

Keyer Copy Menu
The Keyer Copy Menu allows you to copy all keyer settings from
any keyer to another.

KEYER COPY MENU
keyer / keyer copy
COPY

M/E 1 KEY 2

M/E 2 KEY 2

SWAP

M/E 1 KEY 2

WITH

M/E 2 KEY 2

KEY 1
KEY 2
KEY A
KEY B
TO
KEYER

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
DSK

KEY 1
KEY 2
KEY A
KEY B

EXCLUDE
INCLUDE

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
DSK

FROM
GROUP

FROM
KEYER

WIPES

TO
GROUP

DO KEYER
SWAP

DO KEYER
COPY

Selections in the Keyer Copy Menu are as follows:
FROM GROUP and FROM KEYER — Select the Keyer whose setup

parameters are to be copied.
WIPES — Allows you to include or exclude Wipe settings that may

be associated with the selected keyers.
TO GROUP and TO KEYER — Select the destination Keyer that is
to receive the copied keyer setup.
DO KEYER SWAP — Initiates the keyer Swap currently selected.
DO KEYER COPY — Initiates the keyer Copy currently selected.

NOTE: An UNDO function appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting
the menu in order for it to take effect.

3-55

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

NOTE: If the destination Keyer has parameters that the source Keyer
does not, those parameters are set to default values in the destination
Keyer.

Video Process Menu
The Video Processing Menu allows you to adjust luminance gain,
chroma gain, and dc offset for the selected bus.

VIDEO PROCESS MENU

LUM GAIN
= 1.00

keyer / video process

M/E 2

KEY 1

OFF

KEY 2

OFF

CHROMA GAIN
= 1.00

DC OFFSET
= 0.00 IRE

M/E 1
ON

M/E 3

KEY 2

OFF

M/E
SELECT

BUS
SELECT

VIDEO
PROCESS

CORING

M/E 2

3-56

CORING
= 7.50 IRE

RESTORE
DEFAULTS

Keyer Menu

The Video Process Menu selections are as follows:
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/E to be adjusted.
BUS SELECT — Selects the bus to be adjusted.
VIDEO PROCESS — Enables or disables the Video Processing

adjustments listed below for the selected bus.
LUM GAIN — Sets luminance gain of the selected bus.
CHROMA GAIN — Sets chroma gain of the selected bus.
DC OFFSET — Sets dc offset of the selected bus.
CORING — Enables or disables the coring function for linear keys

on the selected key bus (applies only to Key 1 and Key 2 buses in
Standard mode and A and B buses in Layered mode). Does not

apply to the DSK
CORING — Adjusts M/E background video in key area to
ensure that video is fully removed.
RESTORE DEFAULTS — Restores default settings of the selected

soft knob functions.

3-57

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Key 1 NAM Menu
The Key 1 NAM Menu allows NAMing Key 2 into Key 1 on an
M/E-by-M/E basis.

KEY 1 NAM MENU

NAM SOFTNESS
= 0%

keyer / key 1 nam

M/E 1

KEY 1

M/E 2
M/E 3

KEY 1
KEY 1

OFF
OFF

NAM OFFSET
= 50%

M/E 1
M/E 2

M/E 3

OFF

M/E
SELECT

NAM K2
INTO K1

RESTORE
DEFAULTS

Selections in the Key 1 NAM Menu are as follows:
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/E to be set.
NAM K2 INTO K1 — Enables or disables NAMing Key 2 into Key 1.

In this mode, the signal with the highest instantaneous value is
passed.
NAM SOFTNESS — Adjusts the softness of the transition
between two video signals for the selected M/E.
NAM OFFSET — Sets the transition threshold between the two

video signals (similar to a clip adjustment).

NOTE: When NAMing Key 2 into Key 1, Key 2 will be on the M/E
output but not indicated by a key ON indicator. (The crosspoint button
tally will be correct.)
RESTORE DEFAULTS — Restores the default values of the selected

soft knob functions.

3-58

Chroma Key Menu

Chroma Key Menu
The Chroma Key Menu allows selection and adjustment of a
variety of chroma key parameters.

CHROMA KEY MENU

FOREGROUND CORING
= 7.50 IRE

chr key
M/E 1 KEY 1

OFF

M/E 1 KEY 2

FIXED

M/E 2 KEY 1

VARIABLE

M/E 2 KEY 2

OFF

M/E 3 KEY 1

OFF

M/E 3 KEY 2

OFF

SHADOW GAIN
= 50%

SHADOW CLIP
= 50%

VARIABLE

M/E 2 KEY 1

CHR KEY
SELECT

FIXED

OFF

FOREGROUND BACKGROUND FOREGROUND SECONDARY
VIDEO
VIDEO
CORING
COLOR >

HUE
MODS >

KEY
ADJUST >

The Chroma Key Menu selections are as follows:
CHR KEY SELECT — Selects the M/E Keyer to which the menu

selections apply.
FOREGROUND VIDEO — Turns the foreground on and off. When
off, the foreground image is replaced with black.
BACKGROUND VIDEO — Turns the background on and off. When

on, the foreground image is a full raster image.

3-59

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

FOREGROUND CORING — Turns foreground coring on and off.

Coring replaces the key area of the background with black to
ensure a clean key when background and fill are additively keyed
together.
VARIABLE provides a FOREGROUND CORING knob which
allows adjustment of the coring level.
FIXED provides a factory default foreground coring level.
OFF must be selected to enable the Chroma Key panel BKGD
SUPR LUM and CHROMA knobs to operate.
SHADOW GAIN — May be used to adjust the gain of the Chroma
Key shadow after the function has been turned on by the SHDW
ON button on the Chroma Keyers subpanel.
SHADOW CLIP — May be used to adjust the clip level of the

Chroma Key shadow after the function has been turned on by the
SHDW ON button on the Chroma Keyers subpanel.
SECONDARY COLOR> — Displays the Secondary Color Menu,

which allows adjustment of the secondary color suppression
angle, secondary color selectivity, and secondary chroma
suppression level.
HUE MODS> — Displays the Hue Modifications Menu, which

allows adjustment of the secondary hue angle, separate hue
suppression, flare suppression, and flare suppression offset.
KEY ADJUST> — Displays the CK Key Adjust Menu, which

provides adjustment of the chroma key position, width, and key
softness.

3-60

Chroma Key Menu

Chroma Key Secondary Color Menu
The Chroma Key Secondary Color Menu allows you to select and
adjust selectivity and suppression of the secondary color.

CK SECONDARY COLOR MENU
chr key / sec color
M/E 1 KEY 1
M/E 1 KEY 2

OFF
ON

M/E 2 KEY 1
M/E 2 KEY 2
M/E 3 KEY 1
M/E 3 KEY 2

ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

SEC COLOR SUPPRESS ANGLE
= 34 degrees

SEC COLOR SUPPRESS SELECTIVITY
= 50%

SEC CHROMA SUPPRESS LEVEL
= 50%

M/E 2 KEY 1

ON
OFF

CHR KEY
SELECT

SEC COLOR
SUPPRESS

The CK Secondary Color Menu selections are as follows:
CHR KEY SELECT — Delegates the chroma keyer to be adjusted.
SECONDARY COLOR SUPPRESS — Enables or disables the

following soft knobs:
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS ANGLE — Provides an offset

adjustment to the primary chroma key hue setting.
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS SELECTIVITY — Adjusts selectivity of

the chroma key hue control.
SEC CHROMA SUPPRESS LEVEL — Allows you to change a

second color in the foreground that may have been affected by
the primary color suppression. For example, if the set is a
person with blond hair in front of a blue background, after
suppressing the blue background, individual strands of the
blond hair may appear bluish. By adjusting the secondary
chroma suppression level, you can adjust the hair color back
to its normal blond.
3-61

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Chroma Key Hue Modifiers Menu
The Chroma Key Hue Modifiers Menu allows you to select and
adjust hue selectivity and flare suppression.

CK HUE MODIFIERS MENU

SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS
= 127 degrees

chr key / hue mods
M/E 1 KEY 1
M/E 1 KEY 2
M/E 2 KEY 1
M/E 2 KEY 2
M/E 3 KEY 1
M/E 3 KEY 2

OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS
= 75%

HUE SUPPRESS OFFSET
= 0%

M/E 2 KEY 1

ON
OFF

CHR KEY
SELECT

SEP HUE
SUPPRESS

ON
OFF

FLARE
HUE SUPRSS
SUPPRESS
OFFSET

The CK Hue Modifiers Menu selections are as follows:
CHR KEY SELECT — Delegates the chroma keyer to be adjusted.
SEP HUE SUPPRESS — Enables or disables suppression of the
selected hue from background and foreground. Also enables or
disables the SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS soft knob.
SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS — Adjusts hue suppression

applied to background and foreground.

3-62

Chroma Key Menu

FLARE SUPPRESS — Enables or disables suppression of the
selected hue from the foreground. Also enables or disables the
FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS soft knob.
FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS — Adjusts flare

suppression.
HUE SUPRSS OFFSET — Enables or disables the HUE SUPPRESS
OFFSET soft knob.
HUE SUPPRESS OFFSET — Corrects for color impurities in

video tape. For example, if you are keying out blue in your
source tape and the white on the tape is blue-shifted, you will
also key out the white. The offset suppression adjustment
allows you to change the origin of the suppression space, so
that the blue-shifted white is not included in the suppression.

3-63

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Chroma Key Adjust Menu
The Chroma Key Adjust Menu provides adjustment of the chroma
key horizontal position, key width, and softness.

CK KEY ADJUST MENU

KEY WIDTH
= 0.00 clocks

chr key / key adjust
M/E 1 KEY 1
M/E 1 KEY 2
M/E 2 KEY 1
M/E 2 KEY 2
M/E 3 KEY 1
M/E 3 KEY 2

OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

KEY SOFTNESS
= 50%

HORIZ KEY POSITION
= 0.00 clocks

M/E 2 KEY 1

ON
OFF

OFF

CHR KEY
SELECT

KEY
WIDTH

KEY
SOFTNESS

FGD
RESHAPING

The Chroma Key Adjust Menu selections are as follows:
CHR KEY SELECT — Delegates the chroma keyer to be adjusted.
KEY WIDTH — Enables or disables the KEY WIDTH soft knob.
KEY WIDTH — Adjusts the width of the chroma key.
KEY SOFTNESS — Enables or disables the KEY SOFTNESS soft

knob.
KEY SOFTNESS — Adjusts softness of the chroma key.
FGD RESHAPING — When ON, causes the shaped fill from the

chroma keyer to be multiplied with the key signal from the
chroma keyer. Depending upon the picture(s), FGD RESHAPING
may improve the appearance of the chroma key.
HORIZ KEY POSITION — Adjusts the horizontal position of the

chroma key.
3-64

Wipe Menu

Wipe Menu
The Wipe Menu allows you to access the Wipe submenus.

WIPE MENU
wipe

PATTERN >

TEXTURE >

WIPE
MODS >

WIPE
COPY >

PATTERN> — Displays the Wipe Pattern Menu.
TEXTURE> — Displays the Wipe Texture Menu.
WIPE MODS> — Displays the Wipe Modifiers Menu.
WIPE COPY> — Displays the Wipe Copy Menu.

3-65

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Wipe Pattern Menu
The Wipe Pattern Menu allows you to assign a variety of wipe
patterns to a selected wipe generator.

WIPE PATTERN MENU
1

PATTERN
SELECT

4
14

19
24
20

31
41

ME 1
PRI

3-66

SML
RNDM
38

LRG
RNDM
39

52
50

ME 1
SEC

ME 2
PRI

TEXTURE
45
55

46
56

ME 2
SEC

EXT
57

ME 3
PRI

ME 3
SEC

Wipe Menu

The following selections are available through the Wipe Pattern
Menu:
M/E 1 PRI — Delegates the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the

M/E 1 Primary Wipe Generator.
M/E 1 SEC — Delegates the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the
M/E 1 Secondary Wipe Generator.
M/E 2 PRI — Delegates the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the

M/E 2 Primary Wipe Generator.
M/E 2 SEC — Delegates the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the
M/E 2 Secondary Wipe Generator.
M/E 3 PRI (3000-3 only) — Delegates the PATTERN SELECT soft
knob to the M/E 3 Primary Wipe Generator.
M/E 3 SEC (3000-3 only) — Delegates the PATTERN SELECT soft

knob to the M/E 3 Secondary Wipe Generator.
PATTERN SELECT — Selects a wipe pattern from the pattern
menu for use by the currently delegated wipe generator.

3-67

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Wipe Texture Menu
The Wipe Texture Menu allows you to adjust the appearance of
the video texture.

WIPE TEXTURE MENU
wipe / texture
M/E 1 PRI
M/E 1 SEC
M/E 2 PRI
M/E 2 SEC
M/E 3 PRI
M/E 3 SEC

1:1
1:1
6:1
2:1
1:1
2:1

2:1
FREE RUN
2:1
1:1
2:1
1:1

NONE
NOTCH
NOTCH
SMOOTHING
NONE
SMOOTHING

3
6
5
2
6
3

1:1

M/E 2 PRI

1:1
2:1
3:1
4:1
6:1
8:1

2:1
4:1
6:1
8:1
FREE RUN

SMOOTHING
NOTCH
NONE

1
2
3
4
5
6

WIPE GEN
SELECT

HORIZ
STRETCH

VERT
MODE

FILTER
MODE

LENGTH
A

1
1
2
4
2
1

1
2
3
4
LENGTH
B

6
6
1
3
6
6

1
2
3
4
5
6
SOURCE

The Wipe Texture Menu selections are as follows for the selected
wipe generator:
HORIZ STRETCH — Selects one of the horizontal stretch ratios

listed in the menu.
VERT MODE — Selects one of the vertical stretch ratios listed in the

menu.
FILTER MODE — Selects one of the filtering modes listed in the

menu.
LENGTH A — Selects one of the lengths listed in the menu.
LENGTH B — Selects one of the lengths listed in the menu.
SOURCE — Selects one of the sources listed.

3-68

Wipe Menu

Wipe Modifiers Menu
The Wipe Modifiers Menu provides adjustment of wipe
parameters not available on the Wipe subpanel.

WIPE MODIFIERS MENU

SPLIT OFFSET
= 0%

wipe / wipe mods
ME 1 PRI
ME 1 SEC
ME 2 PRI
ME 2 SEC
ME 3 PRI
ME 3 SEC

MIX
MIX
NAM NAM+
MIX
MIX

TEXTURE
NORMAL
NORMAL
TEXTURE
NORMAL
NORMAL

ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

REVERSE
NORMAL
NORMAL
REVERSE
NORMAL
NORMAL

NAM NAM+

TEXTURE

REVERSE

ME 2 PRI

MIX

NORMAL

OFF

NORMAL

WIPE GEN
SELECT

PTN MIX
TYPE

PTN MIX
SOURCE

SPLIT
OFFSET

PST PTN
DIRECTION

WIPE
MODULATE >

The Wipe Modifiers Menu selections are as follows:
WIPE GEN SELECT — Selects the desired wipe generator.
PTN MIX TYPE — Selects the type of pattern mix.
PTN MIX SOURCE — Selects the pattern mix source.
NORMAL — Selects a mix between the primary and secondary
wipe generators. This selection is prohibited if the secondary
wipe option is not installed.
TEXTURE — Selects a mix between the texture pattern and the

primary wipe generator.
SPLIT OFFSET button — Enables or disables the split wipe offset

function.
SPLIT OFFSET soft knob — Adjusts the offset of split wipes.
PST PTN DIRECTION — Selects the direction of the preset pattern
for the selected wipe generator.
WIPE MODULATE> — Displays the Wipe Modulation Menu.

3-69

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Wi p e Mo d u l a ti o n Me n u
The Wipe Modulation Menu allows modulation to be added to the
wipe patterns.

WIPE MODULATION MENU
wipe / wipe mods / wipe modulate
M/E 1 PRI
M/E 1 SEC
M/E 2 PRI
M/E 2 SEC
M/E 3 PRI
M/E 3 SEC

HORIZ
VERT
HORIZ
LOCK
HORIZ
LOCK

SINE
SINE
SINE
TRIANGLE
SINE
SINE

M/E 2 PRI

LOCK
HORIZ
VERT
OFF

TRIANGLE
SINE

WIPE GEN
SELECT

MODULATION AMPLITUDE
= 50%

MODULATION FREQUENCY
= 0.50 cycles/screen

MODULATE
MODULATE WAVEFORM

The Wipe Modulation Menu selections are as follows:
WIPE GEN SELECT — Selects the desired wipe generator.
MODULATE — Turns wipe modulation ON or OFF. When OFF, no

other buttons or knobs in this menu are available.
MODULATE WAVEFORM — Selects the modulation waveform —
either TRIANGLE or SINE.
MODULATION AMPLITUDE — Adjusts the amplitude of the

modulation signal.
MODULATION FREQUENCY — Adjusts the frequency of the

modulation signal.

3-70

Wipe Menu

Wipe Copy Menu
The Wipe Copy Menu allows you to copy or swap Primary (PRI)
or Secondary (SEC) wipe generator settings between M/Es.

WIPE COPY MENU
wipe / wipe copy
COPY

M/E 1 PRI

M/E 2 PRI

SWAP

M/E 1 PRI

WITH

M/E 2 PRI

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3

PRI
SEC

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3

PRI
SEC

FROM
GROUP

FROM
WIPE GEN

TO
GROUP

TO
WIPE GEN

DO WIPE
SWAP

DO WIPE
COPY

3-71

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

The Wipe Copy Menu selections are as follows:
FROM GROUP — Selects the M/E or PGM PST system to copy or

swap from.
FROM WIPE GEN — Selects either the PRI or SEC Wipe Generator

to copy or swap from.
TO GROUP — Selects the M/E or PGM PST system to copy or

swap to.
TO WIPE GEN — Selects either the PRI or SEC Wipe Generator to

copy or swap to.
DO WIPE SWAP — Initiates the wipe swap currently selected.
DO WIPE COPY — Initiates the wipe copy currently selected.

NOTE: An UNDO selection appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting
the menu in order to take effect.

3-72

E-MEM Menu

E-MEM Menu
The E-MEM Menu displays the status of several parameters on all
levels of the E-MEM register selected on the Master E-MEM panel
and provides access to lower-level E-MEM menus.

E-MEM MENU
E-MEM
E-MEM
LEVEL
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PGM PST
DSK
BKGD
MISC
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4

REG
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07

SOURCE
HOLD>

ENABLE
STATUS
ON
-

PERIPH
DEVICES>

LOCK
STATUS
ON
-

SEQ
LINK
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08

ENABLE
DISABLE

RUN
LEVER

KEYFRAME
EDITING

SEQ
DELAY
000
-

KF
PATH >

KEYFRAMES
USED
AVAILABLE
000
698
698
698
403
403
403
403
397
397
397
397

GPI & PBUS
TRIGGERS>

3-73

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

The following selections are available under the E-MEM Menu:
REGISTER> — Displays the E-MEM Register Menu.
SOURCE HOLD> — Displays the Source Hold Menu.
PERIPH DEVICES> — Displays the Peripheral Devices Menu.
RUN LEVER — Enables or disables the Run lever arm to manually

move the Time Cursor along the timeline and manually run
keyframe effects. DISABLE may be used in a live situation to avoid
problems that might arise from bumping the lever arm.
KEYFRAME EDITING — Enables/disables keyframe editing mode.
This activates the effects editing buttons on the E-MEM panel,
allowing multiple-keyframe effects to be built and modified.
ENABLE — Enables keyframe editing mode, which activates
the effects editing buttons on the E-MEM panel (low tally) and
allows multiple-keyframe effects to be built and modified.
DISABLE — Disables keyframe editing and turns off the
effects editing buttons.
KF PATHS> — Displays the Keyframe Paths Menu, which allows

the type of path to be set for interpolation of parameters between
keyframes.
GPI & PBUS TRIGGERS — Displays the GPI and PBUS Trigger

Menu.

3-74

E-MEM Menu

E-MEM Register Menu
This menu allows you to lock and unlock registers, and to clear
registers and sequences.

E-MEM REGISTER MENU
E-MEM / register
Current Bank: 5
Current Register: 52

CLEAR REG
LOCK REG
CLEAR SEQ
SELECT

LOCK
ALL

LOCK
BANK

LOCK
REG

SELECT — Enables the desired operation: locking/unlocking

registers, clearing effects, or clearing sequences from registers.
When CLEAR REG or CLEAR SEQ is selected, the soft button
selections in the above menu are: CLEAR ALL, CLEAR BANK, and
CLEAR REG.

NOTE: Levels are enabled with the Enable buttons on the E-MEM
panel.

3-75

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

For CLEAR REG:
CLEAR ALL — For all enabled levels, clears all data from all
100 registers, making them empty. After CLEAR ALL is
pressed, a submenu allows you to CONFIRM or CANCEL the

operation.
CLEAR BANK — For all enabled levels, clears all data from all

registers in the bank whose number is displayed in the menu.
After CLEAR BANK is pressed, a submenu allows you to
CONFIRM or CANCEL the operation.
CLEAR REG — For all enabled levels, clears all data from the

register whose number is displayed in the menu, making it an
empty register. After CLEAR REG is pressed, a submenu
allows you to CONFIRM or CANCEL the operation.
To clear a Master E-MEM function (3000-3), deselect all M/E
enables and then use the menu clear buttons.
For LOCK REG:
LOCK ALL, UNLOCK ALL — For all currently enabled levels,
locks or unlocks all 100 registers. If any registers are unlocked,
a LOCK ALL selection is displayed; if any or all registers are
locked, an UNLOCK ALL selection is displayed.
LOCK BANK, UNLOCK BANK — For all currently enabled

levels, locks or unlocks all registers in the bank whose number
is displayed in the menu. Note that the current bank
displayed may not be the same as the current bank for
independent E-MEM levels. If so, the current bank will not get
locked on those levels, but the selected bank will.
For the currently displayed bank number, if any currentlyenabled E-MEM level has an unlocked register in the bank, a
LOCK BANK instruction is displayed. When all registers in the
bank are locked, an UNLOCK BANK instruction is displayed.
LOCK REG, UNLOCK REG — For all currently enabled levels,

locks the register whose number is displayed in the menu.
Note that this may not be the current register for some levels.

3-76

E-MEM Menu

If so, the current register will not get locked on those levels,
but the selected register will.
For the currently displayed register number, if any currentlyenabled E-MEM register level is unlocked, a LOCK REG
instruction is displayed. When all of the enabled E-MEM
register levels are locked, an UNLOCK REG instruction is
displayed.
For CLEAR SEQ:
CLEAR ALL — For all enabled levels, clears only sequence
information for all 100 registers. After CLEAR ALL is pressed,
a submenu allows you to CONFIRM or CANCEL the operation.
CLEAR BANK — For all enabled levels, clears only sequence
information for all registers in the bank whose number is
displayed in the menu. After CLEAR BANK is pressed, a
submenu allows you to CONFIRM or CANCEL the operation.
CLEAR REG — For all enabled levels, clears only sequence

information for the register whose number is displayed in the
menu. After CLEAR REG is pressed, a submenu allows you to
CONFIRM or CANCEL the operation.

3-77

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Source Hold Menu
The Source Hold Menu permits you to inhibit crosspoint changes
on individual buses during E-MEM recalls.

SOURCE HOLD MENU

BUS
= M/E 1 A

E-MEM / source hold

BUS
M/E 1 A
M/E 2 A
M/E 3 A
PGM
PVW
AUX 3
AUX 7

HOLD
-

BUS
M/E 1 B
M/E 2 B
M/E 3 B
PST
MASK
AUX 4

BUS
M/E 1 K1
M/E 2 K1
M/E 3 K1
DSK 1
AUX 1
AUX 5

BUS
M/E 1 K2
M/E 2 K2
M/E 3 K2
DSK 2
AUX 2
AUX 6

Menu changes delegated E-MEMs only.

ON
OFF

CLEAR ALL
HOLDS

ALL
HOLD

SOURCE
HOLD

BUS = ... soft knob — Selects the bus to which the source hold is to

be applied.
CLEAR ALL HOLDS — Clears all Source Holds.
ALL HOLD — Sets all Source Holds.
SOURCE HOLD — Enables or disables the Source Hold feature on
the selected bus. When ON, all crosspoints (video and key) on the

bus are held; that is, the state of the crosspoints do not change
when E-MEM recalls are done.

3-78

E-MEM Menu

Peripheral Devices Menu
This menu allows you to select which peripheral devices you
want to be included in E-MEM learns and recalls.

PERIPHERAL DEVICES MENU
E-MEM / periph devices

OFF

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

Set the peripheral
devices which are
to be affected by
E-MEM Learn and
Recall operations.

DEVICE NUMBER
=1

CLEAR ALL
OFF

OFF

SET ALL
ON

DEVICE
1

CLEAR ALL OFF — Turns OFF learn and recall operations to all
devices on the peripheral bus.
SET ALL ON — Turns ON learn and recall operations to all devices

connected to the peripheral bus.
DEVICE NUMBER = ... soft knob — Selects the Device Number to be
turned ON or OFF with regard to E-MEM learn and recall

operations.
DEVICE ... — Turns ON or OFF learn and recall operations to the

selected device.

3-79

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Keyframe Path Menu
The Keyframe Path Menu allows you to set the type of path for
interpolation of parameters between keyframes.

KEYFRAME PATH MENU

keyframe / kf path

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PGM PST
DSK
MISC
BKGD
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
SELECT
LEVEL

TRANSITION
KEY 1
KEY 2
KEY A
KEY B
WIPES
WIPEXFORM

S-LINEAR
LINEAR
S-LINEAR
HOLD
HOLD
S-LINEAR

TENSION
= 0.00

CURVE

ALL
FSTOREXFRM

CONTINUITY
= 0.00

WIPEXFORM

HOLD
LINEAR
S-LINEAR
CURVE

SELECT
GROUP

PATH
TYPE

BIAS
= 0.00

LEVEL SELECT and GROUP SELECT — Select the register level
and the functional group to which the path type is to be applied.
Each functional group of each keyframe can have its own path
type. When ALL is selected, the same path type can be applied to
all functional groups simultaneously.
PATH TYPE — Selects the algorithm to be used for interpolating

between keyframes for the selected group. The available path
types are Linear, S-Linear, and Hold.
LINEAR — Causes a constant change in parameter values
between keyframes, with no acceleration or deceleration.
S-LINEAR — Causes the change to each parameter to begin

slowly as it leaves the starting keyframe, to move faster
through the midrange of the keyframe duration, then to
decelerate as it approaches the destination keyframe.

3-80

E-MEM Menu

CURVE — Provides three knobs to control the three
parameters of the path vector: TENSION, CONTINUITY, and
BIAS. These knobs act on the vector parameters to adjust the
path into (entry) and out of (exit) the keyframe. The path
through KF2 is parallel with an imaginary line drawn
between KF1 and KF2.
TENSION — Controls the length of the tension vector. At

a setting of 0, the imaginary line extends an equal distance
into and out of the keyframe, and the path through the
middle keyframe is curved. At 1.00, the Tension vector is
shortened to non-existence through KF2. At -1.00, the
effect is a lengthening of the Tension vector, causing the
path through the middle keyframe to be longer and
broader.
CONTINUITY — Determines the angle of the path into and

out of the keyframe. At 1.00, the effect is that of motion
dropping into and then out of the keyframe, similar to a
bouncing ball. At -1.00, the paths between the keyframes
become straight lines, accelerating through the keyframe.
BIAS — Determines whether the path will be “pulled”
towards the previous or the following keyframe. At 0, the
curve through the keyframe is gentle. At 1.00, the path is
pulled towards the previous keyframe. Entrance and exit
to the keyframe are on a straight line from the previous
keyframe, and the path of the effect travels completely
through KF2 before turning towards KF3. At -1.00, the
path is pulled towards the following keyframe. Entrance
and exit to the keyframe are a straight line pointed to the
following keyframe.
HOLD — Causes all parameters to hold at their starting values
throughout the keyframe duration. All changes occur at the
end of the keyframe duration, with no interpolation between
keyframes.

3-81

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

GPI & PBus Triggers Menu
The PBus Device and Function assignments are made in the
Peripheral Interface menu under config/ext if/peripheral if.

GPI & PBUS TRIGGERS MENU
Effect:

E-MEM / gpi & pbus triggers

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

PERIPHERAL TRIGGERS (PBUS 2)
FUNCTION
DEVICE
E-MEM LEVEL
6
1
-

MISC
OFF

SELECT
PERIPH

ATTACH
PERIPH

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
FIRE
A

FIRE
ATTACHED

SELECT
GPI

Keyframe:

GPI OUTPUT TRIGGERS
E-MEM LEVEL
1
-

MISC
OFF
ATTACH
GPI

FIRE
1

FIRE
ATTACHED

SELECT GPI — Selects the GPI Output (1 through 8) to which you

may attach an E-MEM register or keyframe. The trigger numbers
correspond to the physical connections made to the GPI Output
connectors on the rear of the switcher frame.
ATTACH — Attaches the selected PBus or GPI trigger to the
indicated E-MEM register or keyframe (MISC), or turns the trigger
OFF.
MISC notation in the upper right-hand corner of the screen
reminds you that the Attach GPI/PBus function operates through
the MISC level on the E-MEM Enables panel, Effect: is the
currently selected E-MEM register, and Keyframe: is the location
of the Time Cursor on the Master Timeline.
FIRE ... — Test fires the selected (highlighted) trigger or GPI.

3-82

Keyframe Timeline Menu

FIRE ATTACHED — Test fires all attached triggers (set to ON)
simultaneously, regardless of the current selection.
SELECT PERIPH — Selects the Peripheral trigger (A through H)

which you may attach to an E-MEM register or keyframe. The
triggers are defined in the Peripheral Triggers submenu under
Configuration.

Keyframe Timeline Menu
The Keyframe “top level” menu button invokes the Timeline
menu. The Timeline Menu provides a graphical display of the
keyframe positions for all enabled levels in the current E-MEM
register. This menu allows you to view changes to the effect in the
selected register while you add, remove, and edit keyframes.
The Timeline Menu can be accessed either by pressing the
KEYFRAME button on the main menu panel, or by pressing the
TIME CURSR button on the E-MEM effects editing panel.

TIME

TIMELINE MENU
Register 8

KF editing enabled
Master Timeline

> ———— Run Cursor
2 Keyframes

1:00

START

Duration 1:00

RUN
RUN DEL

KF
EFF DUR

M/E 1
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 2
M/E 3
BKGD
PGM PST

SELECT

DSK
BKGD
MISC
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3

ZOOM
1.0X

DPM 4

LAST
PAN / ZOOM

MOD ALL
ABSOLUTE

DELEGATES

PAUSE

ENABLES

NO PAUSE

TIME ALIGN
LEVELS

SET
START TIME

3-83

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

The appearance of the Timeline Menu is determined by the state
of the current E-MEM register. Parameters that affect the
appearance of the menu include the following:
■

The number of the current E-MEM register selected on the
E-MEM keypad

■

Which levels are enabled and which are delegated

■

The number, location, and duration of keyframes stored in the
register

■

The position of the Time Cursor on the timeline

The menu illustrated is for a Model 3000-3 switcher with all levels
enabled, two keyframes in the effect, and keyframe editing
enabled.
MOD ALL ABSOLUTE — Performs a Mod operation (see Effects

Editing section) which causes the values in all keyframes to be
replaced with the current values in the Current Working Buffer.
This modifies all keyframes on a given level to a single value (for
example, changing the background to Blue in all keyframes on
that level).
DELEGATES/ENABLES:
ENABLES — Provides a timeline for each level that is enabled

by the E-MEM ENABLE buttons. The ENABLE button of each
enabled level is high-tallied and the name of each enabled
level is highlighted in the menu.
DELEGATES — Allows individual enabled levels to be

delegated for modification while keeping the timelines of the
other enabled levels in the display.
When DELEGATES is selected, the names of the enabled levels
become unhighlighted in the menu and the buttons of the
enabled levels go to low tally on the E-MEM Enable panel.
Then, pressing one or more of the Enable buttons will
delegate the selected levels for timeline editing. The buttons
of the delegated levels will go to high tally and the names of the
delegated levels will be highlighted in the menu. (The buttons
of the undelegated enabled levels will remain at low tally.)
3-84

Keyframe Timeline Menu

PAUSE — Allows you to insert a pause at a keyframe.

When a pause is added to a keyframe and a run is performed, the
run will stop at that keyframe on any level that has the pause
programmed. The presence of a pause at any keyframe and on any
timeline is indicated by a sloped line following the keyframe
marker. Each pause marker will also appear on the Master
Timeline.
The rules for adding a pause or inserting a keyframe that contains
a pause are the same as for changing any other parameter. You can
add a pause to an existing keyframe by parking on that keyframe,
enabling PAUSE, and doing a Mod. Or you can insert a keyframe
with a pause by enabling PAUSE, then doing an Insert After or
Insert Before.
The basic rules for Auto Run on/off remain the same, but the
results of running effects appear differently when pauses are
programmed.

TIMELINE MENU
KF editing enabled

> ———— Run Cursor
Register 8
2
3

0:00

8 Keyframes
4
5

TIME

Duration 7:00
6
7

RUN
RUN DEL
START

Master Timeline

EFF DUR
M/E 1

4:00

M/E 2

5:00

SELECT

BKGD

ZOOM
1.0X
LAST
PAN / ZOOM

MOD ALL
ABSOLUTE

DELEGATES

PAUSE

ENABLES

NO PAUSE

TIME ALIGN
LEVELS

SET
START TIME

3-85

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

E x a m p l e 1 – I n s e r ti n g a P a u s e
1.

Press the Keyframe button on the top menu panel or the Time
Cursr button on the Effects Editing panel to bring up the
Timeline Menu.

Recall an empty register or one that you can write over.

If in Enable Mode, enable M/E 1, M/E 2, and Bkgd. If in
Delegate mode, delegate M/E 1, M/E 2, and Bkgd.

Set up a Timeline Menu similar to that shown above; that is,
with staggered keyframes on the various levels, staggered
independent timeline lengths, and a total of about 8
keyframes. We will discuss adding the pauses in a moment. (If
you don’t know how to set up these timelines and keyframes,
refer to the Effects Editing portion of your User Guide or
Operator’s manual.)

Select DELEGATES in the Timeline Menu if not in this mode
already.

Undelegate M/E 2 and Bkgd (in the above example). (Turn off
M/E and Bkgd on the E-MEM panel.)

Rewind the effect, then press Next KF to move to Keyframe 2.

In the Timeline menu, undelegate the levels you do not wish
to modify, and delegate those levels you do wish to modify.
a.

Press PAUSE/NO PAUSE button until the desired state
appears highlighted.

b. Press MOD.

NOTE: If the pause state of all delegated levels are not identical, neither
PAUSE or NO PAUSE is selectable.

3-86

Keyframe Timeline Menu

E x a m p l e 2 – I n s e r ti n g a P a u s e
1.

Press E-MEM on the top menu panel to bring up the E-MEM
menu, then the soft KF PATHS button in the E-MEM menu to
access the Keyframe Path menu. Note (in the upper right
corner of the menu) that we are still on Keyframe 2 in the
selected register.

Select M/E 1 with the SELECT LEVEL button in the E-MEM
Keyframe Path Menu, then turn ON the PAUSE function.

KEYFRAME PATH MENU

E-MEM / kf path
TRANSITION
KEY 1
KEY 2

S-LINEAR
LINEAR
S-LINEAR

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PGM PST

KEY A
KEY B
WIPES
WIPEXFORM

HOLD
HOLD
S-LINEAR

DSK
MISC
BKGD
DPM 1
DPM 2

ALL

For 2200-2i, delete M/E3,
PGM/PST, DSK; change DPMs

TENSION
= 0.00

CURVE
CONTINUITY
= 0.00

FSTOREXFRM
HOLD

DPM 3
DPM 4

OFF

WIPEXFORM

LINEAR
S-LINEAR
CURVE

SELECT
LEVEL

PAUSE

SELECT
GROUP

PATH
TYPE

BIAS
= 0.00

Press Last Menu on the top menu panel to return to the
Keyframe Menu.

Press Mod. This will modify the selected keyframe (2) on the
delegated level (M/E 1) to now include the programmed
pause.

Move to keyframe 4 with the Next KF button and, in the same
manner, add a pause to the BKGD level. (Undelegate M/E 1 and
delegate Bkgd.) Note that an easy way to move back and forth
between the Keyframe Menu and the E-MEM Menu is with
the Last Menu button.

3-87

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Press Rewind.

E ffe c t Ru n w i th Au to Ru n O ff (Ma s t e r T i m e l i n e
Enabled)
7.

Turn off Auto Run if it is on.

Press Run.
Note that when a run is performed while Auto Run is off (Auto
Run pushbutton not lit), the run is performed on the Master
Timeline; therefore, the run stops at any keyframe that has a
pause programmed on any level. Thus, in the example, the run
stops on all levels at Keyframe 2.

TIMELINE MENU
KF editing enabled

> ———— Run Cursor
Register 8
2
3

1:00

8 Keyframes
4
5

TIME

Duration 7:00
6
7

RUN
RUN DEL
START

Master Timeline

EFF DUR
M/E 1

4:00

M/E 2
BKGD

5:00

SELECT

ZOOM
1.0X
LAST
PAN / ZOOM

MOD ALL
ABSOLUTE

DELEGATES

PAUSE

ENABLES

NO PAUSE

TIME ALIGN
LEVELS

SET
START TIME

Press Run again. The run proceeds to the pause programmed
at keyframe 4 on the BKGD level.

10. Press Run again. All levels of the effect run to the end of the
effect (keyframe 8).

3-88

Keyframe Timeline Menu

E ffe c t Ru n w i th Au to Ru n O n (I n d e p e n d e n t
Timelines Enabled)
11. Turn on Auto Run and rewind the effect.
12. Press Run.
Note that when a run is performed while Auto Run is on (Auto
Run pushbutton lit), runs are made on the enabled
independent timelines (regardless of delegation), not on the
Master Timeline. In the example, the M/E 1 and BKGD levels
run to their respective pauses and stop, while the M/E 2 effect
runs to the end of its timeline.

TIMELINE MENU
KF editing enabled

> ———— Run Cursor
Register 8
2
3

0:00

8 Keyframes
4
5

TIME

Duration 7:00
6
7

RUN
RUN DEL
START

Master Timeline

EFF DUR
M/E 1

4:00

M/E 2
BKGD

5:00

SELECT

ZOOM
1.0X
LAST
PAN / ZOOM

MOD ALL
ABSOLUTE

DELEGATES

PAUSE

ENABLES

NO PAUSE

TIME ALIGN
LEVELS

SET
START TIME

13. Press Run again. The M/E 1 and BKGD levels run to the end of
their independent timelines, while the M/E 2 effect remains at
the end of its timeline.

NOTE: During a Run, independent timelines stop and remain at their
respective last keyframe. If all timelines are at their end, then the next
Run command restarts all timelines in sync from the beginning of the
timeline.
3-89

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

With Auto Run on and Independent Timelines running, the Master
Timeline remains at its first Keyframe (or zero time). When the
Independent Timelines arrive at their last keyframe, the Independent
Timelines are “skewed” from the Master Timeline position, and all
Timeline edits are disabled. For you to enable a Keyframe edit, press
REWIND or GO TO KF and the Master and Independent Timelines sync,
allowing further Timeline editing.

Lever Arm Scaling
■

Run the effect with the lever arm.

Note that each partial run to the next pause is scaled to full
scale of the lever arm. This is true whether Auto Run is on or
off.
Keyframe Runs in a Sequence
Remember that you must have Auto Run on when you Run a
sequence in order for the keyframe effects in the recalled
registers to run when the sequence is recalled.
Note that, with Auto Run on, any Recalled effect that has a
pause programmed at any enabled keyframe causes the effect
in only that level—and the sequence—to pause.
Pause on First or Last Keyframe
A Pause on the first keyframe with Auto Run on causes the
effect on that level to not run. Occasions on which the
presence of a pause on the first or last keyframe becomes
significant are as follows:
■

3-90

If the first keyframe on a timeline has a pause and a new
keyframe is inserted before it, the second keyframe will
then have a pause that will affect the running of the effect

Keyframe Timeline Menu

■

If the last keyframe on a timeline has a pause and a new
keyframe is inserted after it, the next-to-last keyframe will
then have the pause.

■

If the first keyframe on an individual level’s timeline has
a pause and the beginning of that timeline is skewed with
respect to the beginning of the overall effect, the effect
stops on that pause if the effect is running on the Master
Timeline (Auto Run off).

■

If the last keyframe on an individual level’s timeline has a
pause and that timeline is not as long as the overall effect,
the entire effect stops on that pause if the effect is running
on the Master Timeline (Auto Run off).

TIME ALIGN LEVELS — Adjusts the start times of all delegated
levels so that their current times align.
SET START TIME — Sets the start time (time of the first keyframe)

of all delegated levels to the time of the cursor. The relative timing
of all keyframes within a level remains unchanged; only the start
times of delegated levels are changed.
TIME SELECT — Selects the function of the TIME knob, as follows:
RUN — Runs the current effect with the delegated soft knob.
Usage is the same as the E-MEM subpanel RUN button. Only
enabled levels are activated in this operation.
RUN DEL — Runs multiple keyframe effects in their relative
time position.
START — Adds a delay to where the keyframe begins.
KF —“Slides” a delegated keyframe timeline relative to the
next/previous keyframe. Durations remain fixed. If CONST
DUR is set, the overall effect duration is unaffected.
EFF DUR — “Slides “ the overall effect duration; scales the
delegated levels.

NOTE: Other soft button and soft knob functions that appear in the
Timeline Menu under specific conditions are discussed in the User
Guide.

3-91

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Aux Bus Menu
The Aux Bus Menu allows you to select or deselect looping mode
on Aux Buses 1 through 4 for use with the Effects Send feature.
You can also assign the video and key sources to be used for the
Effects Send loop and assign them to the the near and/or far side
of a DPM rotation effect.

AUX BUS MENU
aux bus
PVW BUS

PVW BUS

MASK BUS

NO LOOP

AUX BUS 1
AUX BUS 2

EXT LOOP
NO LOOP

AUX BUS 3

NO LOOP

AUX BUS 4

NO LOOP

AUX BUS 5

NO LOOP

AUX BUS 6

NO LOOP

AUX BUS 7

NO LOOP

LOGICAL

PHYSICAL

NO LOOP

NO LOOP
AUX BUS 1

EXT LOOP

LOG AUX
SELECT

EFX LOOP
MODE

The following selections are available from the Aux Menu:
BUS SELECT — Selects the logical (and physical) aux bus to be

assigned to an effects send loop. Logical buses are those bus
numbers that are assigned to physical buses via menu mapping.
Physical buses (shown in parentheses) are the actual bus outputs.
EFF LOOP MODE — Turns the effects send loop on (EXT LOOP) or
off (NO LOOP) for the selected (highlighted) bus. When AUX 4 is
selected, a FRAME STORE selection is added for using the Frame

Store in the effects send loop. (The Frame Store option must be
present for this selection to be functional.)

3-92

Mask Menu

E-MEM CONTROL — MISC activates E-MEM recalls at the MISC or
DPM level for the selected aux bus, depending on the level

selection in the Config/External IF/DPM Setup/Map Aux Buses
Menu. OFF disables E-MEM recalls for the selected bus.
NEAR/FAR/BOTH — These buttons determine whether the video
source for the currently-highlighted aux bus will appear on the
near side, the far side, or both. If you visualize a rotating card with
an image on the front and an image on the back, the image that
you can see at this moment is the near side, and the image hidden
on the back is the far side.
TAKE — Changes the source selection for the currently-selected
aux bus. Sources can also be changed by selecting them on the Aux
Bus or the Remote Aux Panel.

Mask Menu
The Mask Menu allows you to adjust the opacity of the inhibit
mask and to set chroma filtering.

MASK MENU

INHIBIT MASK OPACITY
= 100%

mask
M/E1 KEY1
M/E1 KEY2
M/E2 KEY1
M/E2 KEY2
M/E3 KEY1
M/E3 KEY2

ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

M/E1 KEY2

OFF

KEYER
SELECT

INH MASK
OPACITY

MASK BUS
CHR TRAP

3-93

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

The Mask Menu selections are as follows:
KEYER SELECT — Delegates

a keyer for the following

selections.
INH MASK OPACITY — Enables
OPACITY soft knob.

or disables the INHIBIT MASK

INHIBIT MASK OPACITY — Adjusts opacity of the inhibit
mask. Available only for Key 1 and Key 2 in the M/Es.
MASK BUS CHR TRAP — Enables or disables the chroma trap on

the mask bus. The filtering removes unwanted chroma from video
used to generate the mask.
If you have a 068904-01 Keyer module, four levels of chroma
filtering are available — BS - HARD, BS - SOFT, LP - HARD, and
LP - SOFT. (BS = Band Stop; LP = Low Pass.) BS - HARD is the
default selection and is for signals that have high frequency
content. The other selections provide varying degrees of
softening, and can reduce ringing on hard mask edges.

3-94

Matte Menu

Matte Menu
The Matte Menu enables the luminance level of Backgrounds 1
and 2 to be adjusted down to superblack, and allows adjustment
of the user-definable wash angle.

MATTE MENU

WASH ANGLE
= 250.00 degrees

matte

SUPERBLACK SUPERBLACK

NORMAL

OFF

BKGD 1
LUM

BKGD 2
LUM

USER DEF
WASH ANGLE

MATTE
COPY >

TEXTURE
>

The following selections are accessible through this menu:
BKGD 1 LUM and BKGD 2 LUM — Enables or disables luminance

adjustment down to superblack with the Background 1 and/or
Background 2 LUM controls.
USER DEF WASH ANGLE — Enables the WASH ANGLE soft knob.
WASH ANGLE — Adjusts the angle of the separation line
between two selected wash mattes.
MATTE COPY> — Displays the Matte Copy Menu.
TEXTURE> — Displays the Matte Texture Menu which allows a

texture to be applied to the matte.

3-95

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Matte Copy Menu
The Matte Copy Menu allows you to copy or swap all Matte
settings from one Matte Generator to another.

MATTE COPY MENU
matte / matte copy
COPY

MATTE 2

M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL

MATTE 1

M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL

SWAP

MATTE 2

M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL

WITH

MATTE 1

M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
DSK
BKGD

KEY 1 FILL
KEY 1 BORD
KEY 2 FILL
KEY 2 BORD
PRI WIPE
SEC WIPE

2 TO 1
1 TO 2
MATTE 1
MATTE 2
BOTH

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
DSK
BKGD

KEY 1 FILL
KEY 1 BORD
KEY 2 FILL
KEY 2 BORD
PRI WIPE
SEC WIPE

FROM
GROUP

FROM
MATTE GEN

SIDE
SELECT

TO
GROUP

TO
MATTE GEN

DO MATTE
SWAP

DO MATTE
COPY

The following menu selections are accessible through the Matte
Copy Menu:
FROM GROUP — Selects the M/E or PGM PST bus system to copy

or swap from.
FROM MATTE GEN — Selects the Matte Generator to copy or swap

from.
SIDE SELECT — Selects the source and destination mattes for

copying or swapping. (Each Matte Generator has two mattes.)
TO GROUP — Selects the M/E or PGM PST bus system to copy or

swap to.
TO MATTE GEN — Selects the Matte Generator to copy or swap to.
DO MATTE SWAP — Initiates the matte swap currently selected.

3-96

Matte Menu

DO MATTE COPY — Initiates the matte copy currently selected.

NOTE: An UNDO function appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting
the menu in order to take effect.

Matte Texture Menu
The Matte Texture Menu allows you to adjust the appearance of
the video texture.

MATTE TEXTURE MENU
matte / texture

1:1
2:1
3:1
4:1
6:1
8:1

1:1
2:1
4:1
6:1
8:1
FREE RUN

HORIZ
STRETCH

VERT
MODE

SMOOTHING
NOTCH
NONE

1
2
3
4
5
6

2
3
4

1
2
3
4
5
6

FILTER
MODE

LENGTH
A

LENGTH
B

SOURCE

The Matte Texture Menu selections are as follows:
HORIZ STRETCH — Selects one of the horizontal stretch ratios

listed in the menu.
VERT MODE — Selects one of the vertical stretch ratios listed in the

menu.

3-97

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

FILTER MODE — Selects one of the filtering modes listed in the

menu.
LENGTH A — Selects one of the lengths listed in the menu.
LENGTH B — Selects one of the lengths listed in the menu.
SOURCE — Selects one of the sources listed.

Frame Store Menu
The Frame Store Menu and submenus include operational
settings for the Frame Store.

FRAME STORE MENU

VIDEO PAGE SELECT
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4

frame store

KEY PAGE SELECT
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4

AUX 4 feeds the Frame Store
SHADOW BLUR
= 0.0%

VIDEO

OFF

KEY

DRP SHADOW
LOCK
BLUR
VIDEO/KEY

KEY STORE
MODE

SHADOW BLUR SYMMETRY
= 0%

PICTURE
PROCESS>

PARAM
COPY >

VIDEO
STORE>

KEY
STORE >

MASK
STORE >
3000

3-98

Frame Store Menu

DRP SHADOW BLUR — Turns on or off the Frame Store Drop
Shadow blur and enables the shadow blur adjustment knobs.
SHADOW BLUR — Adjusts the amount of blur to be applied to
the Drop Shadow.
SHADOW BLUR SYMMETRY — Adjusts the ratio of vertical to

horizontal blur on the Drop Shadow. When set to 0.0, the
vertical and horizontal blur are equal.
LOCK VIDEO/KEY — Causes the key store to follow any parameter

change that you make in the associated video store.
KEY STORE MODE — Allows the Key Store to be configured either

as a key or video.
PICTURE PROCESS> — Displays the Picture Process Menu.
PARAMETER COPY> — Displays the Parameter Copy Menu.
VIDEO STORE> — Displays the Video Store Menu.
KEY STORE> — Displays the Key Store Menu.
MASK STORE> — Displays the Mask Store Menu. Appears only if

a Mask Store board is present in the processor frame.

3-99

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Picture Process Menu
Decode, Compress, Filter, Bevel, and Copy selections are available
on the Frame Store Picture Process Menu. (The Decode function is
required.)

FRAME STORE PICTURE PROCESS MENU

VIDEO PAGE SELECT
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4

frame store / picture process

KEY PAGE SELECT
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4

<>
DECODE
COMPRESS

PAGE 1

FILTER

PAGE 2

PAGE 1
PAGE 2

BEVEL

VIDEO STORE

PAGE 3

VIDEO STORE

PAGE 3

COPY

KEY STORE

PAGE 4

KEY STORE

PAGE 4

PROCESS

FROM
STORE

FROM
PAGE

TO
STORE

TO
PAGE

DO
SWAP

DO
COPY
3000

De c o d e
On Model 3000 switchers, you must first decode the frame you
will be manipulating before you can use Compress, Filter, or
Bevel. The process of decoding means you are separating the
chroma and luma parts of the signal.
The decode process must be repeated if any of the following
situations occur:

3-100

■

Switcher boot-up (Control Processor Program Enable reset)

■

UnFREZing of any image

■

GRABing any image.

■

COMPRESSing from the Decode Page to the TO PAGE.

Frame Store Menu

The decode procedure is as follows:
1.

Set up the switcher for Frame Store operations.

Select 2-field mode (FIELD 2 button) on the Frame Store
Subpanel.

Press the FRZE button on the Frame Store Subpanel.

Use the VIDEO PAGE or KEY PAGE soft knob on the Frame
Store Menu to view PAGE 1 through PAGE 4 in order to
select the page you want to process.

Use the PROCESS soft button to select the DECODE
function.

Use the DECODE PAGE soft button to select the page to
decode.

Press DECODE PAGE.

NOTE: The decoding process takes about 30 seconds.
8.

A Decode complete message displays when the task is done.
Another message gives the decoded page number.

The FROM page is always the decoded page. You can now use
the COMPRESS, FILTER, and BEVEL selections to
manipulate this page.

3-101

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Co m p r e s s
The Compress operation compresses the FROM page to the TO
page. The compressed image appears in the upper left-hand
corner of the TO page.

NOTE: On the Model 3000 the FROM page is the decoded page.
The key from the corresponding FROM page in the Key Store can
be processed in one of three ways.
1. CREATE
This makes a 4x3 key in the corresponding TO Key Store page
that is the same size as the compressed video. Use this option
if the FROM video is a full-screen image. Set up the Frame
Store to output Shaped video in this mode.
2. COMPRESS
Use this option to compress titles and other keys. This
compressws the corresponding FROM Key Store page the
same as the Video Store page.
3. NONE
This selection does nothing with or to the Key Store pages.
When using COMPRESS, it is best to lock the key to the video.
Also, if the edges have blanking the Crop function is useful. It is
also useful to note the repositioning of compressed video will run
in realtime.

NOTE: Compress works only on still frozen video.

3-102

Frame Store Menu

F i l te r
Filter only affects the luma of the video page. Select one of the
following filter options, and experiment with them to achieve the
desired effect.

NOTE: For a better looking Emboss effect, Soften the image first before
using Emboss.
■

EMBOSS – Use for image edge enhancement and shading;
gives image a 3D appearance.

■

SHARPEN – Sharpens the image.

■

SOFTEN – Softens the image.

With the filter type selected, press the DO FILTER soft button as
many times as applicable to implement the effect.

NOTE: Multiple button pushes are stored in a buffer. The buffer will
continue to increment even if you have finished pressing buttons. It may
take up to 30 seconds to complete five passes.

Be v e l
Bevel gives an image a “lighted picture frame” in a 3-D type of
effect. The BRIGHTNESS soft knob controls the quantity of light
projected on the frame. BEVEL WIDTH controls the width of the
frame. The LIGHT SOURCE button selects where the light comes
from: Bottom, Top, Right, or Left.

NOTE: This should be used on a full 4x3 image. The results may look
strange otherwise.

Co p y
Use COPY from the PROCESS choices to copy or swap from and
to video and key store pages.

3-103

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Parameter Copy Menu
Use the Parameter Copy menu to copy or swap all parameter
settings from video to video, key to key, or video to key.

FRAME STORE PARAMETER COPY MENU
frame store / parameter copy
COPY PARAMETERS FROM

VIDEO STORE

KEY STORE

SWAP PARAMETERS FROM

VIDEO STORE

WITH

KEY STORE

VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE

FROM
STORE

TO
STORE

DO
SWAP

DO
COPY

The Parameter Copy menu selections are:
FROM STORE — Selects the store to copy/swap from.
TO STORE — Selects the store to copy/swap to.
DO SWAP — Initiates the Parameter swap currently selected.
DO COPY — Initiates the Parameter copy currently selected.

3-104

Frame Store Menu

Video Store Menu
The Video Store Menu allows you to select a page of stored video,
create a strobe effect by setting a strobe time period between a
stored image and a delegated source image, and provides access
to Video Store positioning and pseudo color controls.

VIDEO STORE MENU
PAGE SELECT

frame store / video store
PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

PAGE 4

STROBE TIME PERIOD
= 20

STROBE FREEZE PERIOD
= 10

4 FIELD

INTERPOLATE

2 FIELD

REPLICATE

OFF

FRAME
TYPE

INTERPOLATE

STROBE

MOSAIC >

PSEUDO
COLOR >

CROP >

REPOSITION >

FILTER >

FRAME TYPE — Select either 4 or 2 field video format. Four-field

mode has 2 pages of video/key. Two-field mode has 4 pages of
video/key.
INTERPOLATE — (FRAME TYPE must be in “2-field” mode to

display this function.) Select how the video data is to be
interpreted. For example, interpolate evaluates screen lines 1 and
3 and averages them to get line 2. Replicate copies line 1 to create
line 2, etc.

3-105

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

STROBE—When ON is selected, strobe is activated. Strobe
alternates between a frozen framestore image and a selected
source image (M/E, PGM, etc. delegated to Aux Bus 4) with the
frequency set by the soft knobs described below. The difference
between the time settings is what varies the strobe effect.
STROBE TIME PERIOD — Sets the time (in fields) for the
delegated video source to be displayed. Minimum time
period is 4 fields.
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD — Sets the time (in fields) during

which the frozen frame store image is displayed. Minimum
time period is 8 fields.
PAGE SELECT —Selects one of four pages (frames) of the video

image.
MOSAIC> — Opens the Video Store Mosaic Menu.
PSEUDOCOLOR> — Opens the Video Store Pseudo Color Menu.
CROP> — Opens the Video Store Crop Menu.
REPOSITION> — Opens the Video Store Reposition Menu.
FILTER> — Opens the Video Store Filter Menu.

NOTE: The Mosaic, Pseudo Color, and Filter modes are functional only
in 2-field mode.

3-106

Frame Store Menu

V i d e o S to r e Mo s a i c Me n u
This menu allows you to apply and adjust a mosaic pattern to the
video store video.

VIDEO STORE MOSAIC MENU
frame store / video store / mosaic

MOSAIC SIZE
= 50%

MOSAIC ASPECT
= 0.00

FIRST ACTIVE PIXEL
=0

ON
OFF
MOSAIC

MOSAIC — Turns on the mosaic feature and enables the mosaic
adjustment soft knobs.
MOSAIC SIZE — Adjusts the width of the mosaic area, up to
100% of the screen.
MOSAIC ASPECT — Adjusts the vertical-to-horizontal aspect
of the mosaic area.
FIRST ACTIVE PIXEL — Adjusts the positioning of the left edge

of the mosaic area.

3-107

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

V i d e o S to r e P s e u d o Co l o r Me n u
The Pseudo Color Menu allows you to select normal or reversed
video, and several pseudocolor modes. The mode selected
determines the functions of the fourth and fifth soft buttons and
the soft knobs.
The following illustration is the appearance of the Video Store
Pseudo Color Menu when POSTR/SOLR is selected.

VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU
frame store / video store / pseudo color

POSTERIZATION
= 0.0

SOLARIZATION
= 0.0

3-108

OFF

POSTR/SOLR
HUE MOD
COLOR MOD
CONTRAST

REVERSE
VIDEO

UNSHAPE/
RESHAPE

MODE
SELECT

OFF

POSTERIZE

SOLARIZE

Frame Store Menu

REVERSE VIDEO — Turns reverse video on or off, which inverts

the luminance (white and black are reversed) and places each hue
180° away from its original color.
UNSHAPE/RESHAPE — Allows shaped video (of a video/key

pair) to be unshaped before being bitmapped, then reshaped after
bitmapping. This button appears only if Key Store is configured as
Key.
MODE SELECT — Selects one of four pseudocolor modes, as
described on the following pages.

Posterization/Solarization Menu
Selecting POSTR/SOLR mode provides adjustment of the
posterization and solarization parameters.
POSTERIZE — Causes the luminance values of a frozen image to

be changed from a continuous scale to a limited(adjustable)
number of steps.
POSTERIZATION — Adjusts the number of steps of luminance.
SOLARIZE — Causes the chrominance values of a frozen image to
be changed from a continuous scale to a limited(adjustable)
number of steps.
SOLARIZATION — Adjusts the number of steps of

chrominance.

Pseudo Color Hue Modification Menu
The following illustration is the appearance of the Pseudo Color
Menu when HUE MOD is selected.
HUE MOD–Enables the hue modification feature, which strips
chroma from the stored image and substitutes a spectrum of

3-109

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU
frame store / video store / pseudo color

HUE MOD START PHASE
= 0.0

HUE MOD END PHASE
= 0.0

HUE MOD SATURATION
= 0.0
POSTR/SOLR

OFF

HUE MOD
COLOR MOD
CONTRAST

ON
OFF

CW
CCW

UNSHAPE/
RESHAPE

MODE
SELECT

HUE
MOD

HUE MOD
PATH

OFF
REVERSE
VIDEO

colors for the resulting black and white. Also enables the soft
knobs for adjustment of the colors to be substituted.
HUE MOD START PHASE and HUE MOD END PHASE — Adjust
the starting color and ending color of the spectrum to be
substituted for black and white.
HUE MOD SATURATION — Adjusts the saturation of the color
spectrum to be substituted.
HUE MOD PATH — Sets the direction of the hue substitution
from black to white, as viewed on a vectorscope.

Pseudo Color Modification Menu
The following illustration is the appearance of the Pseudo Color
Menu when COLOR MOD is selected. This menu provides
adjustment of the color modification parameters.
COLOR MOD — Enables the color modification feature, which
strips chroma from the stored image, then substitutes two colors
for the black and white limits of the resulting image.

3-110

Frame Store Menu

VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU
frame store / video store / pseudo color

BLACK HUE
= 0.0

BLACK SAT
= 0.0

BLACK BRIGHT
= 0.0
POSTR/SOLR
HUE MOD
ON
OFF

ON
OFF

COLOR MOD
CONTRAST

ON
OFF

REVERSE
VIDEO

UNSHAPE/
RESHAPE

MODE
SELECT

COLOR
MOD

BLK/WHT
DELEGATE

BLK/WHT DELEGATE — Delegates the soft knobs for adjustment

of the color to be substituted.
BLACK HUE, BLACK SAT, and BLACK BRIGHT or WHITE HUE,
WHITE SAT, and WHITE BRIGHT — Adjust the color and

luminance of the colors to be substituted for the black and
white portions of the signal.

Pseudo Color Contrast Menu
The following illustration is the appearance of the Pseudo Color
Menu when CONTRAST is selected.
CONTRAST — Turns on the contrast function and enables the

contrast adjustment knobs. Adjustment of these controls is highly
subjective and depends on the characteristics of the image and the
desires of the operator.

3-111

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU
frame store / video store / pseudo color

CONTRAST LUM SLOPE
= 0.0

CONTRAST LUM RANGE
=0

CONTRAST SATURATION
= 0.0

POSTR/SOLR
HUE MOD
COLOR MOD

OFF

CONTRAST

ON
OFF

REVERSE
VIDEO

UNSHAPE/
RESHAPE

MODE
SELECT

CONTRAST

CONTRAST LUM SLOPE — Adjusts the luminance contrast of

the stored video.
CONTRAST LUM RANGE — Adjusts the luminance contrast of

the video.
CONTRAST SATURATION — Adjusts the saturation of the

video chrominance.

V i d e o S to r e Cr o p Me n u
This menu allows you to crop (mask) portions of the stored video
image.
CROP — Turns on the crop feature and enables the soft knob
adjustments for positioning the crop.
TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, and RIGHT — Adjust the limits of the

crop for the stored video.

3-112

Frame Store Menu

VIDEO STORE CROP MENU
frame store / video store / crop

TOP
= 0.00 screen units

BOTTOM
= 0.00 screen units

LEFT
= 0.00 screen units

RIGHT
= 0.00 screen units

OFF
CROP

3-113

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

V i d e o S to r e Re p o s i ti o n Me n u
This menu allows positioning of the video store output image.

VIDEO STORE REPOSITION MENU
frame store / video store / reposition

Coarse Adjust Horizontal
= 0.0000 Screen Units
(0.00 Pixels)

Blur is currently ON.
Position values are limited to
4 Line, 1 Pixel boundaries

Fine Adjust Horizontal

Coarse Adjust Vertical
= 0.0000 Screen Units
(0.00 Lines)
ON

OFF

HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
POSITION
POSITION

PIXEL
DETENT

Fine Adjust Vertical

RESTORE
DEFAULTS

HORIZONTAL POSITION — Enables or disables horizontal

positioning of the stored (frozen) image.
Coarse Adjust Horizontal and Fine Adjust Horizontal soft knobs
— Adjust the horizontal position of the image.
VERTICAL POSITION — Enables or disables vertical positioning of

the stored image.
Coarse Adjust Vertical and Fine Adjust Vertical soft knobs —

Adjust the vertical position of the image.
RESTORE DEFAULTS — Returns the image to the original

position.

3-114

Frame Store Menu

V i d e o S to r e F i l te r Me n u (Bl u r )
The Video Store Filter Menu allows you to apply either a blur or
hue spectrum to the video store output image.
FILTER SELECT — Selects either BLUR or HUE ROTATE filter

mode.
Following is the appearance of the menu when BLUR is selected.

KEY STORE FILTER MENU

LUM BLUR
0%

frame store / key store / filter

CHROMA BLUR
0%

BLUR SYMMETRY
0%

BLUR

HUE ROTATE

OFF

FILTER
SELECT

BLUR

SEPARATE
LUM/CHROMA

LUM
BLUR

CHROMA
BLUR

BLUR
SYMMETRY

3-115

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

BLUR — Turns on the blur filter mode.
SEPARATE LUM/CHROMA — Allows separate adjustment of

luminance blur and chrominance blur applied to the video store
image.
LUM BLUR — Enables the LUM BLUR adjustment.
LUM BLUR — Adjust the amount of luminance blur applied to

the image
CHROMA BLUR — Enables the CHROMA BLUR adjustment.
CHROMA BLUR — Adjusts the amount of chrominance blur

applied to the video store image.
BLUR SYMMETRY — Enables the BLUR SYMMETRY adjustment.
BLUR SYMMETRY — Adjusts the proportions of luminance
and chrominance blur.

3-116

Frame Store Menu

V i d e o S to r e F i l te r Me n u (Hu e Ro t a t e )
This is the appearance of the Video Store Filter Menu when HUE
ROTATE is selected.

VIDEO STORE FILTER MENU
frame store / video store / filter

BLUR

HUE ROTATE

OFF

FILTER
SELECT

HUE
ROTATE

HUE ANGLE
0 deg

HUE ROTATE — Turns on the hue rotate filter mode which strips
chroma from the stored image and substitutes a full spectrum of
colors for the black , white, and in between portions of the
resulting image.
HUE ANGLE — Adjusts the hue of the color substituted for

black. (The complement of the selected hue is substituted for
white.)

3-117

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Key Store Menu
The Key Store Menu allows you to select either 4-field or
2-field storage mode for Key Store, and provides access to Key
Store positioning controls.

KEY STORE MENU
PAGE SELECT

frame store / key store
PAGE 1

3-118

4 FIELD

INTERPOLATE

2 FIELD

REPLICATE

FRAME
TYPE

INTERPOLATE

CROP >

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

REPOSITION >

PAGE 4

FILTER >

Frame Store Menu

FRAME TYPE — Selects either 4-field or 2-field mode:
4-FIELD — Stores all of the color information in the original

composite signal.
2-FIELD — Uses only 2 of the 4 fields of color information, but

allows twice as many pages to be stored.
INTERPOLATE — When 2 FIELD mode is selected, you may choose
either DUPLICATE or REPLICATE to produce the other 2 fields of

color information.
INTERPOLATE — Causes vertical interpolation (averaging)

between pixels in each pair of adjacent raster lines of the
selected field for use as the other field of each frame.
REPLICATE — Causes the selected field to be used twice for

each frame.
PAGE SELECT — Selects one of four pages (fields) of the video

image in 2-field mode, or one of two pages in 4-field mode.
REPOSITION> — Displays the Key Store Reposition Menu.
FILTER> — Displays the Key Store Filter Menu.

3-119

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Ke y S to r e Cr o p Me n u
This menu allows you to crop (mask) portions of the stored key.

KEY STORE CROP MENU
frame store / key store / crop

TOP
= 0.00 screen units

BOTTOM
= 0.00 screen units

LEFT
= 0.00 screen units

RIGHT
= 0.00 screen units

OFF
CROP

CROP — Turns on the crop feature and enables the soft knob
adjustments for positioning the crop.
TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, and RIGHT — Adjust the limits of the

crop for the stored key.

3-120

Frame Store Menu

Ke y S to r e Re p o s i ti o n Me n u
This menu allows positioning of the key store output image.

KEY STORE REPOSITION MENU
frame store / key store / reposition

Coarse Adjust Horizontal
= 0.0000 Screen Units
0 Pixels)

Blur is currently ON.
Position values are limited to
4 Line, 1 Pixel boundaries

Fine Adjust Horizontal

Coarse Adjust Vertical
= 0.0000 Screen Units
(0 Lines)
ON

OFF

HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
POSITION
POSITION

PIXEL
DETENT

Fine Adjust Vertical

RESTORE
DEFAULTS

HORIZONTAL POSITION — Enables or disables horizontal

positioning of the stored key.
Coarse Adjust Horizontal and Fine Adjust Horizontal soft knobs
— Adjust the horizontal position of the key.
VERTICAL POSITION — Enables or disables vertical positioning of

the stored key.
Coarse Adjust Vertical and Fine Adjust Vertical soft knobs —

Adjust the vertical position of the key.
RESTORE DEFAULTS — Returns the key to the original position.

3-121

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Ke y S to r e F i l te r Me n u (Bl u r – V i d e o M o d e )
The Key Store Filter Menu allows you to apply a blur to the key
store output. If the key is configured as video, it also allows you to
apply a hue spectrum to the key store output.
FILTER SELECT — Selects either BLUR or HUE ROTATE filter

mode.
Following is the appearance of the menu when BLUR is selected
and the key is configured as video.

KEY STORE FILTER MENU

LUM BLUR
0%

frame store / key store / filter

CHROMA BLUR
0%

BLUR SYMMETRY
0%

BLUR

HUE ROTATE

OFF

FILTER
SELECT

BLUR

SEPARATE
LUM/CHROMA

LUM
BLUR

CHROMA
BLUR

BLUR
SYMMETRY

3-122

Frame Store Menu

BLUR — Turns on the blur filter mode.
SEPARATE LUM/CHROMA — Allows separate adjustment of

luminance blur and chrominance blur applied to the video store
image.
LUM BLUR — Enables the LUM BLUR adjustment.
LUM BLUR — Adjust the amount of luminance blur applied to

the image,
CHROMA BLUR — Enables the CHROMA BLUR adjustment.
CHROMA BLUR — Adjusts the amount of chrominance blur

applied to the video store image.
BLUR SYMMETRY — Enables the BLUR SYMMETRY adjustment.
BLUR SYMMETRY — Adjusts the proportions of luminance
and chrominance blur.

3-123

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Ke y S to r e F i l te r Me n u (Bl u r – Ke y M o d e )
The Key Store Filter Menu appears as follows when BLUR is
selectedand the key is configured as a key.

KEY STORE FILTER MENU

BLUR
0%

frame store / key store / filter

BLUR SYMMETRY
0%

BLUR

HUE ROTATE

OFF

FILTER
SELECT

BLUR

BLUR
SYMMETRY

BLUR — Turns on the blur filter mode and enables the BLUR

adjustment.
BLUR — Adjust the amount of blur applied to the image,
BLUR SYMMETRY — Enables the BLUR SYMMETRY adjustment.
BLUR SYMMETRY — Adjusts the vertical and horizontal ratio

of the blur.

3-124

Frame Store Menu

Ke y S to r e F i l te r Me n u (Hu e Ro ta t e )
When HUE ROTATE is selected, the Key Store Filter Menu appears
as follows:

KEY STORE FILTER MENU
frame store / key store / filter

BLUR

HUE ROTATE

OFF

FILTER
SELECT

HUE
ROTATE

HUE ANGLE
0 deg

black. (The complement of the selected hue is substituted for
white.)

3-125

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Mask Store Menu
The Mask Store Menu allows you to select straight or freehand
drawing, paint brush parameters, screen parameters, and fill
shapes. You can also save, or undo, your current work.
DRAW — Use to enable/disable the graphics tablet, the pen cursor,

and the Mask Store Menu.

MASK STORE MENU

BRUSH OPACITY
= 50%

frame store / mask store

BRUSH SIZE
= 14 (TV LINES)

BRUSH SOFTNESS
= 35%

3-126

STRAIGHT

BLACK

OFF

FREEHAND

WHITE

DRAW

DRAW
MODE

BRUSH
SOURCE

SAVE

FILL
SHAPE

BLACK
SCREEN

WHITE
SCREEN

UNDO

Frame Store Menu

DRAW MODE — Selects between freehand and straight drawing

tools.
BRUSH SOURCE — Selects either Black or White brush strokes.
Use the following soft knobs to adjust brush parameters.
BRUSH OPACITY soft knob — Makes brush strokes lighter or

darker.
BRUSH SIZE soft knob — Selects brush size from 1 TV lines to 31

TV lines high.
BRUSH SOFTNESS soft knob — Adjusts the thickness of the brush.
SAVE — Saves current work to a “save buffer.” (A Save is
automatic after FRZE or GRAB is pressed.
FILL SHAPE — Fills a closed object with either a black or white

background (determined by BRUSH SOURCE selection).
BLACK SCREEN — Fills the mask store screen with system black.
WHITE SCREEN — Fills the mask store screen with system white
UNDO — Erases all work not saved to the save buffer. Any data not
saved, freezed, or grabbed is lost.

3-127

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Miscellaneous Menu
The MISC button on the main menu subpanel brings up the toplevel Miscellaneous menu.

MISC MENU
misc

SIGNAL
PROCESS >

SAFE
TITLE >

The following menu selections are accessible through the
Miscellaneous menu:
SIGNAL PROCESS> — Displays the Signal Process Menu, which

allows you to select Fineline and Dither modes.
SAFE TITLE> — Displays the Safe Title Menu, which allows you to

turn on or off safe title and select a safe title pattern.

3-128

Miscellaneous Menu

Signal Processing Menu
The Signal Processing Menu allows you to turn Fineline and
Dither modes on or off.

SIGNAL PROCESSING MENU
misc / signal process

OFF
ON

FREE RUN

OFF

FRAME LOCK

FINELINE

DITHER

The Signal Processing Menu selections are as follows:
FINELINE — Enables/disables Fineline mode.
DITHER — Selects FRAME LOCK or FREE RUN dithering for 8-bit
digital outputs, or turns OFF the output dithering.

3-129

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Safe Title Menu
The Safe Title Menu allows you to turn the Safe Title mode on or
off, select a safe title pattern, and adjust safe title horizontal
position. The functions of this menu appear only if the Safe Title
option is installed.

SAFE TITLE MENU
misc/safe title

SAFE TITLE H-POSITION
= 0.0000 clocks
(0.0000 nsec)

SAFE TITLE
SCREEN CTR
ON

TITLE & CTR

OFF

X-HATCH

SAFE
TITLE

SAFE TITLE
SELECT

The Safe Title Menu selections are as follows:
SAFE TITLE — Turns the Safe Title Generator preview monitor
display on or off.
SAFE TITLE SELECT — Selects a safe title pattern. This soft button
appears only when SAFE TITLE is on.
SAFE TITLE H-POSITION — Positions safe title horizontally. This
soft knob appears only when SAFE TITLE is on.

3-130

Disk Menu

Disk Menu
The Disk Menu provides disk and file management functions
such as creating directories and loading and saving files to and
from diskettes.
The following menu appears when the main menu DISK button is
pressed and no directory has been read.

DISK MENU

FILE
SELECT

disk
CURRENT DIRECTORY

TOTAL BYTES

/FLOPPY
MARKED FILES
# FILES

# BYTES

FILENAME
FLOPPY

CHILD
DIRECTORY

0
EXT

BYTES

DATE

TIME

UTILS >

CHILD DIRECTORY — Causes the system to read a diskette, if

present, in the disk drive, and to list the parent directory of the
diskette.

3-131

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Pressing CHILD DIRECTORY also changes the appearance of the
Disk Menu to enable certain other functions:

DISK MENU
disk

FILE
SELECT
CURRENT DIRECTORY

TOTAL BYTES

/FLOPPY
MARKED FILES
# FILES

# BYTES

FILENAME

0
EXT

/FLOPPY

BYTES

DATE

TIME

VIEW BY
NAME

LIST
PARENT
DIRECTORY DIRECTORY

LOAD
FILE >

SAVE
FILE >

MARK FILE
FOR DELETE

DELETE
FILE >

UTILS >

LIST DIRECTORY — Causes the system to re-read the directory of

the diskette in the disk drive.
PARENT DIRECTORY — Backs you out from a subdirectory to the

parent directory.
LOAD FILE> — Displays the Load File Menu. If a subdirectory is
selected (see FILE SELECT below), the CHILD DIRECTORY label
appears instead of LOAD FILE>. This allows you to read the

selected subdirectory.
SAVE FILE> — Displays the Save File Menu.
MARK FILE FOR DELETE — Allows you to mark a number of files

so that they may all be deleted simultaneously. (Does not enable
simultaneous loading or saving of files.)
DELETE FILE> — Displays the Confirm Delete Menu which allows
you to DO DELETE or CANCEL. Either a single selected file or a
number of marked files can be deleted.

3-132

Disk Menu

UTILS> — Displays the Utilities Menu.
FILE SELECT — Moves the selection box through the list of files in

the directory to select the file or directory to be acted upon by
subsequent operations.
VIEW BY NAME/EXT/DIR ONLY — Allows the directory to be listed

in alphabetical order by file name or by extension, or to just list
subdirectories. The display changes automatically as the new
selection is made.

After the diskette directory has been read, the display might look
something like the following example:

DISK MENU

FILE
SELECT

disk
CURRENT DIRECTORY

TOTAL BYTES

/FLOPPY
MARKED FILES
# FILES

# BYTES

FILENAME
LOCAL
LOCAL
NEWS
NEWS

8004
EXT
R32
K32
CFG
KFG

BYTES
1329
2365
543
2432

DATE
JUL-23-1996
JUL-23-1996
MAY-02-1996
MAY-02-1996

TIME
11:23
11:23
07:00
07:00

VIEW BY
NAME

LIST
PARENT
DIRECTORY DIRECTORY

LOAD
FILE >

SAVE
FILE >

MARK FILE
FOR DELETE

DELETE
FILE >

UTILS >

3-133

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Load File Menu
The following menu comes up when you press LOAD FILE> if the
selected file is an E-MEM register.

LOAD FILE MENU
disk / load file
Load file:
/FLOPPY/ABLE.R01

E-MEM
REGISTER

E-MEM
BANK

E-MEM
ALL

NO LOAD

LOAD

M/E 1

M/E 2

M/E 3

PGM PST
DSK

BKGD/
MISC

DPMs
1-4

MASTER
E-MEM

E-MEM
LOAD
SELECT

DO
LOAD

M/E 1 through MASTER E-MEM — Allow you to include or omit

portions of the selected file before loading it from disk into the
switcher.
E-MEM LOAD SELECT — Enables loading of the selected
E-MEM REGISTER, the E-MEM BANK containing the selected
register, or E-MEM ALL (all 100 E-MEM registers).

NOTE: It takes approximately 6 minutes to load all 100 registers, even
if most of them are empty, so you may prefer to load only specific banks.
DO LOAD — Displays the Confirm File Load Menu, which allows
you to DO LOAD or CANCEL.

3-134

Disk Menu

If the selected file is a Configuration file instead of an
E-MEM file, the Load File Menu will appear as follows:

LOAD FILE MENU
disk / load file
Load file:
/FLOPPY/NEWS.CFG

NO LOAD

LOAD

USER
PREFS

SYSTEM
PARAMS

OUTPUTS

EXTERN
I/F

INPUTS

NO LOAD
LOAD
CLR WK
BUF

DO
LOAD

USER PREFS through CLR WK BUF — Allow you to include or

omit portions of the selected file before loading it into the
switcher.
DO LOAD — Displays the Confirm File Load Menu, which allows
you to DO LOAD or CANCEL.

3-135

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Save File Menu
The Save File Menu allows you to save selected portions of
E-MEM register data or Configuration data to disk.

SAVE FILE MENU
disk / save file

CURRENT DIRECTORY

TOTAL BYTES

/FLOPPY

8004

CONFIG

E-MEM
BANK

E-MEM
ALL

NO SAVE

SAVE

M/E 3

PGM PST
DSK

MISC/
BKGD

DPMs
1-4

MASTER
E-MEM

M/E 1

3-136

E-MEM
REGISTER

M/E 2

SAVE
SELECT

NAME
FILE >

Disk Menu

M/E 1 through MASTER E-MEM — Select portions of the E-MEM

register data or switcher Configuration data to be included or
omitted when saving it to disk.
SAVE SELECT — Selects the type of save to be done. The switcher

serial protocol for use with Editors has been enhanced to support
the transfer of E-MEM registers to and from an Editor. This allows
an Editor to save its decision list (E DL) together with the switcher
E-MEMs on one diskette. Refer to your Editors Operations
Manual to see if this feature is supported by your Editor.
REGISTER = — Selects a single register to be saved. When E-MEM
BANK is selected, 10 registers at a time can be saved. When E-MEM
ALL is selected, all 100 registers may be saved in one operation.
NAME FILE> — Displays the Name File Menu for you to name the
file(s) that you wish to create on the disk. For an E-MEM file, an
automatic extension is added to the file name on the disk (for
example, .R24 for register 24). If an E-MEM bank or if all E-MEM
registers are saved, a separate file is created on the disk for each
E-MEM register.

3-137

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

If CONFIG is selected in the Save File Menu, the menu looks like
this:

SAVE FILE MENU
disk / save file

CURRENT DIRECTORY

TOTAL BYTES

/FLOPPY

8004

CONFIG

E-MEM
REGISTER

E-MEM
BANK

NO SAVE

SAVE

USER
PREFS

SYSTEM
PARAMS

INPUTS

OUTPUTS

EXTERN
I/F

CLR WK
BUF

E-MEM
ALL

SAVE
SELECT

NAME
FILE >

USER PREFS through CLR WK BUF — Select portions of the

switcher Configuration data to be included or omitted when
saving it to disk.
NAME FILE> — Displays the Name File Menu which allows you to

name the file you wish to create on the disk. For a Configuration
file, an automatic extension of CFG is added to the file name on
the disk.

3-138

Disk Menu

Name File Menu
This menu is used to name files to be saved. It is similar to the
Name Inputs Menu described earlier in this section.

NAME FILE MENU

(

disk / save file / name file

)

String Register:
USER
a

Save
String

d e

m n

o p

w x

Get
String
A B C D E F G
G H I

K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

File Name:
WORKIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Character = G
CURSOR
BACK

ACCEPT
CHAR

CURSOR
FORWARD

DELETE
CHAR

SAVE
STRING

GET
STRING

ACCEPT
NAME

When ACCEPT NAME is pressed, the Confirm File Save Menu
comes up, allowing you to DO SAVE or CANCEL. If a file with the
same name already exists in the directory, you will be warned of
that fact and given a third alternative, OVER WRITE. This selection
will cause the new file to be written over the existing file, erasing
the existing file.

3-139

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

Utilities Menu
The Utilities Menu allows you to format disks and create
subdirectories for the purpose of organizing your saved files.

UTILITIES MENU
disk / utils
TOTAL BYTES

CURRENT DIRECTORY

DISK USAGE
KBYTES
USED

CREATE
DIR >

%
USED

KBYTES
AVAIL

%
AVAIL

FORMAT
720K >

FORMAT
1.44M >

FORMAT 720K> and FORMAT 1.44M> — Bring up the Confirm
Format Disk Menu which allows you to format a blank or
previously used disk in the appropriate format. The Confirm
Format Disk Menu allows you to DO FORMAT or CANCEL.

NOTE: Be sure to have the write-protect tab set to off (closed) to allow
writing to the disk.

3-140

Disk Menu

CREATE DIR> — Displays the Name Directory Menu, which

allows you to create subdirectories on the disk. This menu uses the
same format as the Name File Menu described earlier in this
section.
Pressing ACCEPT NAME allows you to DO CREATE or CANCEL. If
a directory with the same name already exists in the parent
directory, you will be warned of that fact and the Confirm Create
Directory Menu will allow you to RENAME or CANCEL.
To save files to a subdirectory, first create the subdirectory, then
have it open when you save the files that you wish to be in it. (To
open the subdirectory, select it with the FILE SELECT knob in the
next higher directory and press CHILD DIRECTORY.)

3-141

Section 3 — Menu Descriptions

3-142

Menu Trees

Introduction
Many Model 3000 features are accessed via software menus
displayed on a flat panel that can show both alphanumeric text
and graphics.

Main Menu Buttons

CONFG

M/E
MODE

STAT

KEYER

CHR
KEY

WIPE

E-MEM

KEY
FRAME

AUX
BUS

MASK

MATTE

FRAME
STORE

LAST
MENU

MISC

DISK

The menu system is divided into groups of related menus. Any
particular group of menus can be accessed by pressing one of the
main menu buttons located at the left of the menu display.
Each main menu button (except LAST MENU) brings up a main
menu, under which there may be sub-menus that allow selection
of less-frequently used options. (Some of the main menus contain
only one or two levels of sub-menus.)
Pressing a main menu button causes the soft button assignments
in the display to change specifically for that menu.

4-1

Section 4 — Menu Trees

Soft Buttons
The eight “soft” buttons located below the menu display allow
you to make function and sub-menu selections from menus
displayed on the screen. The symbol “>” following the name of a
soft button indicates that pressing that button will bring up a
lower-level menu.
A ninth button in the row is a dedicated EXIT button that allows
you to leave the menu you are in and return to the next higher
menu on the tree.

Menu Tree Structures
Tree-structure diagrams are presented on the following pages for
the main menu buttons.

4-2

LATCH
NORMAL
DSK DROP
KEY MEMORY
CLEAR KEY MEM

ON/OFF

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PGM PST

PVW SELECT
PVW MODE
DIM PVW
PUSH TO PVW

SHIFT MODE
KEYER PREFS
PREVIEW PREFS
BEEPER PREFS
DEFINE DEFAULTS
E-MEM PREFS

BEEPER ON/OFF
WARNING
END OF KNOB
KNOB CENTER
INACTIVE KNOB

SECTION SELECT
BUS SELECT
CLEAR XPT
CLEAR BUS
CLEAR SECTION
CLEAR SWITCHER

AUTO
LOOKAHEAD
PGM

PUSH TO PVW TIMEOUT

ON
OFF

RUN LEVER
KEYFRAME EDITING
MASTER E-MEM

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3

ENABLE/DISABLE
ENABLE/DISABLE
300 STYLE
NORMAL

4X3
16 X 9
ASPECT RATIO
FIELD DOMINANCE
MATTE GEN LIM
H–BLANKING DEFAULT
INTERNAL BLK LV
SET CLOCK

CONFG

USER PREFS
SYSTEM PARAMS
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
EXTERN I/F
AUX BUS FORMAT

START HORIZ BLANKING
END HORIZ BLANKING
SUPER BLACK OUTPUT

DIGITAL RES
EXT KEY SYNC
SETUP ON KEY
MAP INPUTS
CHR KEY INPUTS
GPI INPUTS

TOP TEST SIGNAL
BOTTOM TEST SIGNAL

XMITABLE
VALID RGB
BOTH
NONE
7.5 IRE
0 IRE

DATE
SELECT
CONFIRM

GROUP SELECT
CARD SELECT
INPUT ...
INPUT ...
INPUT ...
INPUT ...

VIDEO/KEY FMT
LOG/PHYS ASSIGN
NAME XPT BUTTON

TIME

INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT FORMAT

GPI SELECT
MISC
KF EFFECT
AUTO TRANS
CUT
E-MEM
FRAME STORE
PROGRAM GPI

Software Version 5.3

3 M/E Switcher =

YEAR
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
SECOND

1 TO 8
9 TO 16
Card ...
8 BIT
10 BIT

1 TO 8
9 TO 16
Card ...

NO SETUP
KEY SETUP

UNSHAPED VIDEO
SHAPED VIDEO
LOG CHANNEL
PHYS INPUTS

VIDEO INPUT
KEY INPUT
CHROMA KEY INPUT

See CONFIG Part 2

ALL KEYERS
DELEG KEYER
OFF

A
B
KEY1
KEY2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF

M/E SELECT
GVG DEFAULT
SET DEFAULT

FIELD 1
FIELD 2
NONE

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
DSK
AUX
MASK

0754#1

Menu Tree Structures

VIDEO GRAB
KEY GRAB
MASK GRAB

Card ...

AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

MANUAL TIME FOR INPUT ...

CURSOR BACK
ACCEPT CHAR
CURSOR FORWRD
DELETE CHAR
SAVE STRING
or
GET STRING
ACCEPT NAME

DO SAVE
CANCEL
OVER WRITE
RENAME
CANCEL

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PGM PST
DSK 1 TITLE
DSK 2 TITLE
PGM PST BLACK

COARSE
FINE

RGB
BETA
YUV
GPI 1 — GPI 8
AUX TALLY
LOG CHAN TALLY
DISABLE GPI

1 TO 8
9 TO 16

GROUP SELECT
CARD SELECT
INPUT ...
INPUT ...
INPUT ...
INPUT ...

RUN
REWIND
AUTO RUN
REVERSE

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PGM PST
DSK 1
DSK 2
M/E 1 RECALL
M/E 2 RECALL
M/E 3 RECALL
MSTR RECALL
AUTO RECALL
EFX DISSOLV
SEQUENCE

Figure 4-1. CONFG Menu Tree (Part 1)
4-3

Section 4 — Menu Trees

See CONFIG Part 1

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SHAPED
UNSHAPED

OUTPUT SELECT
SUPER BLACK
SETUP ON KEY
VIDEO/KEY FMT
LIMITER
DIGITAL RES
OUTPUT TIMING

CONFG

USER PREFS
SYSTEM PARAMS
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
EXTERN I/F
AUX BUS FORMAT

0754#2

PGM
M/E 1 PGM
M/E 2 PGM
M/E 3 PGM
AUX BUS 1
AUX BUS 2
AUX BUS 3
AUX BUS 4
AUX BUS 5
AUX BUS 6
AUX BUS 7
FRAME STORE

ON
OFF
GROUP SELECT
CARD SELECT
M/E 1 PVW
M/E 2 PVW
M/E 3 PVW
DSK PVW

LUM CLIP
CHROMA CLIP
COMPOSITE CLIP
BLACK CLIP

RESTORE DEFAULT
OUTPUT TIMING OFFSET
BAUD
PARITY

EDITOR I/F
DPM I/F
PERIPH I/F
GPI OUTPUTS

4 TO 10
11 TO 17
A ...
8 BIT
10 BIT

2400
4800
9600
19200
38400

KSCOPE
KRYSTAL
OTHER
NONE

ODD
EVEN
NONE

SWR IN
SWR OUT
BOTH
OFF

DEVICE SELECT
DPM TYPE
CHANNEL ROUTING
DPM MAP AUX BUS
DPM MAP INPUTS

EFF SEND DELAY
CONTROL DELAY

BAUD
PARITY
PERIPH TRIGGERS

DEVICE SELECT

2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
ODD
EVEN
NONE
TRIGGER SELECT
FIRE ...
DEVICE NUMBER
FUNCTN NUMBER

PGM CUT TRIGGER
SELECT GPI
E-MEM LEVEL
AUX BUS 1B
AUX BUS 2B
AUX BUS 3B
AUX BUS 4B
AUX BUS 5B
AUX BUS 6B
AUX BUS 7B

Software Version 5.3

GPI LENGTH

OFF
GPI 1 — 8
1—8
MISC
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4

VIDEO
KEY

3 M/E Switcher =

Figure 4-2. CONFG Menu Tree (Part 2)

4-4

DEVICE 1
DEVICE 2
DEVICE 3
DEVICE 4

NO. OF CHANNELS
CHAN 1 = AUX ...

DPM SELECT
CHANNEL SELECT

VIDEO INPUT
KEY INPUT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

MISC
PHYS CHAN
DEVICE 1
DEVICE 2
DEVICE 3
DEVICE 4
DEVICE 1
DEVICE 2
DEVICE 3
DEVICE 4
CHAN A
CHAN B
CHAN C
CHAN D
CHAN E
CHAN F
CHAN G
CHAN H
SECONDARY

CHAN 1-8
AUX 1-7

Menu Tree Structures

M/E SELECT
M/E MODE
FULL ADD MIX
M/E COPY

M/E
MODE

LAYERED
STANDARD
ON
OFF

TP0754-25

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3

KEY 1 OPACITY
KEY 2 OPACITY
KEY A OPACITY
KEY B OPACITY

FROM M/E
TO M/E
DO M/E SWAP
DO M/E COPY

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3

Software Version 5.3

Figure 4-3. M/E MODE Menu Tree

STAT

SYSTEM LOG
INSTALL INFO
DIAGS

TP0754-26

PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
FIRST PAGE
LAST PAGE
CLEAR LOG

MAIN BOARDS
UPPER BOARDS
LOWER BOARDS

BLANKING PROCESSOR

Software Version 5.3

CHOP
ON
OFF

Figure 4-4. STAT Menu Tree

4-5

Section 4 — Menu Trees

KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB
ON
OFF
AUTO

KEYER

M/E SELECT
KEYER SELECT
SHAPING
CHROMA TRAP
KEYER COPY
CALIBRATE
VIDEO PROCESS
KEY 1 NAM

TP0754-27

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
DSK
H KEY POSITION

OPACITY

M/E SELECT
KEYER SELECT
CHROMA TRAP
FILTER TYPE

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PGM PST

KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB

ON
OFF
AUTO
LP - SOFT
LP - HARD
BS - SOFT
BS - HARD
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
DSK

FROM GROUP
FROM KEYER
WIPES
TO GROUP
TO KEYER
DO KEYER SWAP
DO KEYER COPY

EXCLUDE
INCLUDE
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
DSK
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PGM PST

M/E SELECT
BUS SELECT
VIDEO PROCESS
CORING
RESTORE DEFAULTS

KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB

KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB
KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB

ON
OFF

LUM GAIN
CHROMA GAIN
DC OFFSET

ON
OFF

CORING

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
M/E SELECT
NAM K2 INTO K1
RESTORE DEFAULTS

Software Version 5.3

Figure 4-5. KEYER Menu Tree
4-6

ON
OFF

NAM SOFTNESS
NAM OFFSET

Menu Tree Structures

TP0754-28

M/E 1 KEY1
M/E 1 KEY2
M/E 2 KEY1
M/E 2 KEY2
M/E 3 KEY 1
M/E 3 KEY 2

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

CHR
KEY

CHR KEY SELECT
FOREGROUND VIDEO
BACKGROUND VIDEO
FOREGROUND CORING
SECONDARY COLOR
HUE MODS
KEY ADJUST
SETUP

VARIABLE
FIXED
OFF

FOREGROUND CORING
SHADOW GAIN

SHADOW CLIP

CHR KEY SELECT
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS

M/E 1 KEY1
M/E 1 KEY2
M/E 2 KEY1
M/E 2 KEY2
M/E 3 KEY 1
M/E 3 KEY 2
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS ANGLE
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS SELECTIVITY
SEC CHROMA SUPPRESS LEVEL

M/E 1 KEY1
M/E 1 KEY2
M/E 2 KEY1
M/E 2 KEY2
M/E 3 KEY 1
M/E 3 KEY 2
CHR KEY SELECT
SEP HUE SUPPRESS
FLARE SUPPRESS
HUE SUPPRESS OFFSET

ON
OFF

SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS

ON
OFF

FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS

ON
OFF

HUE SUPPRESS OFFSET

M/E 1 KEY1
M/E 1 KEY2
M/E 2 KEY1
M/E 2 KEY2
M/E 3 KEY 1
M/E 3 KEY 2
CHR KEY SELECT
KEY WIDTH
KEY SOFTNESS
FGD RESHAPING

Software Version 5.3
CHR KEY SELECT
AUTO SETUP

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

KEY WIDTH

ON
OFF

HORIZ KEY POSITION

KEY SOFTNESS

M/E 1 KEY1
M/E 1 KEY2
M/E 2 KEY1
M/E 2 KEY2
M/E 3 KEY 1
M/E 3 KEY 2

Figure 4-6. CHR KEY Menu Tree
4-7

M/E 1 PRI
M/E 1 SEC
M/E 2 PRI
M/E 2 SEC
M/E 3 PRI
M/E 3 SEC

WIPE

PATTERN
TEXTURE
WIPE MODS
WIPE COPY

WIPE GEN SELECT
HORIZ STRETCH
VERT MODE
FILTER MODE
LENGTH A
LENGTH B
SOURCE

WIPE GEN SEL
PTN MIX TYPE
PTN MIX SOURCE
SPLIT OFFSET
PST PTN DIRECTION
WIPE MODULATE

TP0754-29

Section 4 — Menu Trees

PATTERN SELECT
M/E1 PRI
M/E1 SEC
M/E2 PRI
M/E2 SEC
M/E 3 PRI
M/E 3 SEC
1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1
1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1, FREE RUN
SMOOTHING
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
NOTCH
1, 2, 3, 4
NONE
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

M/E1 PRI
M/E1 SEC
M/E2 PRI
M/E2 SEC
M/E 3 PRI
M/E 3 SEC

NAM+
NAMMIX
NORMAL
TEXTURE
ON
OFF

SPLIT OFFSET

REVERSE
NORMAL

WIPE GEN SELECT
MODULATE
MODULATE WAVEFORM

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
FROM GROUP
FROM WIPE GEN
TO GROUP
TO WIPE GEN
DO WIPE SWAP
DO WIPE COPY

Software Version 5.3

PRI
SEC
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PRI
SEC

Figure 4-7. WIPE Menu Tree

4-8

M/E1 PRI
M/E1 SEC
M/E2 PRI
M/E2 SEC
M/E 3 PRI
M/E 3 SEC
LOCK
HORIZ
VERT
OFF
TRIANGLE
SINE

MODULATION AMPLITUDE
MODULATION FREQUENCY

Menu Tree Structures

TP0754-30

SELECT
ALL
BANK
REG

CLEAR REG
LOCK REG
CLEAR SEQ
LOCK / UNLOCK / CLEAR
LOCK / UNLOCK / CLEAR
LOCK / UNLOCK / CLEAR

CLEAR ALL HOLDS
ALL HOLD
SOURCE HOLD

ON
OFF

BUS
CLEAR ALL
SET ALL
DEVICE (##)

ON
OFF

DEVICE NUMBER

E-MEM

ENABLE
DISABLE
SELECT LEVEL
PAUSE
SELECT GROUP
PATH TYPE

SELECT PERIPH
ATTACH PERIPH
FIRE (A–H)
FIRE ATTACHED
SELECT GPI
ATTACH GPI
FIRE (1–8)
FIRE ATTACHED

ON
OFF
TRANSITION
KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB
WIPES
WIPEXFORM
ALL

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
PGM PST
DSK
MISC
BKGD
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4

HOLD
LINEAR
S-LINEAR
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H
MISC
OFF
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
MISC
OFF

Software Version 5.3

Figure 4-8. E-MEM Menu Tree
4-9

DELEGATES / ENABLES
TIME ALIGN LEVELS
SET START TIME
TIME KNOB SELECT
ZOOM

M/E 1
M/E 2
PGM PST
DSK
MISC
BKGD
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
RUN
RUN DEL
START
KF
EFF DUR

M/E 1
M/E 2
PGM PST
DSK
MISC
BKGD
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
SELECT LEVEL
SELECT GROUP
PATH TYPE

KEY
FRAME

TIMELINE
KF PATHS
KEYFRAME EDITING
RUN LEVER
MOD ALL ABSOLUTE
ENABLE BUTTONS
ATTACH GPI
ATTACH TRIGGER

ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE
DELEGATES
ENABLES

SELECT GPI
ATTACH
FIRE GPI (1-8)
FIRE ATTACHED

TRANSISTION
KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB
WIPES
WIPEXFORM
ALL
HOLD
LINEAR
S-LINEAR
CURVE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF

TRIGGER SELECT
ATTACH
FIRE (A-H)
FIRE ATTACHED

Software Version 5.3

Figure 4-9. KEYFRAME Menu Tree

4-10

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
ON
OFF

TP0764-00

Section 4 — Menu Trees

PVW BUS
MASK BUS
AUX BUS 1 – 7

BUS SELECT
EFF LOOP MODE
E-MEM CONTROL
NEAR SIDE
FAR SIDE
BOTH
TAKE

AUX
BUS

TP0754-32

Menu Tree Structures

NO LOOP
EXT LOOP
FRAME STORE

VIDEO
KEY

Software Version 5.3

M/E1 KEY1
M/E1 KEY2
M/E2 KEY1
M/E2 KEY2
M/E3 KEY1
M/E3 KEY2

MASK

Software Version 5.3

KEYER SELECT
INH MASK OPACITY
MASK BUS CHR TRAP

ON
OFF

TP0754-33

Figure 4-10. AUX BUS Menu Tree

INHIBIT MASK OPACITY

ON
OFF

3 M/E Switcher Only

Figure 4-11. MASK Menu Tree

4-11

TP0754-34

Section 4 — Menu Trees

SUPERBLACK
NORMAL

MATTE

BKGD 1 LUM
BKGD 2 LUM
USER DEF WASH ANGLE
MATTE COPY
TEXTURE

SUPERBLACK
NORMAL
ON
OFF

WASH ANGLE

FROM GROUP
FROM MATTE GEN
SIDE SELECT
TO GROUP
TO MATTE GEN
DO MATTE SWAP
DO MATTE COPY

HORIZ STRETCH
VERT MODE
FILTER MODE
LENGTH A
LENGTH B
SOURCE

KEY 1 FILL
KEY BORD
KEY 2 FILL
KEY 2 BORD
PRI WIPE
SEC WIPE

KEY 1 FILL
KEY 1 BORD
KEY 2 FILL
KEY 2 BORD
PRI WIPE
SEC WIPE
1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1
1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1, FREE RUN
SMOOTHING
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
NOTCH
1, 2, 3, 4
NONE
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Software Version 5.3

Figure 4-12. MATTE Menu Tree

4-12

M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
DSK
BKGD

2 TO 1
1 TO 2
MATTE 2
MATTE 1
BOTH
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
DSK
BKGD

Menu Tree Structures

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

FRAME
STORE

DRP SHADOW BLUR
LOCK VIDEO/KEY
KEY STORE MODE
PICTURE PROCESS
PARAM COPY
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
MASK STORE

VIDEO
KEY

See
Part 2

SHADOW BLUR
SHADOW BLUR SYMMETRY

PROCESS
FROM STORE
FROM PAGE
TO STORE
TO PAGE
DO SWAP
DO COPY

FROM STORE
TO STORE
DO SWAP
DO COPY

TP0754-35

DECODE
COMPRESS
FILTER
BEVEL
COPY
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE

Software Version 5.3

Figure 4-13. FRAME STORE Menu Tree (Part 1)

4-13

TP0754-36

Section 4 — Menu Trees

4 FIELD
2 FIELD
ON
OFF
See
Part 1

ON
OFF

STROBE TIME PERIOD
FRAME TYPE
STROBE
MOSAIC
PSEUDO COLOR
CROP
REPOSITION
FILTER

FRAME
STORE

ON
OFF

PAGE SELECT

DRP SHADOW BLUR
LOCK VIDEO/KEY
KEY STORE MODE
PICTURE COPY
PARAM COPY
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
MASK STORE

STROBE FREEZE PERIOD

POSTRSOLR
HUE MOD
COLOR MOD
CONTRAST

ON
OFF

MOSAIC
MOSAIC SIZE

MOSAIC ASPECT

POSTERIZATION
HUE MOD START PHASE
HUE MOD END PHASE
HUE MOD SATURATION
BLACK HUE
BLACK SAT
BLACK BRIGHT

FIRST ACTIVE PIXEL
REVERSE VIDEO
UNSHAPE/RESHAPE
MODE SELECT
POSTERIZE / HUE MOD
/ COLOR MOD / CONTRAST
SOLARIZE / HUE MOD PATH
BLK/WHT DELEGATE
ON
OFF

CROP

ON
OFF

SOLARIZATION

ON
OFF
CW
CCW

TOP
BOTTOM
LEFT
RIGHT

BLACK / WHITE HUE
BLACK / WHITE SAT
BLACK / WHITE BRIGHT

HORIZONTAL POSITION
VERTICAL POSITION
PIXEL DETENT
RESTORE DEFAULTS

ON
OFF

COARSE ADJUST HORIZ
FINE ADJUST HORIZONTAL

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

COARSE ADJUST VERTICAL
FINE ADJUST VERTICAL

FILTER SELECT
BLUR
SEPARATE LUM / CHROMA
BLUR SYMMETRY

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

BLUR
CHROMA BLUR
BLURE SEMETRY

FILTER SELECT
HUE ROTATE

ON
OFF

HUE ANGLE

LUM BLUR

4 FIELD
2 FIELD
ON
OFF
FRAME TYPE
STROBE
CROP
REPOSITION
FILTER

PAGE SELECT
STROBE TIME PERIOD
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD

CROP

HORIZONTAL POSITION
VERTICAL POSITION
PIXEL DETENT
RESTORE DEFAULTS

BLUR
BLUR SYMMETRY

Software Version 5.3

DRAW
DRAW MODE
SAVE
SOFTEN
FILL SHAPE
BLACK SCREEN
WHITE SCREEN
UNDO

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

COARSE ADJUST HORIZ
FINE ADJUST HORIZONTAL

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

COARSE ADJUST VERTICAL
FINE ADJUST VERTICAL

ON
OFF
STRAIGHT
FREEHAND

BRUSH SOURCE
BRUSH OPACITY
BRUSH SIZE
BRUSH SOFTNESS

Figure 4-14. FRAME STORE Menu Tree (Part 2)

4-14

TOP
BOTTOM
LEFT
RIGHT

BLUR
BLUR SYMMETRY

Menu Tree Structures

MISC

SIGNAL PROCESS
SAFE TITLE
SAFE TITLE
SAFE TITLE SELECT

Software Version 5.3

ON
OFF

TP0754-37

FINELINE
DITHER

OFF
FREE RUN
FRAME LOCK
ON
OFF
SAFE TITLE —
SCREEN CTR
TITLE & CTR
X-HATCH

SAFE TITLE H-POSITION

(CFG FILE SELECTED)
USER PREFS
SYSTEM PARAMS
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
EXTERN I/F
DO LOAD

(E-MEM FILE SELECTED)
ME 1
ME 2
ME 3
PGM-PST DSK
MISC
BKGD
DPMs 1-4
DO LOAD

LOAD
NO LOAD

USER PREFS
SYSTEM PARAMS
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
EXTERN I/F
CLR WK BUF
NAME FILE

(E-MEM FILE SELECTED)

DISK

LIST DIRECTORY
PARENT / CHILD DIRECTORY
LOAD FILE
SAVE FILE
MARK FILE FOR DELETE
DELETE FILE
UTILS

FILE SELECT
VIEW BY DIR / NAME / EXT

SAVE SELECT

(CFG FILE SELECTED)

E-MEM LOAD SELECT

ME 1
ME 2
ME 3
PGM-PST DSK
MISC
BKGD
DPMs 1-4
NAME FILE

LOAD/NO LOAD

TP0754-38

Figure 4-15. MISC Menu Tree

SAVE
NO SAVE

SAVE/NO SAVE

SAVE SELECT

CURSOR BACK
ACCEPT CHAR
CURSOR FORWRD
DELETE CHAR
SAVE STRING
GET STRING
ACCEPT NAME

DO SAVE
CANCEL
or
OVER WRITE
RENAME
CANCEL

DO DELETE
CANCEL

CREATE DIR
FORMAT 720K
FORMAT 1.44M

CURSOR BACK
ACCEPT CHAR
CURSOR FORWRD
DELETE CHAR
SAVE STRING
GET STRING
ACCEPT NAME
DO FORMAT
CANCEL

Software Version 5.3

DO CREATE
CANCEL
or
RENAME
CANCEL

Figure 4-16. DISK Menu Tree

4-15

Section 4 — Menu Trees

4-16

Index

Symbols
+/– button (Master E-MEM) 2-71
• (dot) button (Master E-MEM) 2-68
“NO REG” message 2-25

Numerics
300 Mode Operation (3-M/E Only) 3-15

A
Analog 10-bit Composite Quad Input
Module 1-8
ASPCT button 2-95
ASPECT knob 2-95
Auto Delegation 2-4
Auto Preview (Key) 2-41
AUTO RCL button 2-59
AUTO RCL Master E-MEM button 2-59
AUTO RUN Master E-MEM button 2-59
AUTO SELECT KEY button 2-38
Auto Setup 1-18
AUTO TRAN button 2-20, 2-21
Auto Trans 2-14
AUX 1-4 EFFECTS SEND ONLY buttons
2-15, 2-113
Aux Bus
crosspoints 2-112
Delegation 2-114

Format Menu 3-42
Menu 3-92
Menu Tree 4-11
Aux Remote Panel 2-121
Chop Mode 2-123
Joystick Override 2-123
Operation 2-123
Rear Panel Switches 2-123
Auxiliary Bus Control Panels 1-18

B
Background
background buses 1-13
Background Mattes 2-45
BKGD 1 and BKGD 2 LEDs 2-45
BKGD 1, BKGD 2 (mattes) 2-45
BKGD A button 2-16, 2-17
BKGD B button 2-17
BKGD button 2-17
BKGD Master E-MEM Enable button
2-58
BKGD SUPR button (chroma key) 2-49
BKGD SUPR CHROMA knob 2-50
BKGD SUPR LUM knob 2-50
Bank
BANK 0 button 2-28
BANK 0 button (Master E-MEM) 2-64
BANK 1 button 2-28
BANK 1 button (Master E-MEM) 2-64
BANK Button 2-63
Index-1

Index

BANK button 2-27
BANK button (Master E-MEM) 2-63
Beeper Prefs Menu 3-10
BLACK Crosspoint 2-19
Blanking Menu 3-51
BORD button 2-40, 2-95
Borderline
BORD button 2-40
Controls 2-40
EXTD button 2-40
Key Edge Generator 1-16
NORM button 2-40
OPACITY knob 2-41
OUTLINE button 2-41
SHDW button 2-40
SIZE/POS knob 2-41
BOTTOM/CLIP knob (mask) 2-101
BOTTOM/CLIP Mask Knob 2-102
BOX button 2-100
BRIGHTNESS knob 2-47
Bus Delegate buttons, PVW/MASK/AUX
2-114
Button Flashing 2-12
Buttons
• (dot) button (Master E-MEM) 2-68
ASPCT 2-95
AUTO RCL 2-59
AUTO RUN 2-59
AUTO SELECT KEY 2-38
AUTO TRAN 2-20, 2-21
Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only 2-113
Aux Bus Crosspoints 2-112
Aux Bus Selection 2-114
BANK 2-27
BANK (Master E-MEM) 2-63
BANK 0 2-28
BANK 0 (Master E-MEM) 2-64
BANK 1 2-28
BANK 1 (Master E-MEM) 2-64
BKGD 2-17
BKGD (Master E-MEM) 2-58
Index-2

BKGD A 2-16, 2-17
BKGD B 2-17
BKGD SUPR 2-49
BLACK Crosspoint 2-19
BORD 2-40, 2-95
BOX 2-100
Bus Delegate 2-114
CHR KEY 2-36
CLEAR WORK BUFR 2-72
CONST DUR 2-82
COPY 2-81
Crosspoint Shift Lock 2-11
CTR 2-91
CUT 2-20
CUT (Master E-MEM) 2-81
DPM 2-109
DPM 1 - DPM 4 (Master E-MEM) 2-59
DROP SHDW 2-107
DSK (Master E-MEM) 2-58
DSK (Preview) 2-54
DSK 1 2-17
DSK 1 CUT 2-22
DSK 1 MIX 2-22
DSK 2 2-17
DSK 2 CUT 2-22
DSK 2 MIX 2-22
EDIT 2-108
EFF DIS 2-29
EFF DIS (Master E-MEM) 2-66
EFF DUR 2-86
ENTER 2-28
ENTER (Master E-MEM) 2-64
EXTD 2-40
External Interface 2-108
FIELD 1 2-105
FIELD 2 2-105
FLAT MATTE 2-45
FLIP FLOP 2-97
FORCE MASK 2-42, 2-100
FRZE 2-105
GET 2-74

Index

GO TO KF 2-87
GO TO TIME 2-86
GPI 2-109
GRAB 2-105
H MULTI 2-98
HOLD INPUT 2-88
INH MASK 2-42, 2-100
INSRT AFTER 2-80
INSRT BEFOR 2-79
INV 2-39
KEY 1 2-16
KEY 1 CUT 2-22
KEY 1 MIX 2-22
KEY 2 2-16
KEY 2 CUT 2-22
KEY 2 MIX 2-22
KEY OVER 2-39
KEY PRIOR 2-16
KEY STORE 2-104
LEARN USER WIPE 2-94
LIN KEY 2-35
LOCK 2-27
LOCK (Master E-MEM) 2-64
LRN 2-27
LRN (Master E-MEM) 2-63
LUM KEY 2-35
M/E 1 - M/E 3 Preview 2-54
M/E 1, M/E 2, M/E 3 (Master E-MEM)
2-58
MARK 2-87
MARK BLOCK 2-87
MARK CURSR 2-76
MASK BUS 2-101
Mask Bus Crosspoints 2-112
Mask Bus Selection 2-114
Mask Delegation 2-99
MASK INV 2-102
MASK STORE 2-101, 2-104
MATTE 2 2-45
MATTE FILL 2-37
MATTE SEL 2-44

MENU 2-93
MISC (Master E-MEM) 2-58
MIX 2-17
MOD 2-83
NEXT 2-86
NORM 2-40, 2-97
OUTLINE 2-41
PASTE 2-81
PATT MIX 2-97
Pattern Modifiers 2-98
Pattern Select 2-93
PERPH 2-109
PGM PST (Master E-MEM) 2-58
POS AUTO 2-98
POS NORM 2-98
Positioner Buttons 2-98
PREV 2-86
Preview Bus Crosspoints 2-112
Preview Bus Selection 2-114
Preview Only 2-113
PRI PST PTTN 2-36
PRI WIPE 2-100
PRI WIPE WASH 2-46
Primary Crosspoints 2-10
PST BLK 2-17
PUT 2-75
PVW 2-114
PVW PRI 2-53
RANDOM 2-93
Re-entry Crosspoints 2-13
Remote Aux Panel 2-121
REV 2-89, 2-97
REWIND 2-89
ROT MAG 2-96
ROT POS 2-96
ROT SPD 2-96
Rotation Type 2-96
RUN 2-32, 2-88
SEC PST PTTN 2-37
SEC WIPE 2-100
SEC WIPE WASH 2-46
Index-3

Index

SEQ 2-28
SEQ (Master E-MEM) 2-64
SHDW 2-40
SHDW ON 2-49
SHIFT 2-11
SHOW KEY 2-39
SOFT 2-94
SPLIT 2-98
STOP NEXT KF 2-88
TEXTURE 2-93
TIME CURSR 2-76
TRAN RATE 2-31
TRAN RATE button 2-69
UNDO (•) 2-30, 2-31
UNDO button (Master E-MEM) 2-68
USER DEF WASH 2-46
USER WIPE UNDO 2-94
V MULTI 2-98
VIDEO FILL 2-37
VIDEO KEY 2-38
VIDEO STORE 2-104
WIPE 2-17
Wipe Delegation 2-93
Wipe Direction 2-97

C
Channel
Key 2-103
Mask 2-103
Video 2-103
Chop mode (Remote Aux) 2-123
Chroma Key
BKGD SUPR button 2-49
BKGD SUPR CHROMA knob 2-50
BKGD SUPR LUM 2-50
CHR KEY button 2-36
CHR KEY Menu Tree 4-7
Chroma Key Adjust Menu 3-64

Index-4

Chroma Key Auto Setup 1-18
Chroma Key Hue Modifiers Menu 362
Chroma Key Inputs Menu 3-26
Chroma Key Menu 3-59
Chroma Key Secondary Color Menu
3-61
Chroma Keyers Subpanel 2-48
CHROMA knob, CK BKGD SUPR 2-50
Delegation 2-49
HUE knob 2-49
Operation 2-50
SELECTIVITY knob 2-49
SHADOW OPACITY knob 2-49
SHDW ON button 2-49
Chroma Trap Menu 3-54
Clear Key Memory Menu 3-7
CLEAR WORK BUFR button (Master EMEM) 2-72
CLIP and GAIN knobs (key) 2-35
CLIP knob (mask) 2-101
CONFG Menu Tree 4-3
Configuration Menu 3-4
CONST DUR button (Master E-MEM) 277, 2-82
Control Panel 1-6, 2-1
COPY button (Master E-MEM) 2-81
Crosspoint(s)
Flashing 2-12
Matrix 1-12
Name Displays 2-111
Override 2-26
Override (E-MEM) 2-61
Primary 2-10
pushbuttons 2-9
PVW AUX 2-112
Re-entry 2-13
CTR button 2-91
Current Keyframe (Master E-MEM) 2-76
Current Register, E-MEM 2-72

Index

Current Time (Master E-MEM) 2-76
Current Working Buffer 2-79
Cut 2-14
CUT button 2-22
CUT button (Master E-MEM) 2-81

D
Define Defaults Menu 3-11
Definitions
Effects 2-56
Keyframe 2-56
Delegation 2-4, 2-7
Chroma Keyer 2-49
Keyer 2-34
Mask 2-99
MASK bus 2-114
Mattes 2-44
PVW/MASK/AUX buses 2-114
Description
Functional 1-12
Options 1-16
Physical 1-4
Signal Processor 1-4
Diagnostics Menu 3-50
Digital Bit-Parallel Quad Input Module 1-8
Digital Bit-Serial Quad Input Module 1-8
Disk
DISK Menu 3-131
DISK Menu Tree 4-15
Floppy Drive 2-110
DPM
DPM 1 - DPM 4 Master E-MEM
buttons 2-59
DPM button, External I/F 2-109
DPM KScope Sources Menu 3-36
DPM Map Inputs Menu 3-38
DPM Setup Menu 3-34
DROP SHDW button 2-107
Dropshadows, Key 2-107
DSK
DSK (Master E-MEM) button 2-58

DSK 1 button, DSK 2 button 2-17
DSK 1 CUT button 2-22
DSK 1 MIX button 2-22
DSK 2 CUT button 2-22
DSK 2 MIX button 2-22
DSK Preview button 2-54
Dual Chroma Keyer 1-12, 1-16

E
EDIT Button 2-108
editor interface 1-13
Editor Interface Menu 3-33
EFF DUR button (Master E-MEM) 2-86
EFF Send indicator 2-15
Effect Editing Controls 2-72
Effects
Definition 2-56
Effects Dissolve 2-66
EFF DIS button 2-29
EFF DIS button (Master E-MEM) 2-66
Effects Editing
CLEAR WORK BUFR button 2-72
CONST DUR button 2-77, 2-82
Controls 2-72
COPY button 2-81
Current Keyframe 2-76
Current Time 2-76
CUT button 2-81
EFF DUR button 2-86
GET button 2-74
GO TO KF button 2-87
GO TO TIME button 2-86
HOLD INPUT button 2-88
INSRT AFTER button 2-80
INSRT BEFOR button 2-79
MARK BLOCK button 2-87
MARK button 2-87
MARK CURSR button 2-76
Master Timeline 2-76
Master Timeline Keyframe 2-76
MOD button 2-83
Index-5

Index

NEXT button 2-86
PASTE button 2-81
PREV button 2-86
PUT button 2-75
REV button 2-89
REWIND button 2-89
RUN button 2-88
Run Controls 2-88
STOP NEXT KF button 2-88
TIME CURSR button 2-76
Timeline 2-76
Effects Loop Crosspoints 1-12
Effects Looping 2-115
Effects Memory Subpanel, Master 2-55
Effects Memory Subpanel, Mix/Effects 224
Effects Send 1-17
EFFECTS SEND ONLY buttons 2-15,
2-113
Frame Store Looping Mode 2-118
Looping Mode 2-117
Non-Looping Mode 2-119
Operation 2-115
Outputs 1-13
Effects, E-MEM 2-56
Effects, Learning (Master E-MEM) 2-60
Effects, Recalling (Master E-MEM) 2-61
E-MEM
E-MEM Menu 3-73
E-MEM Menu Tree 4-9
E-MEM Register Menu 3-75
E-MEM Registers 2-25
E-MEM (Master)
+/– button 2-71
• (dot) button 2-68
AUTO RCL button 2-59
AUTO RUN button 2-59
Bank 2-63
BANK 0 button 2-64
BANK 1 button 2-64
BANK button 2-63
Index-6

BKGD Enable button 2-58
button, PGM/PST 2-58
CLEAR WORK BUFR button 2-72
CONST DUR button 2-77, 2-82
COPY button 2-81
Crosspoint Override 2-61
Current Keyframe 2-76
Current Register 2-72
Current Time 2-76
CUT button 2-81
DPM 1 - DPM 4 buttons 2-59
DSK button 2-58
EFF DIS button 2-66
EFF DUR button 2-86
ENABL ALL button 2-57
Enable buttons 2-57
ENTER button 2-64
GET button 2-74
GO TO KF button 2-87
GO TO TIME button 2-86
HOLD INPUT button 2-88
INSRT AFTER button 2-80
INSRT BEFOR button 2-79
Keypad 2-62
Learning Effects 2-60
LOCK button 2-64
LRN button 2-60, 2-63
M/E 1, M/E 2, M/E 3 buttons 2-58
MARK BLOCK button 2-87
MARK button 2-87
MARK CURSR button 2-76
Master Timeline 2-76
Master Timeline Keyframe 2-76
MISC button 2-58
MOD button 2-83
NEXT button 2-86
PASTE button 2-81
PREV button 2-86
PUT button 2-75
Readout 2-62
Recalling Effects 2-61

Index

Registers 2-56
REV button 2-89
REWIND button 2-89
RUN button 2-88
Run Controls 2-88
SEQ button 2-64
STOP NEXT KF button 2-88
TIME CURSR button 2-76
Timeline 2-76
TRAN RATE button 2-69
UNDO button 2-68
E-MEM Readout (M/E) 2-27
ENABL ALL Master E-MEM button 2-57
Enable buttons, E-MEM 2-57
ENTER button 2-28
ENTER button (Master E-MEM) 2-64
EXTD (extrude) button 2-40
External Interface
DPM button 2-109
EDIT button 2-108
GPI button 2-109
Menu 3-32
PERPH button 2-109
Subpanel 2-108
External Key Sync Menu 3-21

F
fader arm 2-14, 2-20
Features 1-2, 1-3
Optional 1-3
Standard 1-2
FIELD 1 button 2-105
FIELD 2 button 2-105
Flashing Crosspoint 2-12
FLIP FLOP button 2-97
Floppy Disk Drive 2-110
FORCE MASK and INH MASK buttons 242

FORCE MASK button 2-100
Frame Store 1-17
FIELD 1 button 2-105
FIELD 2 button 2-105
FRAME TYPE button 2-106
FRZE button 2-105
GRAB button 2-105
Input Selection 2-103
INTERPOLATE mode 2-106
KEY STORE button 2-104
Looping Mode 2-118
MASK STORE button 2-104
Menu 3-98
Menu Tree 4-13
Option 1-13
REPLICATE mode 2-106
Routing Outputs 2-104
Still Image Storage 2-104
Subpanel 2-103
VIDEO STORE button 2-104
FRZE button 2-105
Functional Description 1-12

G
GAIN and CLIP knobs (key) 2-35
GAIN knob 2-35
GAIN knob, mask 2-101
General Description 1-1
GET button 2-74
GO TO KF button (Master E-MEM) 2-87
GO TO TIME button (Master E-MEM) 2-86
GPI
GPI Button 2-109
GPI Inputs Menu 3-27
GPI Outputs Menu 3-41
Inputs 1-13
GRAB button 2-105

Index-7

Index

H
H MULTI button 2-98
H POSITION knob (key dropshadow) 2107
Head-Of-State 1-4
HOLD INPUT button 2-88
HOS 1-4
HUE knob (chroma key) 2-49
HUE/SOFTNESS knob (matte) 2-47

I
Indicators
BKGD 1 and BKGD 2 2-45
Crosspoint Name Displays 2-111
EFF Send 2-15
E-MEM Readout (M/E) 2-27
K1 BORD and K2 BORD 2-44
K1 FILL and K2 FILL 2-44
Key Delegation (KEY 1 and KEY 2) 213
Key ON 2-15
Key OVER 2-16
LAYERED 2-16
MATTE SEL 2-44
OVER 2-39
PRI WIPE 2-44
Readout, Master E-MEM 2-62
SEC WIPE 2-45
Transition Rate 2-21
Uncal 2-13
INH MASK and FORCE MASK 2-42
INH MASK button 2-100
Input Digital Resolution Menu 3-20
Input Module Options
Analog 10-bit Composite Quad 1-8
Digital Bit-Parallel Quad 1-8
Digital Bit-Serial Quad 1-8
RGB 1-8

Index-8

Input Selection, Frame Store 2-103
Inputs 2-10
Key 1-8
Menu 3-19
Video 1-8
INSRT AFTER (Master E-MEM) 2-80
INSRT BEFOR (Master E-MEM) 2-79
Installation Information Menus 3-47
INV (key) button 2-39

J
Joystick 2-90
CTR button 2-91
Override (Remote Aux) 2-123
Positioner Subpanel 2-90

K
K1 BORD and K2 BORD LEDs 2-44
K1 FILL and K2 FILL LEDs 2-44
Key
Auto Preview 2-41
AUTO SELECT KEY button 2-38
Borderline BORD button 2-40
Borderline EXTD button 2-40
Borderline NORM button 2-40
BORDERLINE OPACITY knob 2-41
Borderline OUTLINE button 2-41
Borderline SHDW button 2-40
BORDERLINE SIZE/POS knob 2-41
Channel 2-103
CHR KEY button 2-36
CLIP and GAIN knobs 2-35
Delegation 2-34
Delegation Indicators 2-13
DROP SHDW button 2-107
dropshadow H POSITION 2-107
dropshadow OPACITY knob 2-107

Index

dropshadow V POSITION knob 2-107
Dropshadows 2-107
GAIN knob 2-35
Inputs 1-8, 2-10
INV button 2-39
KEY 1 button 2-16
KEY 1 CUT button 2-22
KEY 1 MIX button 2-22
Key 1 NAM Menu 3-58
KEY 2 button 2-16
KEY 2 CUT button 2-22
KEY 2 MIX button 2-22
KEY ON Indicator 2-35
KEY OVER button 2-39
KEY PRIOR button 2-16
KEY STORE button 2-104
Layered mode 2-34
LIN KEY button 2-35
LUM KEY button 2-35
MATTE FILL and VIDEO FILL buttons
2-37
Mix Rates 2-23
Modifier buttons 2-39
ON indicator 2-15
Outputs 1-10
OVER indicators 2-39
PRI PST PTTN button 2-36
Primary Sources 2-112
SEC PST PTTN button 2-37
Secondary Sources 2-112
SHOW KEY button 2-39
Source buttons 2-38
Split Key Operation 2-38
Still Image Storage 2-104
Subpanels 2-33
Type buttons 2-35
VIDEO KEY button 2-38
Key Store
Crop Menu 3-120
Filter Menu (Blur–Video Mode) 3-122
Filter Menu (Hue Rotate) 3-125

KEY STORE button 2-104
Key Store Crop Menu 3-120
Key Store Filter Menu (Blur–Key
Mode) 3-124
Menu 3-118
Reposition Menu 3-121
Key Transition Buttons 2-22
Keyer 1-13, 2-33
Copy Menu 3-55
Delegation 2-34
Menu 3-52
Menu Tree 4-6
Preferences Menu 3-6
Subpanels 2-33
Keyer Subpanels 2-33
Keyframe
CLEAR WORK BUFR button 2-72
CONST DUR button 2-77, 2-82
COPY button 2-81
Current Keyframe 2-76
Current Time 2-76
CUT button 2-81
Definition 2-56
Deletion 2-77
Editing Constant Duration Off 2-78
Editing Functions 2-77
EFF DUR button 2-86
E-MEM 2-56
GET button 2-74
GO TO KF button 2-87
GO TO TIME button 2-86
HOLD INPUT button 2-88
Insertion 2-77
INSRT AFTER button 2-80
INSRT BEFOR button 2-79
MARK BLOCK button 2-87
MARK button 2-87
MARK CURSR button 2-76
Master Timeline 2-76
Master Timeline Keyframe 2-76
Menu 3-83
Index-9

Index

Menu Tree 4-10
MOD button 2-83
Modify Relative 2-83
modifying 2-83
NEXT button 2-86
PASTE button 2-81
Path Menu 3-80
PREV button 2-86
PUT button 2-75
REV button 2-89
REWIND button 2-89
RUN button 2-88
Run Controls 2-88
STOP NEXT KF button 2-88
TIME CURSR button 2-76
Timeline 2-76
Keypad (Master E-MEM) 2-62
Knobs
ASPECT 2-95
BKGD SUPR CHROMA 2-50
BKGD SUPR LUM 2-50
BORDERLINE OPACITY 2-41
BORDERLINE SIZE/POS 2-41
BOTTOM/CLIP 2-102
BRIGHTNESS 2-47
CLIP and GAIN (key) 2-35
GAIN 2-35
H POSITION 2-107
HUE 2-49
HUE/SOFTNESS 2-47
LEFT 2-102
Mask Controls 2-101
OPACITY 2-95, 2-107
PATTERN MIX 2-97
PRESET SIZE 2-95
RIGHT 2-102
ROTATE 2-96
SATURATION/OFFSET 2-47
SELECTIVITY 2-49
SHADOW OPACITY 2-49
SOFTNESS 2-94
Index-10

SYMMETRY 2-95
TOP/GAIN 2-102
V POSITION 2-107
WIDTH 2-95

L
Layered mode 1-13, 2-16
layered mode 2-34
Learn and Recall Operations 2-25
LEARN USER WIPE button 2-94
Learning Effects (Master E-MEM) 2-60
LEFT Mask knob 2-102
lever arm 2-14, 2-20
LIN KEY button 2-35
Load File Menu 3-134
LOCK button 2-27
LOCK button (Master E-MEM) 2-64
Looping Mode
Effects Send 2-117
Frame Store 2-118
LRN button 2-27
LRN button (Master E-MEM) 2-60, 2-63
LUM KEY button 2-35
LUM knob, CK BKGD SUPR 2-50

M
M/E 1 - M/E 3 (Preview) 2-54
M/E 1, M/E 2, M/E 3 buttons 2-58
M/E Copy Menu 3-44
M/E Mode Menu 3-43
M/E MODE Menu Tree 4-5
M/E processors 1-4
Main Menu Buttons 4-1
Map Inputs Menu 3-23
MARK BLOCK button 2-87
MARK button 2-87
MARK CURSR button 2-76

Index

Mask
BOTTOM/CLIP Knob 2-102
BOTTOM/CLIP knob 2-101
BOX button 2-100
Channel 2-103
Control 2-42
Controls 2-101
Delegation 2-99
FORCE MASK button 2-100
INH MASK button 2-100
LEFT knob 2-102
MASK BUS button 2-101
MASK bus crosspoints 2-112
MASK Bus Delegate button 2-114
Mask Bus Selection 2-114
MASK INV button 2-102
MASK STORE button 2-101
Menu 3-93
Menu Tree 4-11
PRI WIPE button 2-100
RIGHT knob 2-102
SEC WIPE button 2-100
Source Selection 2-100
Subpanel 2-99
TOP/GAIN 2-102
TOP/GAIN knob 2-101
MASK INV 2-102
Mask Store
MASK STORE button 2-104
Mask Store Menu 3-126
Master E-MEM
+/– button 2-71
• (dot) button 2-68
AUTO RCL button 2-59
AUTO RUN button 2-59
BANK 0 button 2-64
BANK 1 button 2-64
BANK button 2-63
Bank button 2-63
BKGD Enable button 2-58
CLEAR WORK BUFR button 2-72

CONST DUR button 2-77, 2-82
COPY button 2-81
Crosspoint Override 2-61
Current Keyframe 2-76
Current Register 2-72
Current Time 2-76
CUT button 2-81
DPM 1 - DPM 4 buttons 2-59
DSK button 2-58
EFF DIS button 2-66
EFF DUR button 2-86
ENABL ALL button 2-57
Enable buttons 2-57
ENTER button 2-64
GET button 2-74
GO TO KF button 2-87
GO TO TIME button 2-86
HOLD INPUT button 2-88
INSRT AFTER button 2-80
INSRT BEFOR button 2-79
Keypad 2-62
Learning Effects 2-60
LOCK button 2-64
LRN button 2-60, 2-63
M/E 1, M/E 2, M/E 3 buttons 2-58
MARK BLOCK button 2-87
MARK button 2-87
MARK CURSR button 2-76
Master Timeline 2-76
Master Timeline Keyframe 2-76
MISC button 2-58
MOD button 2-83
NEXT button 2-86
PASTE button 2-81
PGM/PST button 2-58
PREV button 2-86
PUT button 2-75
Readout 2-62
Recalling Effects 2-61
Registers 2-56
REV button 2-89
Index-11

Index

REWIND button 2-89
RUN button 2-88
Run Controls 2-88
SEQ button 2-64
STOP NEXT KF button 2-88
Subpanel 2-55
TIME CURSR button 2-76
Timeline 2-76
TRAN RATE button 2-69
UNDO button 2-68
Master Timeline 2-76
Master Timeline Keyframe 2-76
Matte
Copy Menu 3-96
Delegation 2-44
FLAT MATTE button 2-45
MATTE 2 button 2-45
MATTE FILL and VIDEO FILL buttons
2-37
MATTE SEL button 2-44
MATTE SEL indicators 2-44
Menu 3-95
Menu Tree 4-12
Modifier Controls 2-45
Subpanels 2-43
Texture Menu 3-97
Wash, Sec Wipe 2-46
Wash, User 2-46
MENU button 2-93
Menu Delegation 2-7, 3-2
Menu Structure 3-2
Menu Trees 4-2
AUX BUS Menu 4-11
CHR KEY Menu 4-7
CONFG Menu 4-3
DISK Menu 4-15
E-MEM Menu 4-9
FRAME STORE Menu 4-13
KEYER Menu 4-6
KEYFRAME Menu 4-10
M/E MODE 4-5
Index-12

M/E MODE Menu 4-5
MASK Menu 4-11
MATTE Menu 4-12
MISC Menu 4-15
STAT Menu 4-5
WIPE Menu 4-8
Menus
Aux Bus 3-92
Aux Bus Format 3-42
Beeper Prefs 3-10
Blanking 3-51
Chroma Key 3-59
Chroma Key Adjust 3-64
Chroma Key Hue Modifiers 3-62
Chroma Key Inputs 3-26
Chroma Key Secondary Color 3-61
Chroma Trap 3-54
Clear Key Memory 3-7
Configuration 3-4
Define Defaults 3-11
Diagnostics 3-50
DISK 3-131
DPM KScope Sources 3-36
DPM Map Inputs 3-38
DPM Setup 3-34
Editor Interface 3-33
E-MEM 3-73
User Preferences
300 Mode (3-M/E Only) 3-15
Normal Mode 3-13
E-MEM Register 3-75
External Interface 3-32
External Key Sync 3-21
Frame Store 3-98
GPI Inputs 3-27
GPI Outputs 3-41
Input Digital Resolution 3-20
Inputs 3-19
Installation Information 3-47
Key 1 NAM 3-58

Index

Key Store 3-118
Key Store Crop 3-120
Key Store Filter
Blur–Key Mode 3-124
Blur–Video Mode 3-122
Hue Rotate 3-125
Key Store Reposition 3-121
Keyer 3-52
Keyer Copy 3-55
Keyer Preferences 3-6
Keyframe 3-83
Keyframe Path 3-80
Load File 3-134
M/E Copy 3-44
M/E Mode 3-43
Main Buttons 4-1
Map Inputs 3-23
Mask 3-93
Mask Store 3-126
Matte 3-95
Matte Copy 3-96
Matte Texture 3-97
Miscellaneous 3-128
Name Crosspoint Button 3-25
Name File 3-139
Output Digital Resolution 3-31
Outputs 3-29
Parameter Copy 3-104
Peripheral Devices 3-79
Peripheral Interface 3-39
Peripheral Triggers 3-40
Picture Process 3-100
Posterization/Solarization 3-109
Preview Preferences 3-8
Pseudo Color
Contrast 3-111
Hue Modification 3-109
Modification 3-110
Safe Title 3-130
Save File 3-136
Set Clock 3-18
Setup on Key 3-22

Signal Processing 3-129
Soft Buttons 4-2
Source Hold Menu 3-78
Status 3-45
System Log 3-46
System Parameters 3-16
User Prefs 3-5
Utilities 3-140
Video Process 3-56
Video Store 3-105, 3-107
Video Store Crop 3-112
Video Store Filter (Blur) 3-115
Video Store Filter (Hue Rotate) 3-117
Video Store Pseudo Color 3-108
Video Store Reposition 3-114
Wipe 3-65
Wipe Copy 3-71
Wipe Modifiers 3-69
Wipe Modulation 3-70
Wipe Pattern 3-66
Wipe Texture 3-68
MISC Master E-MEM button 2-58
MISC Menu Tree 4-15
Miscellaneous Menu 3-128
Mix button 2-17
Mix/Effects Clean Feed 1-17
MOD button, Master E-MEM 2-83

N
Name Crosspoint Button Menu 3-25
Name File Menu 3-139
NEXT button, Master E-MEM 2-86
Next Transition buttons 2-15, 2-17
NO REG Message 2-25
Non-Looping Mode, Effects Send 2-119
NORM button 2-40, 2-97

O
ON indicator 2-15, 2-16
Index-13

Index

On-the-Path 2-79
OPACITY knob (key dropshadow) 2-107
OPACITY knob (pattern border) 2-95
Optional Features 1-3
Optional Outputs
Analog 1-10
Digital 1-10
Options
Borderline® Key Edge Generator 1-16
Descriptions 1-16
Dual Chroma Keyer 1-16
Frame Store 1-13, 1-17
Remote Auxiliary Bus Control Panels
1-18
Safe Title/Action Area Generator 1-17
Secondary Wipe Generator 1-16
Tally Relay Module 1-18
OUTLINE button 2-41
Output Digital Resolution Menu 3-31
Output Modules 1-10
Outputs
Effects Send 1-13
Key 1-10
Routing Frame Store 2-104
Video 1-10
Outputs Menu 3-29
OVER button 2-16
OVER indicators 2-39
Override, Crosspoint 2-61

P
Parameter Copy Menu 3-104
PASTE button (Master E-MEM) 2-81
PATT MIX button 2-97
Pattern
ASPCT button 2-95
ASPECT knob 2-95
BORD button 2-95
Direction buttons 2-97
FLIP FLOP button 2-97
Index-14

H MULTI button 2-98
NORM button 2-97
OPACITY knob 2-95
Pattern Mix controls 2-97
PATTERN MIX knob 2-97
Pattern Modifiers 2-98
POS AUTO button 2-98
POS NORM button 2-98
Positioner buttons 2-98
PRESET SIZE knob 2-95
REV button 2-97
ROT MAG button 2-96
ROT POS knob 2-96
ROT SPD knob 2-96
ROTATE knob 2-96
Rotation controls 2-96
Select buttons 2-93
SOFT button 2-94
SOFTNESS knob 2-94
SPLIT button 2-98
SYMMETRY knob 2-95
V MULTI button 2-98
WIDTH knob 2-95
Peripheral Devices Menu 3-79
Peripheral Interface Menu 3-39
Peripheral Triggers Menu 3-40
PERPH button 2-109
PGM PST (Master E-MEM) Button 2-58
PGM/PST Master E-MEM button 2-58
PGM-PST/DSK Next Transition buttons 217
Physical Description 1-4
Picture Process Menu 3-100
POS AUTO button 2-98
POS NORM button 2-98
Positioner
buttons 2-98
CTR button 2-91
Subpanel 2-90
Posterization/Solarization Menu 3-109
Power Supplies 1-5

Index
PRESET SIZE knob 2-95
PREV button (Master E-MEM) 2-86
Preview 1-13
Bus Delegation 2-114
Crosspoints 2-112
DSK button 2-54
Preferences Menu 3-8
Preview Only Select Buttons 2-113
PVW PRI button 2-53
Subpanel 2-53
Preview (Key), Auto 2-41
Preview M/E 1 - M/E 3 2-54
PRI PST PTTN button 2-36
PRI WIPE button 2-100
PRI WIPE LED 2-44
PRI WIPE WASH 2-46
Primary Crosspoints 2-10
Primary Key Sources 2-112
Primary Video Sources 2-112
Primary Wipe Patterns 2-90
Pseudo Color
Contrast Menu 3-111
Hue Modification Menu 3-109
Modification Menu 3-110
PST BLK button 2-17, 2-18
PUT button, Master E-MEM 2-75
PVW AUX bus 2-112
PVW Bus Delegate button 2-114
PVW PRI button 2-53

R
RANDOM button 2-93
Readout, Master E-MEM 2-62
Rear Panel Switches, Remote Aux 2-123
Recall Operation 2-25
Recalling Effects (E-MEM) 2-61
Re-entry Crosspoints 2-13
Remote Aux Panel 2-121
Chop Mode 2-123
Joystick Override 2-123
Operation 2-123

Rear Panel Switches 2-123
Remote Auxiliary Bus Control Panels 1-18
REV button (Master E-MEM) 2-89
REV button (wipe) 2-97
REWIND button (Master E-MEM) 2-89
RGB Input Modules 1-8
RGB signals 1-12
RIGHT Mask knob 2-102
ROT MAG button 2-96
ROT POS button 2-96
ROT SPD button 2-96
ROTATE knob 2-96
Rotation controls 2-96
RUN button 2-32
RUN button (Master E-MEM) 2-88
Run Controls (Master E-MEM) 2-88

S
Safe Title Menu 3-130
Safe Title/Action Area Generator 1-17
SATURATION/OFFSET knob 2-47
Save File Menu 3-136
SEC PST PTTN button 2-37
SEC WIPE button 2-100
SEC WIPE LED 2-45
SEC WIPE WASH 2-46
Secondary Key Sources 2-112
Secondary Source Selection 2-13
Secondary Video Sources 2-112
Secondary Wipe Generator 1-16
Secondary Wipe Patterns 2-90
SELECTIVITY knob (chroma key) 2-49
SEQ button 2-28
SEQ button (Master E-MEM) 2-64
Set Clock Menu 3-18
Setup on Key Menu 3-22
SHADOW OPACITY knob 2-49
Shadows, Key 2-107
SHDW button (Borderline) 2-40
SHDW ON button (chroma key) 2-49
SHIFT button 2-11
Index-15

Index

Shift Lock Mode 2-11
Shift pushbutton 2-9
SHOW KEY button 2-39
Signal Processing Menu 3-129
Signal Processor Description 1-4
Signal Processor Frame 1-4
SOFT button 2-94
Soft Buttons 4-2
SOFTNESS knob 2-94
Source Hold Menu 3-78
Source Selection 2-9
SPLIT button 2-98
Split Key Operation 2-38
Standard Analog Outputs 1-10
Standard Features 1-2
STAT Menu Tree 4-5
Status Menu 3-45
Still Image Storage 2-104
STOP NEXT KF button 2-88
SYMMETRY knob 2-95
System Log Menu 3-46
System Overview 1-1
System Parameters Menu 3-16

T
Tally 2-10
Tally Expansion 1-18
Tally Relay Module 1-18
TEXTURE button 2-93
TIME CURSR button 2-76
Timeline 2-76
TOP/GAIN knob 2-102
TOP/GAIN knob (mask) 2-101
Transition
Controls 2-20
Subpanels 2-14
TRAN RATE button 2-31, 2-69
Type buttons 2-17
Transition Rate Indicators 2-21
Index-16

U
Uncal Indicators 2-13
UNDO (•) button 2-30
UNDO button 2-31
UNDO button (Master E-MEM) 2-68
USER # (wipe) buttons 2-94
USER DEF WASH button 2-46
User Prefs Menu 3-5
USER WIPE UNDO button 2-94
Utilities Menu 3-140

V
V MULTI button 2-98
V POSITION knob 2-107
Video
Channel 2-103
Flow Diagram 1-15
Inputs 1-8, 2-10
Outputs 1-10
Primary Sources 2-112
Process Menu 3-56
Processing 1-12
Secondary Sources 2-112
Still Image Storage 2-104
Video and Key Inputs and Outputs 1-8
VIDEO FILL and MATTE FILL buttons
2-37
VIDEO KEY button 2-38
Video Store
Crop Menu 3-112
Filter Menu (Blur) 3-115
Filter Menu (Hue Rotate) 3-117
Menu 3-105
Mosaic Menu 3-107
Pseudo Color Menu 3-108
Reposition Menu 3-114
VIDEO STORE button 2-104

Index

W
Wash
Sec Wipe 2-46
User 2-46
WIDTH knob (pattern) 2-95
Wipe
ASPCT button 2-95
ASPECT knob 2-95
BORD button 2-95
Copy Menu 3-71
Delegation 2-93
Direction buttons 2-97
FLIP FLOP button 2-97
H MULTI button 2-98
LEARN USER WIPE button 2-94
Menu 3-65
MENU button 2-93
Menu Tree 4-8
Modifiers Menu 3-69
Modulation Menu 3-70
NORM button 2-97
OPACITY knob 2-95
PATT MIX button 2-97
Pattern Menu 3-66
Pattern Mix controls 2-97
PATTERN MIX knob 2-97

Pattern Modifiers 2-98
Pattern Select buttons 2-93
POS AUTO button 2-98
POS NORM button 2-98
Positioner buttons 2-98
Positioner Subpanel 2-90
PRESET SIZE knob 2-95
RANDOM button 2-93
REV button 2-97
ROT MAG button 2-96
ROT POS button 2-96
ROT SPD 2-96
ROTATE knob 2-96
Rotation controls 2-96
SOFT button 2-94
SOFTNESS knob 2-94
SPLIT button 2-98
Subpanel 2-92
SYMMETRY knob 2-95
TEXTURE button 2-93
Texture Menu 3-68
USER # buttons 2-94
USER WIPE UNDO button 2-94
V MULTI button 2-98
WIDTH knob 2-95
WIPE button 2-17
Working Buffer 2-72

Index-17

Index

Index-18

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.2
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 1998:02:13 09:44:21
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 3.01 for Power Macintosh
Author                          : James Wesley, Rawles
Title                           : Model 3000 Operation Reference, Software v5.3
Creator                         : FrameMaker 5.5
Modify Date                     : 1998:03:18 10:33:59
Keywords                        : operation, 3000, switcher, 5.3, 0158
Page Count                      : 332
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : OneColumn

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Tektronix Switch 3000 Users Manual Operation Reference, Software V5.3

3000 to the manual 92c8e3a9-6e5e-4c31-a905-79d680c13fa3

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation